WO2020054864A1 - Absorbent article - Google Patents

Absorbent article Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020054864A1
WO2020054864A1 PCT/JP2019/036214 JP2019036214W WO2020054864A1 WO 2020054864 A1 WO2020054864 A1 WO 2020054864A1 JP 2019036214 W JP2019036214 W JP 2019036214W WO 2020054864 A1 WO2020054864 A1 WO 2020054864A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
color
design
skin
width direction
sheet
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2019/036214
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
笙子 木村
和泉 田代
Original Assignee
王子ホールディングス株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 王子ホールディングス株式会社 filed Critical 王子ホールディングス株式会社
Priority to CN201980059848.2A priority Critical patent/CN112689495B/en
Publication of WO2020054864A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020054864A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/45Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the shape
    • A61F13/49Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/51Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the outer layers
    • A61F13/514Backsheet, i.e. the impermeable cover or layer furthest from the skin
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/56Supporting or fastening means
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/56Supporting or fastening means
    • A61F13/62Mechanical fastening means, ; Fabric strip fastener elements, e.g. hook and loop

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an absorbent article.
  • Patent Literature 1 discloses a fastening tape having a fastening area in which a transparent area and an opaque area are provided at a predetermined area ratio, so that the fastening tape can be attached at a manufacturing position. There has been proposed a disposable diaper that can be easily checked.
  • Patent Document 2 proposes a disposable diaper in which the position of the fastening tape can be easily confirmed when the disposable diaper is worn by changing the color of the fastening tape and the color of the side flap.
  • the present invention aims to provide a novel absorbent article.
  • the absorbent article according to the present invention is configured such that the two ends of the absorbent body are folded in three from a pair of fold curves that virtually extend in the longitudinal direction at both ends in the width direction of the absorber.
  • the fold at the fold curve is developed and mounted in a flat deployed state in which the fold at the fold curve is unfolded, and the first surface on the width direction outside of the pair of fold curves is an inner surface facing the skin surface side in the unfolded state.
  • the folded surface is superposed in the folded state on the second surface on the inner side in the width direction from the pair of folding curves, and the folded state is formed when the product is shipped.
  • the present absorbent article has the absorbent body, and includes a main body provided over the front body, the crotch and the back body, and the main body in the unfolded state in one of the front body and the rear body.
  • a fastening portion extending outward from an end in the width direction, and the other of the front body and the rear body, extends in the width direction, is laminated on the main body, and is disposed on the most non-skin side.
  • the main body portion is substantially the same first color over the entire area, and the patch is disposed on the non-skin side with respect to the first design portion, and is transparent or translucent; or A main part integrally forming an appearance of the first design part with the one design part; and peripheral colors located at both ends in the extending direction of the patch when viewed from the non-skin side in the unfolded state. And a pair of first identification portions each having a second color different from the first identification portion.
  • the present invention it is possible to obtain a novel absorbent article in which it is easy to determine the position of a patch and to position the fixing portion (fastening tape) when fixing the patch to the patch during use. Further, according to the present invention, it is easy to determine the front and rear of the absorbent article for the wearer.
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic view of the absorbent article in a state where the main body is folded along one virtual line (folding curve) as viewed from above on the skin surface side
  • FIG. 3B is a diagram in which the main body is folded along a pair of virtual lines.
  • FIG. 3C is a perspective view which shows the state in which the absorbent article of FIG. 3B was further folded.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating a cross section in a width direction of an IV part in FIG. 2. It is a schematic diagram which shows the cross section of the width direction in the V part of FIG. 3A. It is a schematic diagram showing a cross section at an end of a patch. It is a top view development view of the tape type paper diaper regarding 2nd embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a tape type paper diaper concerning a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 is a sectional view taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 7. It is a perspective view from the lower part of the skin non-opposite surface side of the tape-type paper diaper regarding 2nd embodiment. It is a perspective view from the lower part of the skin non-facing surface side of the tape-type paper diaper regarding a modification.
  • the absorbent article described in the present embodiment is a sanitary article that absorbs and retains liquid moisture such as urine and menstrual blood (hereinafter referred to as “excreted moisture”) excreted from the wearer when worn.
  • the absorbent article includes a tape-type paper diaper (a so-called “disposable diaper”).
  • a tape-type paper diaper hereinafter, simply referred to as “tape-type diaper” will be exemplified as an absorbent article.
  • a tape-type diaper is a type of diaper that is worn by a wearer and absorbs and retains excrement moisture.
  • the tape-type diaper has a front body and a back body separated before and after the waist, unlike a pants-type diaper in which the waist of the wearer is continuously formed in a circumferential shape.
  • This tape-type diaper is worn by various wearers, such as infants and adults, who need care.
  • a longitudinal direction is defined as a direction connecting a front body arranged to face the abdomen of the wearer and a rear body arranged to face the back. Between these front body (one side in the longitudinal direction) and the back body (the other side in the longitudinal direction) (the center in the longitudinal direction), a crotch arranged at the wearer's crotch (disposed opposite the crotch) Department is located.
  • a side facing the wearer's skin is a skin surface side (skin-facing surface side)
  • the opposite side (outside in the mounted state) of the skin side is defined as the non-skin side (skin non-opposite side).
  • a direction connecting the skin surface side and the non-skin surface side is defined as a thickness direction
  • a direction orthogonal to both the longitudinal direction and the thickness direction is defined as a width direction.
  • viewing from a direction along the thickness direction is referred to as a plan view.
  • the width direction in plan view is also called left and right.
  • the notation of a numerical value range of “1 to 100” includes both the lower limit value “1” and the upper limit value “100”. The same applies to the notation of other numerical ranges.
  • the diaper 1 is configured symmetrically with respect to the center line CL1 in the width direction.
  • the diaper 1 is roughly divided into three regions along the longitudinal direction L: a front body 1A, a crotch 1B, and a back body 1C.
  • the diaper 1 has a built-in absorber 10 extending in the longitudinal direction over the front body 1A, the crotch 1B, and the back body 1C.
  • the absorbent body 10 is arranged in the entire crotch portion 1B in the longitudinal direction, and is arranged in most of the front body 1A and the back body 1C except for the longitudinal ends.
  • the absorber 10 is a mat-shaped member that absorbs and retains moisture.
  • a mat in which a water-absorbing resin also referred to as "SAP (Super Absorbent Polymer)
  • pulverized or defibrated pulp syn-called "fluff pulp”
  • the main body 100 is a laminate of the absorber 10 and the sheets 11, 12, 13, and 14.
  • a center sheet 11 is laminated on the skin side
  • a back sheet 12 is laminated on the non-skin side.
  • the cover sheet 14 is laminated on the non-skin side of the back sheet 12.
  • a side sheet 13 is arranged on the side (outside in the width direction) of the center sheet 11.
  • the center sheet 11 has water permeability in order to allow moisture to permeate and be absorbed by the absorber 10.
  • the center sheet 11 is disposed closest to the skin surface of the diaper 1 except for the side sheet 13 (see FIG. 1). For this reason, the center sheet 11 is also referred to as a “top sheet”.
  • the center sheet 11 has a larger dimension in the width direction than the absorber 10 and covers the absorber 10 from the skin surface side.
  • the back sheet 12 has water impermeability to prevent liquid leakage from the absorber 10.
  • the side sheet 13 has hydrophobicity in order to prevent the liquid from leaking laterally.
  • the side sheet 13 is disposed closest to the skin surface of the diaper 1. For this reason, the side seat 13 is also referred to as a “top sheet”, like the center seat 11.
  • the cover sheet 14 covers the absorbent body 10 and the sheets 11, 12, and 13 from the non-skin side.
  • the cover sheet 14 is provided to reinforce the back sheet 12 and to improve the tactile sensation (for example, touch).
  • the cover sheet 14 is not limited to a single-layer structure, and may have a multi-layer structure having an inner cover sheet and an outer cover sheet.
  • the diaper 1 is provided with gathers, such as a three-dimensional gather 21, a leg gather 22, and a waist gather 23, in order to enhance the ability to follow the wearer in the worn state.
  • gathers such as a three-dimensional gather 21, a leg gather 22, and a waist gather 23, in order to enhance the ability to follow the wearer in the worn state.
  • the side sheet 13 and the back sheet 12 to which the thread rubbers 31, 32, 33 (elastic members) are attached are wrinkled.
  • an elastic member such as natural rubber or an elastic film may be used instead of or in addition to the thread rubbers 31, 32, and 33.
  • the three-dimensional gathers 21 are disposed inside the side sheet 13 in the width direction to prevent excrement from leaking to the outside in the width direction.
  • a rubber thread 31 is provided along the longitudinal direction at the inner edge in the width direction of the side sheet 13.
  • the leg gathers 22 are provided at locations where the diapers 1 are to be attached to the wearer's legs and become peripheral edges of the wearer's legs in the mounted state.
  • a thread rubber 32 is provided along the longitudinal direction at the outer edge in the width direction of the back sheet 12 in the crotch portion 1B and its periphery.
  • the waist gather 23 expands and contracts in the width direction and is provided at a longitudinal end of the back body 1C in order to adjust the fit of the wearer's waist.
  • a thread rubber 33 is provided along the width direction.
  • the diaper 1 is provided with a pair of fastening portions 6, 6 so-called fastening tapes 6, 6 attached to the rear body 1C so as to extend outward in the width direction, and the most non-skin side of the front body 1A.
  • the patch 4 is provided on the (outer surface). Here, a rectangular patch 4 is used.
  • the diaper 1 is attached to the wearer by the fastening tapes 6 and 6 being pulled and fixed to the patch 4 and fixed.
  • “fastening tape” is abbreviated as “tape”.
  • the patch 4 and the tape 6 constitute a fastening mechanism for realizing the fastening function.
  • the number of tapes 6 provided at the end in the width direction W is not particularly limited, and it is sufficient that at least one tape 6 is provided at least on both sides in the width direction.
  • the tape 6 has a base sheet 61 (hook carrier) and a locking member 62 (mechanical fastener).
  • the base 61A (indicated only at one location) on the inner side in the width direction of the base sheet 61 may be thermally fused to the side sheet 13 and / or the cover sheet 14 by, for example, heat sealing or ultrasonic sealing, It may be bonded to the side sheet 13 and / or the cover sheet 14 with an adhesive such as hot melt.
  • the base 61 ⁇ / b> A may be sandwiched between the side sheet 13 and the cover sheet 14 and may be heat-sealed or bonded to the sheets 13 and 14.
  • the widthwise outer end of the side sheet 13 is laminated on the skin surface side with respect to the base 61A.
  • the outer end in the width direction is laminated on the non-skin side.
  • an extension 61 ⁇ / b> B except for the base 61 ⁇ / b> A is provided so as to extend outward in the width direction from the sheets 13 and 14.
  • a material constituting the base sheet 61 for example, a woven cloth, a nonwoven cloth, other cloth, paper, a plastic film, or a composite material thereof can be used. Further, as a material constituting the nonwoven fabric, it is preferable to use, for example, a polyethylene-based, polypropylene-based, polyamide-based, polyester-based, polyvinyl chloride-based or polystyrene-based synthetic resin.
  • the locking member 62 is provided on the skin side of the extending portion 61B of the base sheet 61. That is, the locking member 62 and the main body 100 are connected in the width direction by the base sheet 61.
  • the locking member 62 is a member that can be engaged with the patch 4.
  • the locking member 62 may be, for example, an adhesive or an adhesive tape, or may be a planar fastener mechanically coupled to the patch 4.
  • the planar fastener is a mechanism for fixing the hook member (male member) and the loop member (female member) by mechanical connection.
  • the planar fastener is composed of, for example, a combination of a hook material having a large number of protrusions (hook-like, mushroom-like, etc.) formed on the surface and a loop material having loop-shaped fibers arranged on the surface.
  • a hook material may be used as the locking member 62 of the tape 6 and a loop material may be formed on the surface of the patch 4.
  • a number of protrusions of the hook member engage with the surface of the loop member. Therefore, according to the planar fastener, the hook member and the loop member can be firmly fixed in a peelable state.
  • it is preferable to use the planar fastener in that it can be used repeatedly and has high fixing strength.
  • the patch 4 is provided on the outer surface of the front body 1 ⁇ / b> A of the main body 100 in order to facilitate the fastening of the tape 6. That is, the patch 4 is packaged (laminated) on the non-skin side of the main body 100.
  • the locking member 62 is a hook material
  • a film-type patch having a film layer and a loop material provided on the entire outer surface thereof can be suitably used as the patch 4.
  • the hook member of the locking member 62 can be detachably engaged with the loop member.
  • a non-woven fabric of a thermoplastic resin is intermittently ultrasonically sealed with the film layer And a form in which the fibers of the nonwoven fabric form a loop.
  • a filmless type in which a nonwoven fabric of a thermoplastic resin is embossed and has no film layer can be used.
  • a material forming the film layer or the loop material a nonwoven fabric is preferable, and a nonwoven fabric using a synthetic resin or the like exemplified as the material forming the base sheet 61 is more preferable.
  • the patch 4 satisfies at least one of the functions 1 to 3 exemplified below.
  • -Function 1 Function to indicate an appropriate position for attaching the locking member 62
  • 2 Function to stabilize repeated fastening of the locking member 62
  • 3 Locking member that cannot be fixed to the cover sheet 14
  • Function 1 for Securing the Stopping Point of 62 The function 1 described above contributes to fastening of the tape 6 to an appropriate position by fastening the locking member 62 to the extension range of the patch 4 and to the wearer. Contributes to the proper wearing of the diaper 1.
  • the above function 2 provides the patch 4 with strength (physical properties) that makes it difficult for the hook member 62 to be fluffed when the hook member 62 is repeatedly fastened, so that the fastening member 62 can be stably fastened repeatedly. If the hook members are repeatedly fastened to the cover sheet 14 (nonwoven fabric), the nonwoven fabric may be fluffed or the fastening stability may be reduced. On the other hand, fixing the locking member 62 to the patch 4 contributes to suppressing fluffing and securing the fixing stability.
  • the above-mentioned function 3 can secure a place to which the locking member 62 is fixed when the locking member 62 is not fixed to the cover sheet 14.
  • the sheet stacking section 50 is a connection portion between the main body 100 and the tape 6.
  • the base 61A (the sandwiching portion, only one of which is denoted by a reference numeral) of the base sheet 61 in the width direction includes a side sheet 13 (skin side sheet) and a cover sheet 14 (non-skin side). Sheet).
  • the extension portion 61B (only one reference numeral is given) excluding the base portion 61A is provided so as to extend outward in the width direction from the sheets 13 and 14.
  • the outer edge in the width direction (hereinafter, referred to as “side outer edge”) 13 a of the side sheet 13 with respect to the base 61 A of the base sheet 61 is a skin surface.
  • the outer edge of the cover sheet 14 in the width direction (hereinafter, referred to as “cover outer edge”) 14a is stacked on the non-skin side. That is, in the sheet stacking unit 50, two types of sheets 13 and 14 are stacked on the skin side and the non-skin side with respect to the width direction inner side of the base sheet 61.
  • the dimensions in the thickness direction are exaggerated for easy understanding of each configuration.
  • the side sheet 13 and the cover sheet 14, the outer edge portions 13a, each of 14a is bonded (coupled) with the base 61A of the base sheet 61 by the adhesive layer L 12.
  • the side edge portion 13a and the base portion 3A is adhered by the first adhesive layer L 1, and the cover outer edge 14a and the base portion 3A are bonded with a second adhesive layer L 2.
  • the adhesive layer L 12 it is preferable to use an adjustable on-demand adhesive exhibits timing of adhesive performance.
  • the on-demand adhesive include a hot melt adhesive and a UV (UltraViolet) curing adhesive.
  • the hot melt adhesive is cured after being melted by applying heat.
  • the UV-curable adhesive is cured by being irradiated with ultraviolet rays. In other words, hot melt adhesives do not exhibit adhesive performance until heat is applied.
  • UV-curable adhesives do not exhibit adhesive performance until they are irradiated with ultraviolet light.
  • the adhesive layer L 12 a special equipment not be necessary as UV radiation, it is particularly preferable to use a hot melt adhesive.
  • other known adhesives may be used in the adhesive layer L 12.
  • it may be replaced with adhesive function of the adhesive layer L 12 by adhesive means such as ultrasonic welding or heat sealing.
  • the main body 100 is provided with a pair of design portions 5A and 5B that can be viewed from the front 1A and the back 1C.
  • the design units 5A and 5B have characters, figures, symbols, patterns or colors or a combination thereof (hereinafter simply referred to as "patterns"), and can visually distinguish the design units 5A and 5B from the other parts. Area.
  • Such design portions 5A and 5B are provided by performing printing on the non-skin side of the back sheet 12 or the cover sheet 14, for example.
  • the design part 5 is separately provided between the back sheet 12 and the cover sheet 14.
  • FIG. 2 shows the design sections 5A and 5B provided on the back sheet 12.
  • the area where the design parts 5A and 5B are arranged is not particularly limited.
  • a longitudinal boundary is defined in a range from a longitudinal end of the main body 100 to a position of about 3 or ⁇ of a longitudinal dimension.
  • the design portions 5A and 5B are defined, and the boundaries in the width direction are defined in a range substantially equal to the width dimension of the absorber 10.
  • the design portions 5A and 5B may have the same design or different designs.
  • the design parts 5A and 5B may have the same design at least in part. In the following, “design units 5A and 5B” may be simply referred to as “design unit 5”.
  • the design sections 5A and 5B exemplified here include a front design section 5A (first design section) of the front body 1A and a rear design section 5B (second design section) of the back body 1C. Is provided.
  • the appearance of the design units 5A and 5B of the present embodiment is the same or similar to each other.
  • the “design portions 5A and 5B having the same or similar appearance” here include at least one of modes 1 to 4 listed below.
  • -Aspect 1 Design parts 5A and 5B having the same or similar color or pattern
  • -Aspect 2 Design parts 5A and 5B with the same or similar pattern arrangement
  • -Aspect 3 Design portions 5A and 5B having the same or substantially the same width dimension.
  • Aspect 4 Design portions 5A and 5B having the same or substantially the same longitudinal dimension
  • the design portions 5A and 5B have a line-symmetric or substantially line-symmetric appearance in the longitudinal direction.
  • the patch 4 is exteriorly provided on the front design part 5A (disposed on the non-skin side). As shown in FIG. 2, the patch 4 has an overlapping part 4A (main part) with the front design part 5A, and the tape 6 is fixed to the overlapping part 4A.
  • the patch 4 includes non-overlapping parts 4B and 4B that do not overlap with the design part 5 on the outside in the width direction of the overlapping part 4A. May have.
  • the patch 4 having light transmittance that is, a patch 4 using a transparent or translucent material, or a color similar to the color of the previous design portion 5A is provided. Provision of an overlapping portion 4A integrally forming the appearance of the front design portion 5A, such as the patch 4, the patch 4 having the same design as the front design portion 5A, and the patch 4 having at least a part of the same design as the front design portion 5A. In the case where the patch 4 thus obtained is packaged in the design unit 5, the position of the patch 4 tends to be more difficult to determine.
  • the “light transmittance” of the patch 4 is a function of transmitting light to the design portion 5 at the position where the patch 4 is provided and transmitting the reflected light reflected by the design portion 5 to a visible extent. is there.
  • similar colors means colors of the same system including substantially the same colors, that is, colors having the same or similar hue.
  • the diaper 1 is stored in a package in a state of being folded into a predetermined shape at the time of shipment.
  • the tape 6 is folded at the width direction end of the main body 100 with the skin side inside.
  • both ends in the width direction W of the absorber 10 are arranged inside the virtual lines VL1 and VL2 in the width direction.
  • a portion outside the imaginary lines VL1 and VL2 in the width direction is folded back with the skin side inside.
  • the diaper 1 is folded in three in the longitudinal direction L by virtual lines VL3 and VL4 (folding lines) extending in the width direction W, and becomes a folded state of a predetermined shape (see FIG. 3C). .
  • Such a folding process is generally incorporated into a part of the diaper 1 manufacturing line. If the diaper 1 in the unfolded state is not folded at an appropriate position (for example, the virtual lines VL1 and VL2), the diaper 1 in the folded state does not have a predetermined shape, and its size varies. As a result, when the folded diaper 1 is stored in the package, the package may be damaged. That is, it becomes difficult to store the folded diaper 1 in the package, which may cause a decrease in the productivity of the diaper 1. In particular, since the folding process along the virtual lines VL1 and VL2 is performed while checking the skin surface side of the diaper 1 in the unfolded state, the main body 100 has substantially the same color when viewed from the skin surface in a plan view. In such a case, it is difficult to determine an appropriate position to be folded.
  • an appropriate position for example, the virtual lines VL1 and VL2
  • the user When using the folded diaper 1 (see FIG. 3C), the user first unfolds the diaper 1 along the virtual lines VL3 and VL4 in the longitudinal direction L (see FIG. 3B). Next, the user develops a return by the virtual lines VL1 and VL2. Then, the tape 6 folded back to the skin side is deployed, and the diaper 1 is attached to the wearer.
  • a state where at least the virtual lines VL1 and VL2 are folded is referred to as a “folded state”.
  • the first surface in the width direction outside the pair of virtual lines VL1 and VL2 faces and overlaps the second surface in the width direction inside the pair of virtual lines VL1 and VL2.
  • a planar state in which the folds at the virtual lines VL1, VL2, VL3, and VL4 are developed is referred to as an “expanded state”. More specifically, as shown in the right half of FIG.
  • first folded state the folded state of the tape 6 with the skin side inward at the width direction end of the main body 100 is referred to as a “first folded state”. (First state) ". Also, as shown in the left half of FIG. 3A and FIG. 3B, a state where the virtual lines VL1 and VL2 are folded and a state where the virtual lines VL3 and VL4 are not folded is referred to as a “second folded state (second state)”. Called. In the second folded state, the extended portion 61B in the first folded state is folded so as to face the side sheet 13 and be superposed. Further, a state of being folded along the virtual lines VL1, VL2, VL3, and VL4 as shown in FIG. 3C is referred to as a “third folded state (third state)”.
  • the user unfolds the diaper 1 while viewing it from the skin side in a plan view, and proceeds with the mounting work on the wearer.
  • Design a patch 4 having light transmittance (a patch 4 using a transparent or translucent material), a patch 4 having the same design as the design unit 5, and a patch 4 having at least a part of the same design as the design unit 5.
  • visual confusion between the design part 5 and the patch 4 is likely to occur, so that the user who sees the diaper 1 in the third folded state shown in FIG. Have difficulty. That is, the user may not be able to determine the front and rear of the diaper 1 depending on the position of the patch 4.
  • the front body 1A and the back body 1C have a shape which is line-symmetric or substantially line-symmetric with respect to a longitudinal center line CL2 (reference line, see FIG. 3), or Since the appearances of the design portions 5A and 5B are the same or similar to each other, it is difficult to distinguish the front and rear of the diaper 1 by simply viewing the diaper 1 in the deployed state from the skin side.
  • a pair of first identification portions 4C, 4C having different colors (second colors) from the surrounding colors when the diaper 1 in the unfolded state is viewed from the non-skin side are provided at both ends in the width direction of the patch 4.
  • the colors of the first identification sections 4C and 4C are different from the colors of the overlapping section 4A of the patch 4 and the main body 100.
  • the pair of first identification portions 4C, 4C located at both ends in the extending direction of the patch 4 have substantially the same color.
  • the overlapping portion 4A of the patch 4 integrally forms the appearance of the front design portion 5A.
  • the first identification portions 4C and 4C can be visually recognized when viewed from the skin side in a plan view (see FIG. 3B). Therefore, the first identification sections 4C, 4C can be used as markers for determining whether or not the folding process has been performed at an appropriate position. That is, by detecting the positions of the first identification units 4C and 4C by the marker recognizing means, the diaper that has been folded at an appropriate position and the diaper that has been folded at an inappropriate position can be distinguished. Can be determined.
  • the marker recognizing means include a recognizing device using a reflection-type or transmission-type phototube, an imaging device using a CCD camera or a general camera, and the like.
  • the diaper 1 folded in a predetermined shape can be efficiently manufactured by performing three-fold processing on the diaper 1 that has been folded at the above-described appropriate position using the virtual lines VL3 and VL4. As a result, the storage of the folded diaper 1 in the package is improved, and the productivity of the diaper 1 is excellent.
  • the diaper that has been folded at an inappropriate position is expanded and the folding process is performed again.
  • ⁇ Fastening tape> At least a part of the tape 6 has a similar color (second similar color) to the pair of first identification portions 4C, 4C.
  • the base sheet 61 and the locking member 62 have different colors, and the base sheet 61 or the locking member 62 and the first identification portions 4C, 4C have similar colors.
  • the base sheet 61 has a color similar to the main body 100 (first similar color)
  • the locking member 62 has a similar color (second color) to the pair of first identification portions 4C and 4C. (Similar colors).
  • the base sheet 61 is a color similar to the pair of first identification portions 4C, 4C (second similar color)
  • the locking member 62 is a color similar to the main body 100 (first similar color). is there. That is, although it is difficult to distinguish one of the base sheet 61 and the locking member 62 from the main body 100 due to the difference in color, the other of the base sheet 61 and the locking member 62 is colored. It is preferable to use a configuration that can be easily distinguished by the difference between the two. As described above, since the front and rear of the diaper 1 can be determined by the base sheet 61 or the locking member 62 of the second similar color, the user can quickly position the diaper 1 with respect to the wearer.
  • the locking member 62 having a color different from white can be easily adjusted in color, and the base sheet 61 whose color can be easily adjusted compared to the locking member 62 is colored. Therefore, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
  • the pair of first identification portions 4C, 4C has a color (second color) different from the surrounding color.
  • the colors of the first identification portions 4C and 4C are different from the colors of the overlapping portion 4A of the patch 4 and the main body 100.
  • the patches 4 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line CL1 in the width direction of the diaper 1 (see FIG. 1).
  • the user exists between the center position of the diaper 1 and the pair of first identification portions 4C, 4C.
  • the position of the patch 4 can be determined.
  • the user can guess the position of the diaper 1 from the position of the patch 4. Therefore, positioning of the diaper 1 with respect to the wearer is facilitated.
  • the tape 6 can be easily fixed to the patch 4, that is, the positioning of the tape 6 with respect to the patch 4 becomes easy.
  • the patches 4 may be arranged asymmetrically with respect to the center line CL1. Even with the patches 4 arranged in this manner, the user can determine the position of the patches 4 by the pair of first identification units 4C, 4C.
  • the “first identification unit 4C, 4C” may be simply referred to as “first identification unit 4C”.
  • the base sheet 61 has a different color from the locking member 62, the user can easily grasp the position of the locking member 62 on the tape 6.
  • the base sheet 61 or the locking member 62 has a similar color to the first identification portions 4C, 4C, the user can easily visually understand that members having similar colors can be stopped. it can.
  • the user can easily determine the front and rear of the diaper 1 based on the positional relationship between the first identification sections 4C and 4C and the tape 6. Therefore, the user can quickly fix the tape 6 to the patch 4 existing between the first identification portions 4C, 4C, and wear the diaper 1 on the wearer with an appropriate fit.
  • the patch 4 extends outward in the width direction from the pair of virtual lines VL1 and VL2.
  • the first identification portions 4C, 4C can be visually recognized in a plan view from the skin side. Further, when the diaper 1 in the deployed state is viewed from the non-skin side, the first identification portions 4C, 4C can be visually recognized. In other words, when the diaper 1 in the folded state is viewed from the non-skin side, the design portions 5A and 5B are visible, but the first identification portions 4C and 4C are not visible.
  • the first identification portions 4C, 4C are visible, but the design portions 5A, 5B are not visible. Therefore, a user who looks at the diaper 1 in the folded state from the skin side or a user who looks at the diaper 1 in the unfolded state from the non-skin side can estimate the front and rear of the diaper 1 by determining the position of the patch 4. . Therefore, the user can quickly position the diaper 1 with respect to the wearer.
  • the design when the diaper 1 in the folded state is viewed from the non-skin side. The decorativeness of the parts 5A and 5B can be ensured.
  • the method for forming the first identification portion 4C is not particularly limited.
  • the first identification portion 4C can be formed by performing a printing process on the patch 4.
  • the base sheet 61 may have a single color or two or more colors as long as the base sheet 61 has a color different from that of the locking member 62.
  • the locking member 62 may be a single color or have two or more colors. When the base sheet 61 and / or the locking member 62 have two or more colors, the colors that occupy the widest area in plan view may be different from each other.
  • the tape 6 has a predetermined translucency that allows the color (color) of the tape 6 to be transparent.
  • the color of the tape 6 will be described, and thereafter, the predetermined translucency will be described.
  • the tape 6 is at least partially different in color from the color of the main body 100.
  • the main body 100 having substantially the same white color over the entire region is taken as an example, and the tape 6 having the color patterns 1 and 2 shown below is exemplified.
  • ⁇ Color pattern 1 ⁇ In the color pattern 1, the colors of the respective parts are combined as shown below.
  • -Base material sheet 61 Color similar to the color (first color) of main body 100 (first similar color)
  • Locking member 62 a color different from the color of main body 100 (third color)
  • ⁇ Color pattern 2 ⁇ In the color pattern 2, the colors of the respective parts are combined as shown below.
  • the base sheet 61 a color in which the inner layer surface 61b on the side where the locking member 62 is laminated is different from the color of the main body 100 (third color)
  • Locking member 62 a color similar to the color (first color) of main body 100 (first similar color)
  • the portion (main portion) 61 a of the base sheet 61 excluding the inner layer surface 61 b is a color similar to the color of the main body 100 (first similar color).
  • substantially the same color means that all of brightness, hue, and saturation are substantially the same. In other words, “substantially the same color” means that even when the colors to be compared are not completely the same, the colors to be compared can be visually distinguished under sunlight or normal illumination light. It has a difficult degree of identity.
  • similar colors means colors of the same type including substantially the same colors, that is, colors having the same or similar hues.
  • Different colors (colors) means that at least one of brightness, hue, and saturation is different. For example, not only those having different hues but also those having the same saturation but different saturation or lightness are “different colors”.
  • the difference in L * value between two points to be measured is ⁇ L *
  • the difference in a * value is ⁇ a.
  • the color difference ⁇ E * ab [( ⁇ L * ) 2 + ( ⁇ a * ) 2 + ( ⁇ b * ) 2 ] 1/2 is obtained.
  • the color difference ⁇ E * ab is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more, it can be said that the colors are different to the extent that the user can visually recognize them.
  • the “different color” means that the color difference is within the above range.
  • the “similar color” means that the color difference is preferably less than 1.5, and the “substantially the same color” means that the color difference is preferably less than 1.0.
  • the “predetermined translucency” of the present embodiment is an optical property in which the third color of the tape 6 can be seen through when the diaper 1 in the first folded state or the second folded state is viewed from the skin side. Means properties.
  • two configurations having a predetermined light-transmitting property will be exemplified.
  • first translucency a predetermined translucency in which the third color of the locking member 62 can be seen through the base sheet 61 from the skin side when the diaper 1 in the first folded state is viewed from the skin side.
  • first translucency is a predetermined color in which the third color of the locking member 62 can be seen through the base sheet 61 from the skin side when the diaper 1 in the first folded state is viewed from the skin side.
  • first translucency is a predetermined color in which the third color of the locking member 62 can be seen through the base sheet 61 from the skin side when the diaper 1 in the first folded state is viewed from the skin side.
  • first translucency is a predetermined color in which the
  • first translucency can be realized by the following three embodiments I to III.
  • -Aspect I The total light transmittance of the base sheet 61 is 65 to 99%.
  • -Aspect II A plurality of through holes are provided in the base sheet 61.
  • -Aspect III The total light transmittance of the base sheet 61 is According to the base sheet 61 having the total light transmittance described in the embodiment I, the diaper 1 in the first folded state is viewed from the skin side. (When viewed from the side opposite to the side on which the locking members 62 are laminated with respect to the base sheet 61), the color of the locking members 62 is visible through the base sheet 61 in the thickness direction. is there.
  • the through-hole of Embodiment II has a circumscribed circle diameter of 0.1 to 1.0 [mm].
  • the base sheet 61 preferably has a plurality of through holes.
  • each through-hole is formed in a scattered point shape at intervals.
  • Each of the through holes has a circular shape in plan view of the base sheet 61.
  • a through hole having a polygonal shape in plan view of the base sheet 61 may be employed.
  • the plurality of through holes are formed in a staggered arrangement pattern. According to such a through hole, when the diaper 1 in the first folded state is viewed from the skin surface side, the color of the locking member 62 is directly and partially visible through the through hole. According to the film-shaped portion described in the aspect III, when the diaper 1 in the first folded state is viewed from the skin side, the color of the locking member 62 can be visually recognized through the film-shaped portion.
  • a predetermined translucency when the diaper 1 is in the second folded state is set.
  • the “second translucency” refers to a member (for example, the cover sheet 14) that is stacked closer to the skin than the locking member 62 and the inner surface 61 b when the diaper 1 in the second folded state is viewed from the skin.
  • Base portion 61A, side sheet 13) means a predetermined translucency in which the color of locking member 62 and inner layer surface 61b can be seen through.
  • the above-mentioned “second translucency” can be realized by the embodiment IV exemplified below.
  • Aspect IV The total light transmittance of the cover sheet 14, the base 61A, and the side sheet 13 is 50 to 99%. According to the cover sheet 14, the base 61A, and the side sheet 13 having the total light transmittance described in the aspect IV, When the diaper 1 in the second folded state is viewed from the skin side, the colors of the locking member 62 and the inner layer surface 61b can be seen through. The above “visible” means that the color of the locking member 62 can be perceived by the naked eye through the sheet laminated portion 50 from the skin side.
  • the tape 6 is folded back on the manufacturing line at the width direction end of the main body 100 with the skin side facing inward, and the phantom lines VL1 and VL2 are used.
  • the portion of the main body 100 outside the imaginary lines VL1 and VL2 in the width direction is turned upside down, the locking member 62 or the inner layer surface 61b of the base sheet 61 when viewed from the skin side in a plan view. (See FIG. 3B).
  • the color of the locking member 62 can be recognized through the sheet stacking portion 50 in a plan view from the skin side shown in FIG.
  • the color of the locking member 62 and the inner layer surface 61b can be used as a marker for determining whether or not the folding process has been performed at an appropriate position. That is, by detecting the mutual position of the locking member 62 and the inner layer surface 61b of the tape 6 provided at both ends of the main body 100 by the marker recognition means, the diaper folded at an appropriate position can be It can be determined that the diaper has been folded at an inappropriate position.
  • the marker recognizing unit include an optical recognizing unit such as a recognizing device using a reflection-type or transmissive-type phototube, and an imaging device using a CCD camera or a general camera.
  • the diaper 1 folded in a predetermined shape can be efficiently manufactured by performing the tri-folding process using the virtual lines VL3 and VL4 on the diaper 1 that has been folded at the above-described appropriate position. As a result, the storage of the folded diaper 1 in the package is improved, and the productivity of the diaper 1 is excellent. The diaper that has been folded at an inappropriate position is expanded and the folding process is performed again.
  • the user can start the diaper 1 in the third folded state (see FIG. 3C) in the second folded state in which the diaper 1 is folded back along the virtual lines VL3 and VL4 (see FIG. 3C).
  • the color of the locking member 62 or the color of the inner layer surface 61b of the base sheet 61 can be visually recognized in a plan view from the skin side due to the second light-transmitting property described above.
  • the first folded state in which the folding at the virtual lines VL1 and VL2 is developed from the second folded state (see the right half of FIG.
  • the first light-transmitting property described above causes When viewed in a plan view, the color of the locking member 62 or the inner layer surface 61b can be visually recognized. Therefore, the user can estimate the front and rear of the diaper 1 by determining the positions of the locking member 62 and the inner layer surface 61b. Therefore, the user can quickly position the diaper 1 with respect to the wearer.
  • the total light transmittance of the sheet laminated portion 50 is determined by selecting the material constituting each sheet (for example, the base sheet 61, the side sheet 13 and the cover sheet 14) (for example, when a nonwoven fabric is used, its fiber diameter [dtex]). (Decitex)], the basis weight thereof, the blending amount of filler [titanium oxide, etc.]), the thickness of each sheet, and the like.
  • the fiber diameter is preferably 0.5 to 1.2 dtex, and the basis weight is 16 g. / M 2 or less.
  • the fiber diameter is obtained by dividing the sheet into approximately 5 equal parts in the width direction, sampling a 1 cm square test piece from each of the approximately five equally divided sheets, measuring the fiber diameter by 20 points each with a microscope. It can be calculated from the average value.
  • the basis weight can be calculated by arbitrarily collecting five test pieces of 20 cm long by 20 cm wide from the sheet, measuring the mass, and converting the average value to the weight per unit area.
  • the total light transmittance of the base sheet 61 should be 65 to 99%. , And more preferably 75 to 99%.
  • the tape 6, especially the base sheet 61 bonded to the main body 100 have a predetermined tensile strength in the width direction W. Since the tensile strength of the base sheet 61 is adjusted by its thickness, in order to obtain the base sheet 61 having a predetermined tensile strength in the width direction W, the thickness tends to be large. On the other hand, when the thickness dimension of the base sheet 61 is increased, the total light transmittance of the base sheet 61 is reduced, and it tends to be difficult to adjust the total light transmittance of the sheet stacked unit 50. By providing a plurality of through holes in the base sheet 61, it becomes easy to obtain the base sheet 61 having an appropriate tensile strength and a predetermined total light transmittance.
  • the film-shaped portion is a portion where the constituent fibers (for example, synthetic resin fibers) of the base sheet 61 are thermally melted, lose the fiber form, and are formed into a film.
  • the film-shaped portion can be formed by performing a heat and pressure treatment on the base sheet 61. The conditions of the heating and pressurizing treatment are appropriately set according to the constituent fibers of the base sheet 61.
  • the film portion has a higher total light transmittance than the base sheet 61 before being formed into a film. Therefore, by using the base sheet 61 having the film-shaped portion, the adjustment of the total light transmittance of the sheet laminated portion 50 becomes easy.
  • the diaper 1 is viewed in a plan view from the skin side in the first folded state, the visibility of the color of the locking member 62 is improved.
  • substantially the same color means that all of the brightness, hue, and saturation are substantially the same. In other words, “substantially the same color” means that even when the colors to be compared are not completely the same, the colors to be compared can be visually distinguished under sunlight or normal illumination light. It has a difficult degree of identity.
  • the “first identification unit 4C” is an area where the first identification unit 4C and other parts can be visually distinguished. More specifically, when the diaper 1 is unfolded (see FIG. 2), the first identification unit 4 ⁇ / b> C includes the front design unit 5 ⁇ / b> A and the main body in addition to the other parts of the patch 4 when viewed from the non-skin side. It has a color different from that of the portion 100 or a color different from other portions of the patch 4 and the main body 100.
  • the "other part in the patch 4" refers to a part other than the first identification units 4C and 4C in the patch 4, and includes, for example, an overlapping part 4A and a non-overlapping part 4B.
  • the colors of the other portions of the patch 4 include the color of the overlapping portion 4A and the color of the non-overlapping portion 4B.
  • the colors of the main body 100 when viewed in plan from the non-skin side include the colors of the design unit 5 and the colors of the main body 100 other than the design unit 5.
  • the “color of the front design part 5A” refers to a color that occupies the largest area when the front design part 5A is viewed in plan.
  • the “color of the design unit 5” refers to a color that occupies the largest area when the design unit 5 is viewed in a plan view.
  • the “color of the main body 100” may be described as a color mainly visible when the main body 100 is viewed in plan from the non-skin side (hereinafter, may be referred to as “non-skin side ground color”). ). Specifically, when the developed diaper 1 shown in FIG. 2 is viewed from the non-skin side, the color occupying the largest area in the main body 100 is referred to as the non-skin side ground color.
  • the main body 100 having substantially the same white color (first color) over the entire region will be described as an example. That is, white is exemplified as the ground color of the main body 100.
  • the color occupying the widest area in the main body 100 is the ground color.
  • the first identification unit 4C uses the color of the overlap unit 4A and It has a color different from the color of the front design part 5A.
  • the first identification part 4C determines the color of the overlap part 4A, the color of the front design part 5A, and the ground color of the non-skin side. Has different colors.
  • the front design part 5A and the first identification part 4C do not overlap, the first identification part 4C has a color different from the color of the non-overlapping part 4B and the ground color of the non-skin surface side of the main body part 100.
  • “Different colors” means that at least one of brightness, hue, and saturation is different. For example, not only those having different hues but also those having the same hue but different chroma or lightness are “different colors”. “Similar colors” means colors of the same type including substantially the same colors, that is, colors having the same or similar hues.
  • the tape 6 passes through the base sheet 61 and the locking members 62. Is preferably seen through. Specifically, in the diaper 1 in the unfolded state, in a state where the locking member 62 is covered by the base sheet 61 from the non-skin side, the tape 6 is transparent through the second similar color of the locking member. It is preferable to have a predetermined translucency seen from the surface side. This predetermined translucency can be realized by the following two examples V and VI. -Aspect V: The total light transmittance of the base sheet 61 is 65 to 99%.-Aspect VI: The base sheet 61 is provided with a film-formed portion (film-formed portion).
  • the base sheet 61 having the total light transmittance described in the aspect V at least the base sheet 61 is transparent or translucent.
  • the base sheet 61 when the diaper 1 in the folded state is viewed from the skin side (when viewed from the side opposite to the side on which the locking members 62 are stacked with respect to the base sheet 61), When the diaper 1 in the deployed state is viewed from the non-skin side, the color of the locking member 62 is visible through the base sheet 61 in the thickness direction.
  • the film-shaped portion described in the aspect VI when the diaper 1 in the folded state is viewed from the skin side or the diaper 1 in the unfolded state is viewed from the non-skin side, the color of the locking member 62 is changed. Visible through the film.
  • the film-shaped portion is a portion where the constituent fibers (for example, synthetic resin fibers) of the base sheet 61 are thermally melted, lose the fiber form, and are formed into a film.
  • the film-shaped portion can be formed by performing a heat and pressure treatment on the base sheet 61. The conditions of the heating and pressurizing treatment are appropriately set according to the constituent fibers of the base sheet 61.
  • the film portion has a higher total light transmittance than the base sheet 61 before being formed into a film.
  • the film portion preferably has a total light transmittance of 65 to 99% from the viewpoint of securing a predetermined light transmittance.
  • the change rate of the total light transmittance before and after the film formation calculated by the following equation (1) is preferably 65 to 99%.
  • Change rate of total light transmittance before and after film formation [%] Total light transmittance after film formation / Total light transmittance before film formation ⁇ 100 (1)
  • the total light transmittance of the overlapping part 4A is preferably 65 to 99%.
  • at least the overlapping portion 4A is transparent or translucent. In such an aspect, visual confusion between the front design part 5A and the patch 4 is likely to occur, and the position of the patch 4 tends to be more difficult to determine.
  • the patch 4 since the patch 4 has the first identification portions 4C and 4C at both ends in the width direction W, the user can easily determine the position of the patch 4.
  • the total light transmittance of the overlapping portion 4A is determined by selecting the material constituting the patch 4 (for example, in the case of using a nonwoven fabric, the fiber diameter [dtex (decitex)], the basis weight thereof, and the blending of filler [titanium oxide etc.] Amount), the thickness of the patch 4, and the like.
  • the fiber diameter is preferably 0.5 to 1.2 dtex
  • the basis weight is preferably 16 g / m 2 or less. The method for calculating the fiber diameter and the basis weight is as described above.
  • the ratio of the area of the overlapping portion 4A to the area of the front design portion 5A is preferably 30 to 70%.
  • the overlapping portion 4A may have a color different from the color of the front design portion 5A. Since the color of the front design portion 5A is different from the color of the overlapping portion 4A, the position of the patch 4 can be easily determined.
  • the width dimension of the patch 4 is larger than the width dimension of the front design part 5A, and the first identification parts 4C, 4C are spaced outward from the front design part 5A in the width direction.
  • the patch 4 has a non-overlapping portion 4B that does not overlap with the front design portion 5A outside the overlapping portion 4A in the width direction. That is, the patch 4 of this aspect has the overlapping portion 4A, the non-overlapping portion 4B, and the first identifying portion 4C.
  • the dimension in the width direction of the non-overlapping portion 4B is not particularly limited, but is preferable from the viewpoint of appropriately separating the first identification portions 4C, 4C from the overlapping portion 4A and improving the visibility of the first identification portions 4C, 4C. Is 5 mm or more, more preferably 10 mm or more, preferably 30 mm or less, more preferably 20 mm or less.
  • the patch 4 is arranged inside the tape 6 in the width direction. In other words, the dimension of the patch 4 that is spaced apart from the center line CL1 in the width direction (see FIG. 1) in the width direction is shorter than that of the tape 6.
  • the first identification portions 4C, 4C are arranged on the inner side in the width direction with respect to the width direction end of the diaper 1.
  • the patch 4 when the user unfolds the folded back of the main body 100 by the virtual lines VL3 and VL4 (see FIG. 3B), the user can use the skin on the diaper 1 (see FIG. 3C) in the storage state.
  • the first identification portions 4C, 4C can be visually recognized in a plan view from the surface side. Further, the user can easily visually recognize the first identification portions 4C and 4C based on the color difference with the ground color on the non-skin surface side and the color difference with the non-overlapping portion 4B, so that the position of the patch 4 can be easily grasped.
  • the color difference between the first identification units 4C and 4C and the ground color on the non-skin side is measured by using a commercially available colorimeter, and CIE1976 (L * a * b) specified in JIS Z 8729 and the like is performed. * ) It can be obtained by comparing values quantified based on the color space. Specifically, the difference in L * value between two points to be measured (the color of the first identification unit 4C and the ground color on the non-skin side) is ⁇ L * , and the difference in a * value is ⁇ a * , b * value.
  • the color difference ⁇ E * ab [( ⁇ L * ) 2 + ( ⁇ a * ) 2 + ( ⁇ b * ) 2 ] 1/2 .
  • the “different colors” means that the color difference is within the above range.
  • the “similar color” means that the color difference is preferably less than 1.5, and the “substantially the same color” means that the color difference is preferably less than 1.0.
  • the “color of the first identification unit 4C” refers to a color that occupies the largest area when the first identification unit 4C is viewed in a plan view.
  • the patch 4 has a pair of flaps 4D, 4D at both ends in the width direction.
  • the flaps 4D, 4D are free ends formed at both ends of the patch 4.
  • “flaps 4D, 4D” may be simply described as “flaps 4D”.
  • the flap 4D is provided at an end of the patch 4 together with the first identification unit 4C.
  • the user can determine the position of the patch 4 by touch.
  • the width dimension W 4D flap 4D is not particularly limited. Discrimination tactile the width direction dimension W 4D flap 4D is too small it tends to become difficult.
  • the width dimension W 4D flap 4D is preferably 1mm or more, more preferably 3mm or more, preferably 10mm or less, and more preferably 7mm or less.
  • the longitudinal dimension of the flap 4D is substantially the same as the longitudinal dimension of the patch 4.
  • the ratio of the width dimension W 4D of the flap 4D to the width dimension W 4C of the first identification portion 4C (W 4D / W 4C ). Is preferably at least 15%, more preferably at least 25%, preferably at most 50%, more preferably at most 40%.
  • the patch 4 may have a pattern.
  • the position of the patch 4 can be determined based on the pattern.
  • a pattern can be formed by printing or embossing.
  • the pattern may be formed on the entire patch 4 or on a part thereof.
  • a pattern can be formed only on the first identification portions 4C, 4C. From the viewpoint of facilitating the determination of the position of the patch 4, it is preferable to apply a pattern to the entire patch 4.
  • the specific dimensions of the patch 4, the design unit 5, and the like are as follows.
  • the width dimension of the patch 4 is usually 100 mm or more, preferably 150 mm or more, and usually 250 mm or less, preferably 200 mm or less.
  • the longitudinal dimension of the patch 4 is usually 20 mm or more, preferably 30 mm or more, and is usually 60 mm or less, preferably 50 mm or less.
  • FIG. 2 shows the patch 4 having a width dimension of 180 mm and a longitudinal dimension of 40 mm.
  • the width dimension W 4C of the first identification portion 4C is generally 5mm or more, preferably 10mm or more, typically 25mm or less, preferably 20mm or less.
  • the longitudinal dimension of the first identification portion 4C is usually at least 20 mm, preferably at least 30 mm, and is usually at most 60 mm, preferably at most 50 mm.
  • a pair of first identification portions 4 ⁇ / b> C having the same size in the longitudinal direction as the length of the patch 4 and colored in a region 15 mm inward in the width direction from the end of the patch 4. 4C is shown.
  • the width direction dimension of the design part 5 is usually 80 mm or more, preferably 100 mm or more, and usually 200 mm or less, preferably 150 mm or less.
  • the length of the design portion 5 in the longitudinal direction is usually 80 mm or more, preferably 100 mm or more, and usually 200 mm or less, preferably 150 mm or less.
  • FIG. 2 shows the design portions 5A and 5B each having a width dimension and a longitudinal dimension of 120 mm.
  • the color of the base sheet 61 may be a color different from the white color of the main body 100 and may be a second similar color similar to the pair of first identification portions 4C and 4C.
  • the locking member 62 may be a color similar to the white color of the main body 100 (first color or first similar color). That is, although it is difficult to distinguish the locking member 62 from the main body 100 due to the difference in color, a configuration is adopted in which the base sheet 61 is easily distinguishable due to the difference in color. For example, it is difficult to adjust the color of the locking member 62 having a color different from white (so-called colored color), which may increase the manufacturing cost.
  • the locking member 62 of the same color as the white color of the main body 100 can be easily adjusted in color, and the base sheet 61 whose color can be easily adjusted compared to the locking member 62 is colored. Therefore, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
  • the base sheet 61 has a color similar to the white color of the main body 100 (first color or first similar color), and the locking member 62 has a color different from the white color of the main body 100 (second color, second color). (Similar colors).
  • the rear body on which the tape 6 is arranged according to the color of the tape 6. 1C can be determined, and the front and rear of the diaper 1 can be determined. Furthermore, when the color of the tape 6 and the color of the first identification portions 4C and 4C of the patch 4 are similar colors, it is easy to determine where the tape 6 is fixed, which contributes to the improvement of the diaper 1's mounting property. .
  • the tape 6 may be white (first color) over the entire area. In this case, although the front and rear of the diaper 1 cannot be determined by the color of the tape 6 as described above, a means for determining the front and rear of the diaper 1 by the color of the first identification unit 4C is secured, and Coloring cost can be suppressed.
  • the tape 6 may have a color (fourth similar color) similar to the color (fourth color) of the design parts 5A and 5B.
  • the base material sheet 61 has a fourth similar color similar to the design portions 5A and 5B.
  • the colors (fourth color) of the design units 5A and 5B are the white color (first color) of the main body 100 described above, the color (second color) of the first identification unit 4C, and the third color of the tape 6. The color may be different from any of the colors.
  • the fourth color may be the same color as any one of the first color, the second color, and the third color, or a color similar to any one of the first, second, and third colors. More preferably, the fourth color is a color different from the white color of the main body 100 from the viewpoint that the design portions 5A and 5B can be visually distinguished from the other portions.
  • the color of the tape 6 (the fourth color) Since the four similar colors match the color of the front design part 5A, the design of the design parts 5A and 5B is not hindered.
  • the color of the tape 6 improves the visibility of the tape 6. That is, both the effect of improving the visibility of the tape 6 and the effect of suppressing design inhibition can be achieved.
  • the visibility improving effect is particularly exhibited when the fourth similar color is a color different from the white color (first color) of the main body 100.
  • the base sheet 61 preferably has a fourth similar color
  • the locking member 62 preferably has a first similar color. Since the locking member 62 is a first similar color (a color different from that of the base sheet 61), in addition to the effect of improving the visibility of the tape 6 and the effect of suppressing design inhibition, the locking member for the base sheet 61 is also provided. 62 is improved.
  • At least a part of the tape 6 may have a fifth color different from the second color of the first identification unit 4C. Since at least a part of the tape 6 is in the fifth color, the visibility of the tape 6 with respect to the first identification unit 4C is improved. From the viewpoint of improving the visibility of the tape 6, it is preferable that the fifth color of the tape 6 be a color different from the white color (first color) of the main body 100.
  • the fifth color of the tape 6 is, for example, a fourth similar color similar to the colors of the design units 5A and 5B.
  • the color of the base sheet 61 (at least a part of the tape 6) is a fourth similar color similar to the colors of the design units 5A and 5B, and is different from the second color of the first identification unit 4C. It can be. Therefore, the effect of improving the visibility of the tape 6 and the effect of suppressing design inhibition are further exhibited.
  • the color (second color) of the first identification unit 4C is preferably a lighter color than the color (fourth color) of the design units 5A and 5B.
  • the “light color” is, for example, a color having higher lightness and / or lower saturation than the fourth color. In this case, since the color of the first identification unit 4C is a light color, the design of the design units 5A and 5B is not disturbed, and a design inhibition suppressing effect is exhibited.
  • the first color of the main body 100 is white
  • the second color of the first identification unit 4C is different from the first color and the fourth color of the design units 5A and 5B, and is lighter than the fourth color
  • the fourth color of the design units 5A and 5B is different from the first color in the first color and the second color of the first identification unit 4C
  • the color of the base sheet 61 is a color (third color) different from the first color and is similar to the fourth color of the design units 5A and 5B (fourth similar color), and the color of the first identification unit 4C.
  • the locking member 62 is a first similar color (a color different from the base sheet 61). In this case, the effect of improving the discriminability of the tape 6 and the effect of suppressing the design inhibition are further exhibited.
  • the color (second color) of the first identification unit 4C may be the same as the color (fourth color) of the design units 5A and 5B.
  • the base sheet 61 (at least a part of the tape 6) has a fourth similar color similar to the color of the first identification portion 4C as well as the design portions 5A and 5B. Also in this combination, the effect of improving the discernability of the tape 6 and the effect of suppressing the design inhibition are exhibited.
  • the base sheet 61 and the locking members 62 (all of the tape 6) may have a fourth similar color. Also in this case, the effect of improving the discernability of the tape 6 and the effect of suppressing the design inhibition are exhibited.
  • the diaper 1 of the first embodiment Since the diaper 1 of the first embodiment is configured as described above, it has the following operations and effects. (1) According to the present invention, a novel absorbent article is provided. (2) Even if the position of the patch 4 is difficult to determine due to the design portions 5A and 5B provided on the front body 1A and the back body 1C, respectively, the patch 4 has both ends in the width direction. The first identification portions 4C, 4C, the user can reliably determine the position of the patch 4. Further, the user can recognize the context of the absorbent article 1 from the position of the patch 4.
  • the present invention it is easy to determine the position of the patch 4 and the front and rear of the absorbent article 1 with respect to the wearer, and it is easy to perform the positioning when fixing the fastening tape 6 to the patch 4.
  • the first identification portions 4C and 4C are provided at both ends in the width direction of the patch 4, and the base sheet 61 and the locking member 62 constituting the tape 6 are provided in different colors.
  • the base sheet 61 and the first identification portions 4C, 4C have similar colors.
  • the position of the tape 6 can be easily grasped, and it can be easily understood visually that members having similar colors can be fixed to each other. Further, the user can easily determine the front and rear of the diaper 1 based on the positional relationship between the first identification sections 4C and 4C and the tape 6. Therefore, the user can quickly wear the absorbent article on the wearer.
  • the color of the locking member 62 can be visually recognized when the absorbent article in the second folded state is viewed in plan from the skin side.
  • the diaper 1 folded into a predetermined shape can be manufactured efficiently. That is, the diaper 1 is excellent in productivity.
  • the tape 6 has a predetermined translucency in which at least a part of the third color can be seen through, the user can see through.
  • the front and rear of the diaper 1 can be estimated from the position of the visible third color. Therefore, the user can quickly position the diaper 1 with respect to the wearer.
  • the location of the tape 6 (one of the front body 1A and the back body 1C) is not limited to the back body 1C but may be the front body 1A.
  • the location of the patch 4 (the other of the front body 1A and the back body 1C) is the back body 1C.
  • the front body 1A may be read as “the back body 1C”
  • the back body 1C may be read as "the front body 1A”.
  • the first identification unit 4C may have the same design as the front design unit 5A.
  • the width of the patch 4 is made larger than the width of the design portion 5 and the first identification portion 4C is further separated from the front design portion 5A in the width direction, so that the patch 4 is used. This makes it easier for the user to visually recognize the first identification unit 4C, so that the position of the patch 4 can be determined.
  • the paper diaper 300 is formed symmetrically with respect to the center line A in the width direction.
  • the disposable diaper 300 is roughly divided into three regions along the longitudinal direction: a front body 202, a crotch 203, and a back body 204.
  • the front body 202 is an area located on the lower abdomen side of the wearer when worn.
  • the back body 204 is an area located on the buttocks side of the wearer when worn.
  • the crotch 203 is an area located between the front body 202 and the back body 204 and positioned at the wearer's crotch when worn.
  • the disposable diaper 300 includes a pair of left and right front side flaps 205 and a pair of right and left rear side flaps 206 extending from both longitudinal side edges outward in the width direction from the crotch portion 203 in the front body 202 and the back body 204. Each has.
  • the disposable diaper 300 includes a pair of left and right fastening tapes (hereinafter, referred to as “tapes”) provided on at least one of the front body 202 and the back body 204 (here, the back body 204) so as to protrude outward from both side edges in the longitudinal direction. (Abbreviated) 260.
  • the disposable diaper 300 has a patch 238 to which a tape 260 is fixed on the other of the front body 202 and the back body 204 (here, the front body 202).
  • the disposable diaper 300 includes a laminate 210 at least in the crotch 203. More specifically, the disposable diaper 300 includes a laminated body 210 provided in the longitudinal direction over the front body 202, the crotch 203, and the back body 204. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the laminated body 210 includes an absorbent body 220 and a top sheet 231 laminated on the skin facing side of the absorbent body 220. Further, the laminate 210 includes a back sheet 232 laminated on the non-skin facing side of the absorber 220. In addition, a cover sheet 235 is laminated on the non-skin-facing surface side of the back sheet 232.
  • the side sheet 233 is arranged from the side (outside in the width direction) of the top sheet 231 to the skin facing surface side.
  • the absorber 220 has a built-in absorbent core 221.
  • the disposable diaper 300 is provided with a pair of second identification portions 280a and 280b in the crotch portion 203, and the design portions 291 and 292 in the front body 202 and the back body 204. Is provided. Hereinafter, each component of the disposable diaper 300 will be described.
  • the absorbent core 221 is a mat-shaped member that absorbs and holds a liquid. As shown in FIG. 9, the absorbent core 221 includes a superabsorbent polymer (SAP (superabsorbent polymer), also referred to as a superabsorbent polymer or a superabsorbent resin) 222 and a fiber material 223. .
  • SAP superabsorbent polymer
  • the absorbent core 221 is formed by mixing the superabsorbent polymer 222 with the fiber material 223.
  • the fiber material 223 is formed by intertwining ultrafine fibers having hydrophilicity.
  • the superabsorbent polymer 222 is usually buried and held in the fiber material 223 by being mixed with the fiber material 223.
  • the superabsorbent polymer 222 can absorb and retain the liquid diffused by the fiber material 223.
  • Superabsorbent polymer 222 various known polymers used as a material of an absorbent in an absorbent article such as a disposable diaper or a urine pad can be used.
  • the superabsorbent polymer 222 include starch-based polymers such as starch-acrylic acid (salt) graft copolymer, saponified starch-acrylonitrile copolymer, and saponified starch-ethyl acrylate graft copolymer; Cellulose-based ones such as cross-linked carboxymethylcellulose; synthetic polymer-based ones such as polyacrylic acid (salt), polyethylene oxide cross-linked with acrylic acid, and cross-linked products of polyvinyl alcohol-maleic anhydride reactant can be used.
  • starch-based polymers such as starch-acrylic acid (salt) graft copolymer, saponified starch-acrylonitrile copolymer, and saponified starch-ethyl acrylate graft copolymer
  • polyacrylic acid salt
  • sodium polyacrylate is more preferred. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • shape of the superabsorbent polymer 222 is not particularly limited, for example, a granular, powdery, pellet, sol, film, fibrous, or the like can be used.
  • the fiber material 223 examples include cellulosic fibers such as pulp fiber, rayon fiber, and cotton fiber; and synthetic fibers such as polyethylene, polypropylene, and polyethylene terephthalate that have been subjected to a hydrophilic treatment. Above all, from the viewpoint of absorbability, it is preferable to use fluff pulp obtained by pulverizing or fibrillating fibers or synthetic fibers. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the absorber 220 is a liquid-absorbing mat-like (or pad-like) member that absorbs and retains liquid moisture (hereinafter, “excreted moisture”) such as urine and menstrual blood excreted from the wearer.
  • excreted moisture liquid moisture
  • FIG. 7 in the present embodiment, an hourglass-shaped absorber 220 in which the crotch 203 has a smaller width dimension than the front body 202 and the back body 204 is illustrated. More specifically, this absorptive body 220 has an asymmetric hourglass in which a longitudinal dimension of a portion of the back body 204 having a large width direction is larger than a longitudinal dimension of a portion of the front body 202 having a large width direction. It has a shape.
  • the shape of the absorber 220 in plan view is not limited to the hourglass shape as described above, and may be rectangular (that is, the width direction dimension is constant) in plan view, or may be circular front and back bodies 202 and 204, respectively. May be in a dumbbell shape.
  • the absorber 220 has an absorbent core 221 and a core wrap sheet (hereinafter abbreviated as “wrap sheet”) 224.
  • the absorber 220 is formed by encapsulating (wrapping) the absorbent core 221 with a wrap sheet 224.
  • the wrap sheet 224 covers the entire absorbent core 221 including the skin facing surface side and the non-skin facing surface side of the absorbent core 221.
  • the wrap sheet 224 is a sheet-like member that covers the absorbent core 221. By covering the absorbent core 221 with the wrap sheet 224, the fixed shape of the absorbent core 221 is ensured.
  • the wrap sheet 224 can be formed of a known material used for an absorbent article.
  • paper such as tissue paper; spunbonded nonwoven fabric, needle-punched nonwoven fabric, spunlace nonwoven fabric, air-through nonwoven fabric, SMS (Spunbound @ Meltblown @ Spunbound) nonwoven fabric and the like can be used.
  • the laminated body 210 is a laminated structure in which a top sheet 231 and a back sheet 232 are arranged on both main surfaces of the absorber 220, respectively. Among them, the top sheet 231 is arranged on the surface of the absorber 220 on the skin facing surface side. The back sheet 232 is disposed on the surface of the absorber 220 on the non-skin facing side.
  • the laminated body 210 allows the excreted moisture from the skin-facing surface side to pass through the top sheet 231, absorbs and retains the permeated excreted moisture by the absorber 220, and leaks to the outside from the non-skin-facing surface side by the back sheet 232. To block.
  • the top sheet 231 and the back sheet 232 and the absorber 220 can be fixed with a known adhesive such as a hot melt adhesive.
  • the top sheet 231 is a sheet-like member arranged on the side of the laminate 210 closest to the skin.
  • the top sheet 231 has a larger width dimension than the absorber 220 and covers the entire surface of the absorber 220 from the side facing the skin.
  • the top sheet 231 is in contact with the wearer's skin in a state in which the disposable diaper 300 is attached, and allows excreted moisture to permeate and be absorbed by the absorber 220.
  • the top sheet 231 is at least partially or entirely made of a material having water permeability.
  • the top sheet 231 be made of a material having high flexibility for fitting at the time of mounting.
  • the material is formed of a material having air permeability.
  • a material forming the top sheet 23 for example, a woven fabric, a nonwoven fabric, a porous film, or the like can be used.
  • a non-woven fabric obtained by subjecting fibers of a thermoplastic resin such as polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, or nylon to a hydrophilic treatment may be used.
  • a spunbonded nonwoven fabric, a needle punched nonwoven fabric, a spunlace nonwoven fabric, an air-through nonwoven fabric, a melt blown nonwoven fabric, an SMS nonwoven fabric, and the like can be used.
  • the back sheet 232 is a sheet-shaped member disposed on the side of the laminate 210 closest to the skin.
  • the back sheet 232 has a larger width dimension than the absorber 220 and the top sheet 231 and covers the entire surface of the absorber 220 and the top sheet 231 from the non-skin-facing surface side. Further, the back sheet 232 prevents excrement from leaking from the absorber 220 to the non-skin-facing surface side. For this reason, the back sheet 232 is made of a material having water impermeability. Further, it is preferable that the back sheet 232 be made of a material having moisture permeability in order to suppress stuffiness in a mounted state.
  • the back sheet 232 for example, a thermoplastic resin sheet such as polyethylene or polypropylene can be used.
  • a thermoplastic resin sheet such as polyethylene or polypropylene
  • the back sheet 232 it is preferable to use a microporous thermoplastic resin sheet in which a plurality of fine holes of 0.1 to 0.4 ⁇ m are formed.
  • a sheet obtained by kneading an inorganic filler into a thermoplastic resin, forming the sheet, and then stretching the sheet can be used.
  • the disposable diaper 300 further includes a side sheet 233 and a cover sheet 235 laminated on the laminated body 210.
  • the side sheet 233 is arranged from the side in the width direction of the laminated body 210 to the skin facing surface side.
  • the cover sheet 235 is arranged on the non-skin facing side of the laminate 210.
  • the side sheet 233, the cover sheet 235, and the laminate 210 can be fixed with a known adhesive such as a hot melt adhesive.
  • the side sheets 233 are a pair of left and right members provided on both sides in the width direction to form three-dimensional gathers 242 described later on both sides of the laminated body 210.
  • the side sheet 233 includes a flap portion 234A and a flap portion 234B that extend outward in the width direction beyond the crotch portion 203 from both longitudinal edges in the front body 202 and the back body 204, respectively.
  • the side sheets 233 are provided on each of the width direction sides of the top sheet 231 and the back sheet 232.
  • the side sheet 233 is laminated on the skin facing surface side from the width direction side of the top sheet 231 and the back sheet 232 to the width direction side portion.
  • the side sheet 233 stands up in the direction in which it comes into contact with the wearer's skin by utilizing the contraction of the three-dimensional gather 242 described later.
  • the side sheet 233 is preferably made of a water-impermeable material in order to prevent liquid leakage to the side in the width direction.
  • a spunbonded nonwoven fabric can be used.
  • a part of the side sheet 233 is disposed on the skin-facing surface side in the disposable diaper 300 (for this reason, the side sheet 233 is also referred to as a “top sheet” like the top sheet 231).
  • a spunbonded nonwoven fabric having increased flexibility by including a melt blown layer such as an SMS nonwoven fabric or an SMMS (Spunbound Meltblown Meltblown Spunbound) nonwoven fabric is used. Is preferred.
  • the “fineness” is a parameter corresponding to a fiber diameter (thickness) or a cross-sectional area of the fiber, and is represented by a weight per a predetermined length. For example, the number of grams per 10,000 m (decitex) of one fiber is used as “fineness”.
  • the “weight per unit area” is a parameter corresponding to the thickness or the degree of lamination of the sheet, and is represented by a weight per unit area. For example, the number of grams per square meter is used as the “basis weight”.
  • the cover sheet 235 is a sheet-like member that covers the laminate 210 from the non-skin-facing surface side.
  • the cover sheet 235 is used to reinforce the back sheet 232 and improve the feel (tactile sensation) of the back sheet 232 by being disposed on the most non-skin-facing side except the patch 238 in the disposable diaper 300.
  • the cover sheet 235 has a larger width dimension than the absorber 220, the top sheet 231, and the back sheet 232, and is arranged around the wearer's inseam, buttocks, hips, waist, belly, and the like in the mounted state.
  • the cover sheet 235 includes a pair of left and right flap portions 236 ⁇ / b> A and a left and right Each has a pair of flap portions 236B.
  • cover sheet 235 for example, a woven fabric, a nonwoven fabric, or the like can be given. Among them, it is preferable to use a nonwoven fabric or a wet nonwoven fabric of a thermoplastic resin such as polyethylene, polypropylene, and polyester. In particular, a spun bond nonwoven fabric can be suitably used as the cover sheet 235 from the viewpoint of flexibility in order to secure a tactile sensation (touch).
  • a woven fabric, a nonwoven fabric, or the like it is preferable to use a nonwoven fabric or a wet nonwoven fabric of a thermoplastic resin such as polyethylene, polypropylene, and polyester.
  • a spun bond nonwoven fabric can be suitably used as the cover sheet 235 from the viewpoint of flexibility in order to secure a tactile sensation (touch).
  • the cover sheet 235 is usually a translucent sheet. Specifically, the cover sheet 235 has a total light transmittance of preferably 65% or more, more preferably 75% or more, preferably 99% or less, more preferably 90% or less. When the total light transmittance of the cover sheet 235 is equal to or more than the lower limit, the second identification portions 280a and 280b and the design portions 291 and 292 are easily visible through the cover sheet 235 from the non-opposite surface of the disposable diaper 300. When the total light transmittance of the cover sheet 235 is equal to or less than the above upper limit, the back sheet 232, the second identification portions 280a and 280b, and the design portions 291 and 292 may be in contact with or rubbing with other members. It is easier to be protected.
  • the “total light transmittance” is measured by a measuring method based on JIS K 7361-1 (Plastic—Testing method for total light transmittance of transparent material—Part 1: Single beam method). Value.
  • the cover sheet 235 is a nonwoven fabric
  • the total light transmittance can be adjusted by the fineness and basis weight of the nonwoven fabric, or the content of a filler such as titanium oxide.
  • the respective members are laminated in the order of the side sheet 233, the top sheet 231, the absorber 220, the back sheet 232, and the cover sheet 235 from the skin facing surface side to the skin non-facing surface side. Have been.
  • the side sheet 233 and the cover sheet 235 are attached to each other with a known adhesive such as a hot melt adhesive.
  • the front side flap 205 is formed by the flap portion 234A and the flap portion 236A.
  • the rear side flap 206 is formed by the flap portion 234B and the flap portion 236B.
  • the main body 201 (see FIG. 7) of the disposable diaper 300 extends over the front body 202, the crotch 203, and the back body 204 such as the absorber 220, the sheets 231 to 233, 235 and the flaps 234A, 234B, 236A, 236B. It has a basic member provided. Note that the patch 238, the tape 260, the second identification units 280a and 280b, and the design units 291 and 292 are additional components (not basic members) and are not included in the main unit 201.
  • the patch 238 constitutes a fastening mechanism that realizes a fastening function together with the tape 260, and is a loop member to which the tape 260 can be attached.
  • the tape 260 and the patch 238 constitute a fastening mechanism.
  • a planar fastener mechanical fastener
  • the hook member is a sheet-shaped member having a large number of protrusions such as hooks, mushrooms, and anchors formed on the surface.
  • the loop member is a sheet-like member using a non-woven fabric having loop-like fibers disposed on the surface or made of short fibers.
  • an adhesive or an adhesive tape can be used as the fastening mechanism.
  • a planar fastener is preferable because the hook member and the loop member can be firmly fixed, and they can be peeled off and used repeatedly.
  • the tape 260 functions as a hook member and the patch 238 functions as a loop member will be exemplified.
  • a front patch (hereinafter abbreviated as “patch”) 238 is attached to the outer surface of the front body 202 of the cover sheet 235 (the non-skin-facing surface of the laminate 210).
  • patch for example, a nonwoven fabric using fibers of a thermoplastic resin such as polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, and nylon is used.
  • the tape 260 forms a fastening mechanism together with the patch 238 and has a hook member that can be attached to the patch 238.
  • the tape 260 is attached to at least one of the front side flap 205 and the rear side flap 206 so as to protrude outward in the width direction.
  • a case where the tape 260 is provided on the rear side flap 206 is exemplified.
  • the tape 260 is fixed to the rear side flap 206 and has a sheet-like fastening portion 261 extending outward from the rear side flap 206. Further, a locking member 264 serving as a hook member for fixing the front body 202 and the back body 204 is provided on one main surface of the fastening portion 261. The fastening portion 261 can stop the front body 202 and the rear body 204 via the locking member 264 and the patch 238.
  • the fastening part 261 has a base part 262 on the inner side in the width direction, and a protruding part 263 protruding outward from the base part 262 in the width direction.
  • the base portion 262 is fixed to the rear side flap 206 by being narrowed between the flap portions 234B and 236B.
  • the protruding portion 263 protrudes outward in the width direction from the side sheet 233 and the cover sheet 235 and is provided in a state of being exposed to the outside.
  • a locking member 264 is provided on the side of the protruding portion 263 facing the skin.
  • a material of the fastening portion 261 of the tape 260 for example, a woven fabric, a nonwoven fabric, a resin film, paper, or the like can be used.
  • a material constituting the woven fabric, the nonwoven fabric, or the resin film for example, a thermoplastic resin such as polyethylene, polypropylene, polyamide, polyester, polyvinyl chloride, and polystyrene can be used.
  • the disposable diaper 300 is provided with gathers 240 such as leg gathers 241, three-dimensional gathers 242, and waist gathers 243 in order to enhance the ability to follow the wearer in the worn state.
  • the gathers 240 are formed by sandwiching a stretchable member (stretchable member) such as rubber, polyurethane, or a stretch film between stretched sheets of nonwoven fabric or the like, and fixing the stretchable member by hot melt, heat sealing, ultrasonic welding, or the like. It is composed of an elastic sheet composite.
  • the sheet composite is in a state in which the sheet has fine wrinkles due to the force (restoring force, elastic force) of the elastic member returning from the stretched state to the original state (natural length state).
  • a thread-like rubber member hereinafter, abbreviated as “thread rubber” 250 is exemplified as the elastic member.
  • the gathers 240 formed by the thread rubber 250 three kinds of gathers 241, 242, 243 provided with elasticity by three kinds of thread rubbers 251, 252, 253 are exemplified.
  • One is a leg gather 241 in which the widthwise outer edge of the back sheet 232, the side sheet 233, and the cover sheet 235 are wrinkled by the first thread rubber 251.
  • the other is a three-dimensional gather 242 in which the widthwise inner edge of the side sheet 233 is wrinkled by the second thread rubber 252.
  • the other is a waist gather 243 in which the longitudinally rear edges of the top sheet 231, the back sheet 232, the side sheet 233, and the cover sheet 235 are wrinkled by the third thread rubber 253.
  • the ⁇ ⁇ leg gathers 241 are provided in order to increase the follow-up of the wearer's legs and suppress the gap with the disposable diaper 300. As shown in FIG. 7, the leg gathers 241 are provided at locations where the legs become peripheral edges of the wearer in the mounted state. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, in the leg gather 241, the first thread rubber 251 is provided along the longitudinal direction at the outer edge in the width direction of the back sheet 232 in the crotch portion 203 and the periphery thereof. ing. As shown in FIG. 9, the first thread rubber 251 is interposed between the side sheet 233 and the cover sheet 235.
  • the three-dimensional gathers 242 are provided in order to prevent the excrement from leaking laterally in the width direction by improving the followability to the wearer at the periphery of the excretion point.
  • the three-dimensional gathers 242 are arranged inside the side sheets 233 in the width direction.
  • the second thread rubber 252 is provided along the longitudinal direction at the widthwise inner edge of the side sheet 233.
  • the sheet portions 233 ⁇ / b> A and 233 ⁇ / b> B located at the inner edge in the width direction of the side sheet 233 are folded and overlapped.
  • the second thread rubber 252 extending in the longitudinal direction is surrounded by these sheet portions 233A and 233B.
  • the waist gather 243 is provided to enhance the ability to follow the buttocks and lower abdomen of the wearer. More specifically, in the waist gather 243, a stretchable sheet 254 in which a plurality of third thread rubbers 253 extending in the width direction are stretched and narrowly mounted on a set of non-stretchable base sheets is used. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the elastic sheet 254 is interposed between the top sheet 231 and the cover sheet 235 at the longitudinally rear edge.
  • the disposable diaper 300 includes a pair of second identifications that can be visually identified from the non-skin-facing surface side at a central position in the longitudinal direction and a symmetrical position in the width direction in the crotch 203.
  • Parts 280a and 280b are provided, respectively.
  • the second identification units 280a and 280b printed on the back sheet 232 are illustrated.
  • the second identification units 280a and 280b are not particularly distinguished from each other, they may be described with “2nd identification unit 280” with reference numerals.
  • the second identification unit 280 functions as a marker for recognizing the longitudinal center positions of the backsheet 232 and the disposable diaper 300.
  • the second identification unit 280 is attached by bending the paper diaper 300 in the longitudinal direction around the second identification unit 280, so that the second identification unit 280 is located at the lowermost part of the paper diaper 300. It functions as a marker for allowing the user to recognize that the lengths from the bottom to both ends in the longitudinal direction are substantially the same.
  • the lowermost portion refers to a portion located at the lowest position in the disposable diaper 300 when the wearer of the disposable diaper 300 stands upright with the direction of gravity acting downward.
  • the second identification unit 280 also functions as a marker for controlling the cutting position of the sheet when a plurality of back sheets 232 are cut out from a long sheet and manufactured.
  • the second identification unit 280 is not particularly limited as long as it is visually distinguishable from a portion other than the second identification unit 280, but usually has a color different from that of the back sheet 232.
  • the main body 201 including the back sheet 232 is substantially the same white (color) over the entire area. Therefore, the color of the second identification unit 280 is not particularly limited, but is preferably other than white because the main body 201 is substantially the same white (color) over the entire area. For example, red, orange, yellow, green, Light blue, blue, purple, gray, black, etc.
  • the second identification unit 280 may have a character, a graphic, a symbol, a pattern, or a combination thereof in a color different from those of the other parts. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 10, the second identification unit 280 is provided as an oval figure.
  • substantially the same color means that the color difference is preferably less than 1.0.
  • “Different colors” means that the color difference is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more.
  • color difference used herein refers to a method of measuring color using a commercially available colorimeter and comparing values quantified based on a CIE1976 (L * a * b * ) color space defined in JIS Z 8729 or the like.
  • the color difference ⁇ E * ab [( ⁇ L * ) 2 + ( ⁇ a * ) 2 + ( ⁇ b * ) 2 ] 1/2 .
  • the color difference ⁇ E * ab is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more, it can be said that the colors are different enough to be visually perceivable by the user, and preferably less than 1.0. It can be said that the colors are substantially the same to the extent that the user cannot visually recognize them.
  • the second identification unit 280 can be formed, for example, by printing ink of a desired color by a printing method such as letterpress printing, gravure printing, flexographic printing, offset printing, screen printing, or inkjet printing.
  • the ink may be water-based or oil-based, but usually oil-based ink is used.
  • the ink contains a known dye or pigment as a coloring material, a solvent, a surfactant, and the like. Further, the ink may contain a fluorescent material or a phosphorescent material.
  • the second identification portion 280 is provided on the non-skin-facing surface side of the back sheet 232. Thereby, the second identification unit 280 is provided on the outermost layer on the non-skin-facing surface side of the laminate 210.
  • the diaper 300 is located on the non-skin-facing surface side of the diaper 300 and is directed to the outside of the diaper 300 via the cover sheet 235 at the time of mounting.
  • the second identification portion 280 is provided on a side edge portion 232 ⁇ / b> A that is an outer edge in the width direction of the disposable diaper 300. As shown in FIG. 10, by providing the leg gathers 241, when the paper diaper 300 is mounted, the outer edge in the width direction of the crotch part 203 is creased by the first thread rubber 251, and the side edge The portion 232A is lifted above the center. Thus, the second identification unit 280 can be visually identified not only when the diaper 300 is viewed from below or obliquely below but also when viewed from the side.
  • the design portions 291 and 292 are provided so as to be able to be viewed from the non-skin-facing surface side, and have, for example, characters, figures, symbols, patterns, or a combination thereof.
  • the characters include hiragana, katakana, kanji, and the alphabet.
  • the character may be a single character, a word composed of a plurality of characters, or a sentence composed of a plurality of words connected.
  • Examples of figures include, for example, circles, triangles, squares, stars, other polygons, and figures in which a solid is illustrated on a plane.
  • symbols include, for example, map symbols, weather symbols, mathematical symbols, pictograms, and the like.
  • the design units 291 and 292 can display a single character or a plurality of characters, graphics, symbols, and patterns, and can repeatedly display a plurality of them.
  • the design units 291 and 292 can display characters, figures, symbols, and patterns in an overlapping manner.
  • the design units 291 and 292 can further display characters, figures, symbols, and patterns.
  • the design units 291 and 292 may have the same characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like, or may have different same characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like.
  • the design units 291 and 292 are used for positioning when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted.
  • the design units 291 and 292 can be formed by printing, like the second identification unit 280.
  • the design units 291 and 292 are provided with a front design unit 291 (first design unit) of the front body 202 and a rear design unit 292 (second design unit) of the back body 204. And has a contour shape occupying a predetermined range.
  • the proportion of the range occupied by the design portions 291 and 292 in the front body 202 and the back body 204 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 20% or more, more preferably 40% or more, further preferably 60% or more, and particularly preferably 70% or more. It is.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100% or less, more preferably 90% or less, and further preferably 80% or less.
  • the ratio of the range occupied by the design units 291 and 292 is equal to or more than the lower limit, visibility is increased, and a stronger impression can be given to a person who views the design units 291 and 292. Further, the shapes of the design units 291 and 292 can be easily grasped, and the positioning of the disposable diaper 300 using the design units 291 and 292 can be easily performed.
  • the length of the design portions 291 and 292 in the width direction is longer than the length in the longitudinal direction.
  • the design portions 291 and 292 preferably have a length in the width direction with respect to the length in the longitudinal direction of preferably 105% or more, more preferably 110% or more, further preferably 120% or more, and particularly preferably 140% or more. It is.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 400% or less, more preferably 300% or less, and further preferably 200% or less.
  • the length in the longitudinal direction of the design portions 291 and 292 refers to the length in the longitudinal direction between the two furthest points in the longitudinal direction in each of the design portions 291 and 292.
  • the length in the width direction of the design portions 291 and 292 refers to the length in the width direction between the two furthest points in the width direction in each of the design portions 291 and 292.
  • the design portions 291 and 292 have a length L 31 from the longitudinal abdominal end 232B of the disposable diaper 300 to the distal end 291A (second crotch lower edge) of the front design portion 291 on the crotch 203 side (second crotch separation). Dimension) and the length L 32 (first crotch separation dimension) from the longitudinal back end 232C to the end 292A (first crotch lower edge) of the rear design portion 292 on the crotch 203 side are the same. Or, they are arranged almost identically.
  • the end portions 291A and 292A are portions of the design portions 291 and 292 that protrude most toward the crotch portion 203 side.
  • the design portions 291 and 292 have a length L 21 from the longitudinal abdominal end portion 232B of the disposable diaper 300 to the terminal end portion 291B (second front and rear end edge) of the front design portion 291 opposite to the crotch portion 203. (Second front-rear separation dimension) and a length L 22 (first front-rear end edge) from the rear end 232C in the longitudinal direction to the end 292B (first front-rear edge) on the opposite side of the crotch 203 of the rear design portion 292. Front-rear separation dimensions) are the same or substantially the same.
  • substantially the same length means that the length of one side relative to the other side is preferably within a range of ⁇ 15%, more preferably within a range of ⁇ 10%, and still more preferably ⁇ 5%. It is within the range.
  • the design portions 291 and 292 are edges (edges along the width direction) of which the end portions 291A and 292A on the crotch portion 203 side are substantially parallel to the longitudinal ends 232B and 232C of the paper diaper 300, respectively.
  • the longitudinal ends 232 ⁇ / b> B and 232 ⁇ / b> C are generally linear, and are formed parallel to the width direction of the paper diaper 300 and the backsheet 232.
  • the end portions 291A, 292A are preferably formed in a linear or curved shape such that the end portions 291A, 292A and the longitudinal ends 232B, 232C have a substantially parallel relationship. When the end portions 291A and 292A are formed in a curved shape, as shown in FIG.
  • the central portions of the end portions 291A and 292A extend toward the crotch portion 203 side from the both end portions and bulge. It is preferable that the shape is symmetrical.
  • the end portions 291A and 292A are substantially parallel to the longitudinal ends 232B and 232C, respectively.
  • the angle between the edge of each of the portions 232B and 232C is preferably in a range of 90 ° ⁇ 20 °, more preferably in a range of 90 ° ⁇ 10 °, and further preferably in a range of 90 ° ⁇ 5 °. .
  • the angle between the straight lines forming the end portions 291A and 292A is 90 °.
  • the appearance of the design units 291 and 292 of the present embodiment is the same or similar to each other.
  • the “design portions 291 and 292 having the same or similar appearance” here include at least one of modes 1 to 4 listed below.
  • -Aspect 1 Design parts 291 and 292 with the same or similar color or pattern
  • -Aspect 2 Design parts 291 and 292 with the same or similar pattern arrangement
  • -Aspect 3 Design portions 291 and 292 having the same or substantially the same width dimension.
  • Aspect 4 Design portions 291 and 292 having the same or substantially the same longitudinal dimension
  • design portions 291 and 292 having an external appearance that is line-symmetric or substantially line-symmetric in the longitudinal direction are provided.
  • the disposable diaper 300 is shipped in a folded state. More specifically, a pair of virtual lines VL5 and VL6 (bent curves) virtually extending in the longitudinal direction orthogonal to the width direction at both ends in the width direction of the absorber 220, with the skin surface side inside and virtual A portion outside the line VL5 and VL6 in the width direction is folded back.
  • the state folded in this manner is referred to as a “folded state”.
  • the first surface in the width direction outside the pair of virtual lines VL5 and VL6 faces and overlaps the second surface in the width direction inside the pair of virtual lines VL5 and VL6.
  • the second identification unit 280 is arranged outside the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction.
  • “outside the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction” here means that at least a part of the second identification unit 280 is located outside the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction. Therefore, the whole of the second identification unit 280 may be disposed outside the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction, or may extend across the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction.
  • the disposable diaper is not attached so as to fit the wearer's body, excrement may leak.
  • the front body and the back body are connected, and the waist circumference of the wearer is configured and positioned continuously in a circumferential shape, so that the positioning is relatively easily performed.
  • the tape-type disposable diaper has a front body and a back body that are detachably fixed by a locking member, so that one of the front body or the back body is biased toward the abdomen or the back, and is drawn out more than the other.
  • a disposable diaper was sometimes worn in a misaligned state. At this time, the absorbent or the disposable diaper may not fit the wearer, and the excrement may leak.
  • a pair of second identification portions 280 are provided at the central portion in the longitudinal direction in the crotch portion 203 of the back sheet 232.
  • the center position in the longitudinal direction of the disposable diaper 300 can be confirmed by the second identification unit 280.
  • the disposable diaper 300 is bent from the center position in the longitudinal direction. The lengths to both ends are substantially equal.
  • the crotch part 203 is prevented from being attached to the abdominal side or the back side so as to be deviated to one side, and the disposable diaper 300 is positioned at an appropriate position. Can be.
  • the second identification section 280 is provided at a position symmetrical in the width direction, the paper diaper 300 can be positioned at an appropriate position so as to be balanced in the width direction.
  • end portions 291A, 291B, 292A, and 292B along the width direction in the design portions 291 and 292 provided on the front body 202 and the back body 204 can also be used for positioning the disposable diaper 300. Contributes to mounting. Therefore, the positioning of the disposable diaper 300 is facilitated, and the disposable diaper 300 that can be worn so as to fit the wearer's body can be provided.
  • the design portions 291 and 292 have the same or substantially the same longitudinal dimension, so that the longitudinal position of the disposable diaper 300 can be easily adjusted.
  • the above design portion 291 and 292, the longitudinal ends of the disposable diaper 300 232B, the distal end 291A of the crotch portion 203 side from 232C, the length L 31, L 32 up to 292A are arranged identical or substantially identical to each other . Therefore, by aligning the positions of the end portions 291A and 292A of the design portions 291 and 292 in the disposable diaper 300 in the attached state, the disposable diaper 300 can be easily attached to an appropriate position.
  • the design unit 291 and 292 includes a longitudinal direction from the ventral edge portion 232B to end 291B opposite to the crotch portion 203 of the front design portion 291 length L 21 of the diapers 300, longitudinal dorsal are arranged identical or substantially identical to each other opposite the end to 292B length L 22 and the crotch portion 203 of the rear design portion 292 from the end portion 232C. Therefore, by aligning the positions of the ends 291B and 292B of the design portions 291 and 292 in the disposable diaper 300 in the attached state, the disposable diaper 300 can be easily attached to an appropriate position.
  • the positioning of the disposable diaper 300 described above can be performed at the crotch portion 203 by the second identification portion 280, and can be performed at the crotch portion 203 side of the design portions 291 and 292 by the end portions 291A and 292A.
  • the end portions 291B and 292B can be aligned at the longitudinal ends 232B and 232C of the design portions 291 and 292.
  • the end portions 291A, 292A on the crotch portion 203 side are substantially parallel to the longitudinal end portions 232B, 232C of the disposable diaper 300.
  • the right widthwise end of the design portion 291 in FIG. 7 and the right widthwise end of the design portion 292 in FIG. The left end in the width direction of the design unit 291 in FIG. 7 and the left end in the width direction of the design unit 292 in FIG.
  • the heights of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the paper diaper 300 become substantially equal.
  • the front body 202 and the back body 204 are prevented from being displaced so as to be biased toward one of the ventral side and the back side, and the disposable diaper 300 is appropriately positioned. Positioning can be performed.
  • the disposable diaper 300 by using the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292, the positioning when attaching the disposable diaper 300 is facilitated, and the disposable diaper 300 is worn so as to fit the wearer's body. be able to. Further, the disposable diaper 300 is difficult to distinguish between the front and rear by the design units 291 and 292, but the positioning is easy. At this time, for example, in a state where the wearer is lying on his / her back, or lying down or lying on his stomach, if the positions of both the design portions 291 and 292 cannot be confirmed, the disposable diaper 300 is confirmed from the crotch portion 203 side. Positioning can be performed using the second identification unit 280.
  • the positioning can be performed using the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292.
  • the disposable diaper 300 is confirmed from the front body 202 side and the back body 204 side, so that the design portions 291 and 292 can be confirmed. Can be used for alignment.
  • the positioning can be performed using the second identification unit 280.
  • the front body 202, the crotch 203, and the back body 204 are formed using one of the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 according to the posture of the wearer. Positioning can be performed. In addition, by using both the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292, the positioning of the front body 202, the crotch 203, and the back body 204 can be performed more reliably. Therefore, the disposable diaper 300 can be worn so as to fit the wearer's body, and it is easy to prevent excrement from leaking.
  • the disposable diaper 300 in which the crotch 203 is disposed at an appropriate position can be attached to the wearer.
  • the bias toward the abdomen or back can be suppressed.
  • the cover sheet 235 is disposed on the non-skin-facing side of the back sheet 232, so that the cover sheet 235 covers the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 from being in contact with other members, rubbing, or the like, and from being stained or thinned. In addition, even when the texture and feel of the back sheet 232 are changed by the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 provided on the back sheet 232, the wearer and the user can use the skin of the back sheet 232. The user directly touches the cover sheet 235 located on the non-opposing surface side. For this reason, the influence of providing the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 can be suppressed.
  • the second identification unit 280 has a color different from that of the back sheet 232. This makes it possible to intuitively recognize the position only by looking at the second identification unit 280, and easily distinguish it from the back sheet 232. Therefore, the positioning becomes easier, and it is easier to prevent the excrement from leaking.
  • the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 are provided so as to be visible from the non-skin-facing surface side. Thereby, the front and back of the disposable diaper 300 can be distinguished by the presence or absence of the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292. In addition, when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted, the positions of the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 can be confirmed from the outside. Therefore, the alignment is further facilitated, and it is easy to prevent excrement from leaking.
  • the second identification unit 280 is provided on the side edge 232 ⁇ / b> A of the back sheet 232. Thus, when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted, the position of the second identification unit 280 can be confirmed from the side surface. Therefore, the positioning is further facilitated, and it is easy to prevent the excrement from leaking.
  • the second identification unit 280 since the second identification unit 280 is disposed outside the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction, the folded state of the disposable diaper 300 can be viewed from the skin-facing surface side to visually recognize the second identification unit 280. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the position while viewing the folded paper diaper 300 from the skin facing surface side.
  • the entire second identification unit 280 is disposed outside the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction
  • the second identification unit 280 has the second identification unit 280.
  • the part 280 is not visible, and the design parts 291 and 292 are visible. Therefore, the decorativeness of the design portions 291 and 292 when the folded paper diaper 300 is viewed from the non-skin-facing surface side can be secured.
  • the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 are printed on the back sheet 232 has been described as an example.
  • the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 only need to be provided in a part that can be visually recognized from the outside of the disposable diaper 300. Therefore, the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 may be printed on the cover sheet 235, or may be printed on both the back sheet 232 and the cover sheet 235. Alternatively, the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 may be separately provided between the back sheet 232 and the cover sheet 235.
  • the design portions 291 and 292 provided on the front body 202 and the back body 204 may be extended to the width direction ends of the disposable diaper 300. Then, when the paper diaper 300 is bent and the front body 202 and the back body 204 are fixed in a positional relationship where the second identification part 280 is located at the center, the design parts 291 and 292 may have a continuous shape. In this case, when the disposable diaper 300 is appropriately positioned when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted, the design portions 291 and 292 continuously extend around the waist at a portion where the front body 202 and the back body 204 are connected via the fastening portion 261. Will be continuous. Therefore, it is easy to determine whether the position at the time of mounting the paper diaper 300 is appropriate, and the positioning can be performed more reliably.
  • the second identification unit 280 is provided at the central position in the longitudinal direction and symmetrical position in the width direction in the crotch 203 so as to visually identify the deployed diaper 300 from the skin surface side (skin facing surface side). You may. In this case, when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted, the position of the second identification unit 280 can be confirmed from the skin side of the disposable disposable diaper 300, so that the alignment is facilitated.
  • the forms of the second identification unit 280 of the present embodiment are summarized as follows.
  • the second identification unit 280 is visually identifiable from the non-skin side and the skin side, the color of the second identification unit 280 can be visually identified from the non-skin side and the skin side. It may be different on the surface side. In this case, the front and back of the disposable diaper 300 can be distinguished by the color of the second identification unit 280.
  • the second identification portion 280 is disposed at the center position in the longitudinal direction and the left-right symmetric position in the width direction in the crotch portion 203, and is disposed outside the three-dimensional gather 242 provided on the skin surface side of the main body portion 201 in the width direction. It may be something.
  • the three-dimensional gathers 242 are erected on the skin side of the main body 201 as shown in FIGS. Therefore, when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted, the position of the second identification unit 280 can be confirmed from the skin side of the disposable diaper 300 when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted by being arranged outside the three-dimensional gather 242 in the width direction. Matching becomes easy.
  • the diaper 1 of the first embodiment may be provided with the second identification unit 280 of the second embodiment.
  • the disposable diaper 300 of the second embodiment is provided with the first identification unit 4C of the first embodiment, and the main unit 201, design units 291, 292, tape 260, and first identification unit 4C of the disposable diaper 300 of the second embodiment. May each have a combination of colors specified in the first embodiment.
  • the present invention will be described specifically with reference to examples.
  • the materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the present invention is not limited to the following examples.
  • the "first embodiment” will be described as an embodiment capable of realizing the above aspects I and IV.
  • a “second embodiment” will be described as an embodiment capable of realizing the above aspects II and IV.
  • a “third embodiment” will be described as an embodiment capable of realizing the above-described modes III, IV, and VI.
  • a “fourth embodiment” will be described as an embodiment capable of realizing the above mode V.
  • Examples 1 to 4 were compared with Comparative Examples 1 and 2.
  • CHM-02174 (white) manufactured by 3M Co. was adopted as the first test piece corresponding to the locking member 62, and corresponded to the base sheet 61 (hook carrier).
  • Spunbond nonwoven fabric (blue) was used as the second test piece.
  • the basis weight (basis weight) was adjusted so as to have the first light transmittance shown in Table 1 below.
  • the second test pieces of Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 can be manufactured by the method disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 6115146.
  • the third test piece corresponding to the cover sheet 14, the base 61A of the base sheet 61, and the side sheet 13 had the second light transmission shown in Table 1 below.
  • a material whose basis weight (basis weight) was adjusted so as to obtain a ratio was used.
  • a spunbonded nonwoven fabric (polypropylene) having a basis weight of 16.5 g / m 2 was used for the third test piece corresponding to the cover sheet 14.
  • the total light transmittance [%] of each of the second test piece and the third test piece was measured.
  • the total light transmittance is a value measured by a measuring method based on JIS K 7361-1; (1997) (Plastic-Test method for total light transmittance of transparent materials-Part 1: Single beam method).
  • the total light transmittance [%] of the second test piece was defined as the first transmittance
  • the total light transmittance [%] of the third test piece was defined as the second transmittance.
  • a sensory test was performed to evaluate the visibility of the color of the first test piece visually.
  • the second evaluation was "impossible.”
  • the first transmittance was 50 [%] of less than 65 [%] and the second transmittance was 40 [%] of less than 50 [%], and both the first evaluation and the second evaluation were “impossible”. Met. Therefore, when the first transmittance is 65 to 99 [%] (preferably 90 [%] or more), the above-described first light transmittance is ensured, and the second transmittance is 50 to 99 [%] ( It is understood that the above-mentioned second light-transmitting property is ensured when the ratio is preferably 60% or more.
  • Examples 1 to 4 were compared with Comparative Examples 1 to 4.
  • CHM-02174 (white) manufactured by 3M Co. was used as the first test piece corresponding to the locking member 62, and corresponded to the base sheet 61 (hook carrier).
  • Spunbond nonwoven fabric (blue) was used as the second test piece.
  • This second test piece was provided with through-holes having the hole diameters, intervals, and numbers shown in Table 2 below.
  • the second test pieces of Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4 can be manufactured by using the method disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 6115146.
  • the third test pieces corresponding to the cover sheet 14, the base 61A of the base sheet 61, and the side sheet 13 had the second light transmission shown in Table 1 below.
  • a material whose basis weight (basis weight) was adjusted so as to obtain a ratio was used.
  • a spunbonded nonwoven fabric (polypropylene) having a basis weight of 16.5 g / m 2 was used for the third test piece corresponding to the cover sheet 14.
  • Examples 1 to 4 were compared with Comparative Examples 1 and 2.
  • CHM-02174 (white) manufactured by 3M was used as the first test piece corresponding to the locking member 62. did.
  • a spunbond nonwoven fabric (blue) was used as the second test piece corresponding to the base sheet 61, and the total light transmittance and the total light transmittance shown in Table 2 below were obtained.
  • a film-shaped portion (portion formed into a film) of the base sheet 61 was provided.
  • the second test pieces of Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 can be manufactured with the aid of the method disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 6115146. The part which was lost and coated was made into a film-like part.
  • the total light transmittance [%] of the second fiber test piece which is the test piece before film formation and the second film test piece which is the test piece after film formation were respectively measured.
  • the total light transmittance is a value measured by a measuring method based on JIS K 7361-1; (1997) (Plastic-Test method for total light transmittance of transparent materials-Part 1: Single beam method).
  • the total light transmittance [%] of the second film test piece was defined as the first transmittance
  • the total light transmittance [%] of the second fiber test piece was defined as the second transmittance.
  • a sensory test was performed to evaluate the visibility of the color of the first test piece visually.
  • the first transmittance was 65 to 90 [%], and an evaluation of “OK” or more was obtained. In particular, an evaluation of “excellent” was obtained when the first transmittance was 75% or more, and an evaluation of “good” or more was obtained when the first transmittance was 70% or more.
  • the first transmittance was less than 50 [%] (less than 65 [%]), and was evaluated as “impossible”. Therefore, when the first transmittance is 65 to 90% (preferably 70% or more, more preferably 75% or more), the visibility of the first test piece (corresponding to the locking member 62) is reduced. It can be seen that it is secured.
  • Examples 1 to 4 were compared with Comparative Examples 1 and 2.
  • CHM-02174 (white) manufactured by 3M was used as the first test piece corresponding to the locking member 62, and the base sheet 61 was used.
  • Spunbond nonwoven fabric (blue) was adopted as the second test piece to be performed.
  • the weight of the second test piece was adjusted so that the total light transmittance shown in Table 1 below was obtained.
  • the second test pieces of Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 can be manufactured by the method disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 6115146.
  • the total light transmittance [%] of the second test piece was measured respectively.
  • the total light transmittance is a value measured by a measuring method based on JIS K 7361-1; (1997) (Plastic-Test method for total light transmittance of transparent materials-Part 1: Single beam method).
  • a sensory test was performed to evaluate the visibility of the color of the first test piece visually.

Abstract

An absorbent article (1) that has a patch 4 that has: a main part (4A) that is arranged on a non-skin-surface side of a first design part (5A) and is transparent or semi-transparent or creates the appearance of the first design part (5A) integrally with the design part (5A); and a pair of first identification parts (4C) that are positioned at either extension-direction end part of the patch (4) and, when seen from the non-skin-surface side in an unfolded state, have a second coloring that is different from the coloring of the surroundings.

Description

吸収性物品Absorbent articles
 本発明は、吸収性物品に関する。 The present invention relates to an absorbent article.
 テープ型おむつは、幅方向外側に延出したファスニングテープが引っ張られて、フロントパッチ(ランディングテープ)に止め着けられることで、前身頃と後身頃とが着用者の腰部や腹部まわりで連結される。このようなテープ型おむつの一例として、特許文献1には、透明領域と不透明領域とを所定の面積比で設けた止着領域を有するファスニングテープを用いることで、製造時におけるファスニングテープの取り付け位置の確認が容易な使い捨ておむつが提案されている。 In a tape-type diaper, the front body and the back body are connected around the waist and abdomen of the wearer by fastening the fastening tape that extends outward in the width direction to the front patch (landing tape). . As an example of such a tape-type diaper, Patent Literature 1 discloses a fastening tape having a fastening area in which a transparent area and an opaque area are provided at a predetermined area ratio, so that the fastening tape can be attached at a manufacturing position. There has been proposed a disposable diaper that can be easily checked.
 また、特許文献2には、ファスニングテープの色とサイドフラップの色とを変えることで、紙おむつを着用する際にファスニングテープの位置の確認が容易な紙おむつが提案されている。 Patent Document 2 proposes a disposable diaper in which the position of the fastening tape can be easily confirmed when the disposable diaper is worn by changing the color of the fastening tape and the color of the side flap.
特開2004-167025号公報JP 2004-167025 A 特開2007-143870号公報JP 2007-143870 A
 本発明は、新規な吸収性物品の提供を目的とする。 The present invention aims to provide a novel absorbent article.
 上記の目的を達成するために、本発明に係る吸収性物品は、吸収体の幅方向の両端部において長手方向へ仮想的に延びる一対の折曲線で三つ折りにされた折畳状態から前記一対の折曲線での折り畳みが展開された平面状の展開状態に展開されて装着され、前記展開状態において肌面側を向く内面のうち前記一対の折曲線よりも幅方向外側の第一面が前記一対の折曲線よりも幅方向内側の第二面に対して前記折畳状態で対面して重ね合わせられ、製品出荷時において前記折畳状態をなす。
 本吸収性物品は、前記吸収体を有し、前身頃,股下部及び後身頃に亘って設けられた本体部と、前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の一方において、前記展開状態で前記本体部に対して幅方向の端部から外側に延出する止着部と、前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の他方において、幅方向に延在し、前記本体部に積層され、最も非肌面側に配置され、前記止着部が固定される矩形のパッチと、前記他方で外観可能に設けられた第一デザイン部を有するデザイン部と、を備える。
 前記本体部が、全域に亘って実質的に同じ第一色彩であり、前記パッチが、前記第一デザイン部に対して非肌面側に配置され、透明もしくは半透明である、又は、前記第一デザイン部と一体的に当該第一デザイン部の外観を構成する主部と、当該パッチにおいて延在方向の両端部に位置し、前記展開状態で非肌面側から見たときに周囲の色彩と異なる第二色彩である一対の第一識別部とを有する。
In order to achieve the above object, the absorbent article according to the present invention is configured such that the two ends of the absorbent body are folded in three from a pair of fold curves that virtually extend in the longitudinal direction at both ends in the width direction of the absorber. The fold at the fold curve is developed and mounted in a flat deployed state in which the fold at the fold curve is unfolded, and the first surface on the width direction outside of the pair of fold curves is an inner surface facing the skin surface side in the unfolded state. The folded surface is superposed in the folded state on the second surface on the inner side in the width direction from the pair of folding curves, and the folded state is formed when the product is shipped.
The present absorbent article has the absorbent body, and includes a main body provided over the front body, the crotch and the back body, and the main body in the unfolded state in one of the front body and the rear body. A fastening portion extending outward from an end in the width direction, and the other of the front body and the rear body, extends in the width direction, is laminated on the main body, and is disposed on the most non-skin side. A rectangular patch to which the fastening portion is fixed, and a design portion having a first design portion provided to be externally visible on the other side.
The main body portion is substantially the same first color over the entire area, and the patch is disposed on the non-skin side with respect to the first design portion, and is transparent or translucent; or A main part integrally forming an appearance of the first design part with the one design part; and peripheral colors located at both ends in the extending direction of the patch when viewed from the non-skin side in the unfolded state. And a pair of first identification portions each having a second color different from the first identification portion.
 本発明によれば、パッチの位置の判別、及び、使用時において止着部(ファスニングテープ)をパッチへ固定する際の位置決めが容易である、新規な吸収性物品が得られる。また、本発明によれば、着用者に対する吸収性物品の前後の判別が容易である。 According to the present invention, it is possible to obtain a novel absorbent article in which it is easy to determine the position of a patch and to position the fixing portion (fastening tape) when fixing the patch to the patch during use. Further, according to the present invention, it is easy to determine the front and rear of the absorbent article for the wearer.
第一実施形態に関する吸収性物品の基本構成を示す分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view showing the basic composition of the absorptive article concerning a first embodiment. 非肌面側から平面視した展開状態の吸収性物品の基本構成を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic structure of the absorbent article of the expansion | deployment state when planarly viewed from the non-skin side. 図3Aは一方の仮想線(折曲線)にて本体部を折り畳んだ状態の吸収性物品を肌面側から平面視した模式図であり、図3Bは一対の仮想線にて本体部を折り畳んだ状態の吸収性物品を肌面側から平面視した模式図であり、図3Cは図3Bの吸収性物品が更に折り畳まれた状態を示す斜視図である。FIG. 3A is a schematic view of the absorbent article in a state where the main body is folded along one virtual line (folding curve) as viewed from above on the skin surface side, and FIG. 3B is a diagram in which the main body is folded along a pair of virtual lines. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the absorbent article in the state from the skin surface side, and FIG. 3C is a perspective view which shows the state in which the absorbent article of FIG. 3B was further folded. 図2のIV部分における幅方向の断面を示す模式図である。FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating a cross section in a width direction of an IV part in FIG. 2. 図3AのV部分における幅方向の断面を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the cross section of the width direction in the V part of FIG. 3A. パッチの端部における断面を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram showing a cross section at an end of a patch. 第二実施形態に関するテープ型紙おむつの平面視展開図である。It is a top view development view of the tape type paper diaper regarding 2nd embodiment. 第二実施形態に関するテープ型紙おむつの分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view of a tape type paper diaper concerning a second embodiment. 図7のIX-IX矢視断面図である。FIG. 8 is a sectional view taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 7. 第二実施形態に関するテープ型紙おむつの肌非対向面側の下方からの斜視図である。It is a perspective view from the lower part of the skin non-opposite surface side of the tape-type paper diaper regarding 2nd embodiment. 変形例に関するテープ型紙おむつの肌非対向面側の下方からの斜視図である。It is a perspective view from the lower part of the skin non-facing surface side of the tape-type paper diaper regarding a modification.
 以下、本件を実施するための形態を説明する。本実施形態で述べる吸収性物品は、装着時に着用者から排泄される尿や経血といった液体の水分(以下「排泄水分」という)を吸収体で吸収し保持する衛生用品である。この吸収性物品には、テープ型の紙おむつ(いわゆる「使い捨ておむつ」)が含まれる。
 以下の実施形態では、吸収性物品としてテープ型の紙おむつ(以下、単に「テープ型おむつ」という。)を例示する。
Hereinafter, an embodiment for carrying out the present case will be described. The absorbent article described in the present embodiment is a sanitary article that absorbs and retains liquid moisture such as urine and menstrual blood (hereinafter referred to as “excreted moisture”) excreted from the wearer when worn. The absorbent article includes a tape-type paper diaper (a so-called “disposable diaper”).
In the following embodiments, a tape-type paper diaper (hereinafter, simply referred to as “tape-type diaper”) will be exemplified as an absorbent article.
 テープ型おむつは、着用者に装着され、排泄物の水分を吸収して保持するおむつの一種である。テープ型おむつは、着用者の腰回りが周状に連続して構成されたパンツ型おむつとは異なり、腰回りの前後に分離した前身頃及び後身頃をもつ。このテープ型おむつは、乳幼児のほか、成人の要介護者といったさまざまな着用者に装着される。 A tape-type diaper is a type of diaper that is worn by a wearer and absorbs and retains excrement moisture. The tape-type diaper has a front body and a back body separated before and after the waist, unlike a pants-type diaper in which the waist of the wearer is continuously formed in a circumferential shape. This tape-type diaper is worn by various wearers, such as infants and adults, who need care.
 本実施形態では、説明に用いる方向を下記のように定義する。
 テープ型おむつについて、着用者の腹部に対向して配置される前身頃と背部に対向して配置される後身頃とを結ぶ方向を長手方向とする。これらの前身頃(長手方向の一側)と後身頃(長手方向の他側)との間(長手方向の中央)には、着用者の股下に配置(股間に対向して配置)される股下部が位置する。また、テープ型おむつが着用者に装着された状態(以下「装着状態」と略称する)において、着用者の肌に向かう側(装着状態で内側)を肌面側(肌対向面側)とし、肌面側の反対側(装着状態で外側)を非肌面側(肌非対向面側)とする。さらに、肌面側と非肌面側とを結ぶ方向を厚み方向とし、長手方向と厚み方向の何れにも直交する方向を幅方向とする。そのほか、厚み方向に沿った方向から視ることを平面視とする。そして、平面視での幅方向を左右ともいう。
 本明細書において、例えば「1~100」との数値範囲の表記は、その下限値「1」及び上限値「100」の双方を包含するものとする。また、他の数値範囲の表記も同様である。
In the present embodiment, directions used for description are defined as follows.
Regarding the tape-type diaper, a longitudinal direction is defined as a direction connecting a front body arranged to face the abdomen of the wearer and a rear body arranged to face the back. Between these front body (one side in the longitudinal direction) and the back body (the other side in the longitudinal direction) (the center in the longitudinal direction), a crotch arranged at the wearer's crotch (disposed opposite the crotch) Department is located. Further, in a state in which the tape-type diaper is worn on the wearer (hereinafter abbreviated as “wearing state”), a side facing the wearer's skin (inside in the wearing state) is a skin surface side (skin-facing surface side), The opposite side (outside in the mounted state) of the skin side is defined as the non-skin side (skin non-opposite side). Further, a direction connecting the skin surface side and the non-skin surface side is defined as a thickness direction, and a direction orthogonal to both the longitudinal direction and the thickness direction is defined as a width direction. In addition, viewing from a direction along the thickness direction is referred to as a plan view. The width direction in plan view is also called left and right.
In the present specification, for example, the notation of a numerical value range of “1 to 100” includes both the lower limit value “1” and the upper limit value “100”. The same applies to the notation of other numerical ranges.
[I.第一実施形態]
[1.構成]
 まず、図1及び図2を参照して、テープ型おむつ1の基本構成を説明する。その後に、テープ型おむつ1の詳細な構成を述べる。なお、下記の説明では「テープ型おむつ」を単に「おむつ」と略称する。
[I. First Embodiment]
[1. Constitution]
First, the basic configuration of the tape-type diaper 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. After that, the detailed configuration of the tape-type diaper 1 will be described. In the following description, “tape-type diaper” is simply referred to as “diaper”.
[1-1.基本構成]
 おむつ1は、幅方向の中心線CL1を基準として対称に構成されている。また、おむつ1は長手方向Lに沿って前身頃1A、股下部1B及び後身頃1Cの三つの領域に大別される。
[1-1. Basic configuration]
The diaper 1 is configured symmetrically with respect to the center line CL1 in the width direction. The diaper 1 is roughly divided into three regions along the longitudinal direction L: a front body 1A, a crotch 1B, and a back body 1C.
〈吸収体〉
 おむつ1には、前身頃1A、股下部1B及び後身頃1Cに亘って長手方向に延びる吸収体10が内蔵されている。この吸収体10は、股下部1Bにおいて長手方向全域に配置され、前身頃1A及び後身頃1Cにおいて長手方向端部を除く大部分に配置される。
 吸収体10は、水分を吸収して保持するマット状の部材である。この吸収体10では、粉砕あるいは解繊されたパルプ(いわゆる「フラッフパルプ」)に吸水性樹脂(「SAP〈Super Absorbent Polymer〉」とも称される)を混合したマットが親水性の不織布やティシュなどのラップシートで被包(ラップ)されている。
<Absorber>
The diaper 1 has a built-in absorber 10 extending in the longitudinal direction over the front body 1A, the crotch 1B, and the back body 1C. The absorbent body 10 is arranged in the entire crotch portion 1B in the longitudinal direction, and is arranged in most of the front body 1A and the back body 1C except for the longitudinal ends.
The absorber 10 is a mat-shaped member that absorbs and retains moisture. In this absorbent body 10, a mat in which a water-absorbing resin (also referred to as "SAP (Super Absorbent Polymer)") is mixed with pulverized or defibrated pulp (so-called "fluff pulp") is made of a hydrophilic nonwoven fabric or tissue. Wrapped in a wrap sheet.
〈シート〉
 上記した吸収体10に対して肌面側及び非肌面側には、以下に述べる種々のシート11,12,13,14がおむつ1の長手方向全域に設けられ、本体部100が構成される。つまり、本体部100は、吸収体10とシート11,12,13,14との積層体である。
 吸収体10に対して、肌面側にはセンターシート11が積層され、非肌面側にはバックシート12が積層される。バックシート12の非肌面側には、カバーシート14が積層される。また、センターシート11の側方(幅方向外側)には、サイドシート13が配置される。
<Seat>
On the skin side and the non-skin side with respect to the above-described absorber 10, various sheets 11, 12, 13, and 14 described below are provided over the entire area in the longitudinal direction of the diaper 1, and the main body 100 is configured. . That is, the main body 100 is a laminate of the absorber 10 and the sheets 11, 12, 13, and 14.
For the absorber 10, a center sheet 11 is laminated on the skin side, and a back sheet 12 is laminated on the non-skin side. The cover sheet 14 is laminated on the non-skin side of the back sheet 12. A side sheet 13 is arranged on the side (outside in the width direction) of the center sheet 11.
 センターシート11は、水分を透過させて吸収体10に吸収させるため、透水性を有する。また、センターシート11は、サイドシート13を除いて、おむつ1において最も肌面側に配置される(図1参照)。このことから、センターシート11は「トップシート」とも称される。このセンターシート11は、吸収体10よりも幅方向寸法が大きく、肌面側から吸収体10を被覆する。 The center sheet 11 has water permeability in order to allow moisture to permeate and be absorbed by the absorber 10. The center sheet 11 is disposed closest to the skin surface of the diaper 1 except for the side sheet 13 (see FIG. 1). For this reason, the center sheet 11 is also referred to as a “top sheet”. The center sheet 11 has a larger dimension in the width direction than the absorber 10 and covers the absorber 10 from the skin surface side.
 バックシート12は、吸収体10からの液漏れを防ぐため、非透水性を有する。
 また、サイドシート13は、幅方向側方への液漏れを防ぐため、疎水性を有する。このサイドシート13は、おむつ1において最も肌面側に配置される。このことから、サイドシート13は、センターシート11と同様に「トップシート」とも称される。
The back sheet 12 has water impermeability to prevent liquid leakage from the absorber 10.
The side sheet 13 has hydrophobicity in order to prevent the liquid from leaking laterally. The side sheet 13 is disposed closest to the skin surface of the diaper 1. For this reason, the side seat 13 is also referred to as a “top sheet”, like the center seat 11.
 カバーシート14は、上記した吸収体10及びシート11,12,13を非肌面側から被覆する。このカバーシート14は、バックシート12を補強するとともに触感(たとえば手触り)を向上させるために設けられる。このカバーシート14としては、通気性を高める観点から、いわゆるエアスルー不織布を用いることが好ましい。
 なお、カバーシート14は、単層構造に限らず、インナカバーシートやアウターカバーシートを有する多層構造であってもよい。
The cover sheet 14 covers the absorbent body 10 and the sheets 11, 12, and 13 from the non-skin side. The cover sheet 14 is provided to reinforce the back sheet 12 and to improve the tactile sensation (for example, touch). As the cover sheet 14, it is preferable to use a so-called air-through nonwoven fabric from the viewpoint of enhancing the air permeability.
The cover sheet 14 is not limited to a single-layer structure, and may have a multi-layer structure having an inner cover sheet and an outer cover sheet.
〈ギャザー〉
 そのほか、おむつ1には、装着状態における着用者への追従性を高めるため、立体ギャザー21、レッグギャザー22やウエストギャザー23などのギャザーが設けられている。これらのギャザー21,22,23では、糸ゴム31,32,33(弾性部材)の貼り付けられたサイドシート13やバックシート12などが皺寄せられる。なお、糸ゴム31,32,33に替えて又は加えて、天然ゴムあるいは伸縮フィルムといった弾性部材を用いてもよい。
<gather>
In addition, the diaper 1 is provided with gathers, such as a three-dimensional gather 21, a leg gather 22, and a waist gather 23, in order to enhance the ability to follow the wearer in the worn state. In these gathers 21, 22, 23, the side sheet 13 and the back sheet 12 to which the thread rubbers 31, 32, 33 (elastic members) are attached are wrinkled. Note that an elastic member such as natural rubber or an elastic film may be used instead of or in addition to the thread rubbers 31, 32, and 33.
 立体ギャザー21は、幅方向外側への排泄物の漏出を防ぐため、サイドシート13の幅方向内側に配備される。この立体ギャザー21では、サイドシート13の幅方向内側の端縁で長手方向に沿って糸ゴム31が設けられている。
 レッグギャザー22は、着用者の脚部に対するおむつ1の隙間を抑えるため、装着状態において着用者の脚部周縁となる箇所に設けられる。このレッグギャザー22では、股下部1B及びその周辺においてバックシート12の幅方向外側の端縁で、長手方向に沿って糸ゴム32が設けられている。
 ウエストギャザー23は、幅方向に伸縮し、着用者の胴回りのフィット性を調節するため、後身頃1Cの長手方向端部に設けられる。このウエストギャザー23では、幅方向に沿って糸ゴム33が設けられている。
The three-dimensional gathers 21 are disposed inside the side sheet 13 in the width direction to prevent excrement from leaking to the outside in the width direction. In the three-dimensional gather 21, a rubber thread 31 is provided along the longitudinal direction at the inner edge in the width direction of the side sheet 13.
The leg gathers 22 are provided at locations where the diapers 1 are to be attached to the wearer's legs and become peripheral edges of the wearer's legs in the mounted state. In this leg gather 22, a thread rubber 32 is provided along the longitudinal direction at the outer edge in the width direction of the back sheet 12 in the crotch portion 1B and its periphery.
The waist gather 23 expands and contracts in the width direction and is provided at a longitudinal end of the back body 1C in order to adjust the fit of the wearer's waist. In this waist gather 23, a thread rubber 33 is provided along the width direction.
〈ファスニング機構〉
 このおむつ1には、後身頃1Cで幅方向外側に延出するように取り付けられた一対の止着部6,6、いわゆるファスニングテープ6,6が設けられ、前身頃1Aの最も非肌面側(外表面)にパッチ4が設けられている。ここでは、矩形のパッチ4が用いられる。ファスニングテープ6,6が引っ張られてパッチ4に止め着けられ、固定されることで、おむつ1が着用者に装着される。なお、以下において「ファスニングテープ」を「テープ」と略称する。
 これらのパッチ4及びテープ6によって、止め着け機能を実現するファスニング機構が構成される。なお、図1及び図2では、本体部100における後身頃1Cの幅方向両側に一つずつ設けられた一対のテープ6,6を例示する。ただし、幅方向Wの端部に設けられるテープ6の数は特に限定されず、少なくとも幅方向両側に一つずつのテープ6が設けられていればよい。
<Fastening mechanism>
The diaper 1 is provided with a pair of fastening portions 6, 6 so-called fastening tapes 6, 6 attached to the rear body 1C so as to extend outward in the width direction, and the most non-skin side of the front body 1A. The patch 4 is provided on the (outer surface). Here, a rectangular patch 4 is used. The diaper 1 is attached to the wearer by the fastening tapes 6 and 6 being pulled and fixed to the patch 4 and fixed. In the following, “fastening tape” is abbreviated as “tape”.
The patch 4 and the tape 6 constitute a fastening mechanism for realizing the fastening function. 1 and 2 illustrate a pair of tapes 6 and 6 provided one by one on both sides in the width direction of the back body 1C of the main body 100. However, the number of tapes 6 provided at the end in the width direction W is not particularly limited, and it is sufficient that at least one tape 6 is provided at least on both sides in the width direction.
(ファスニングテープ)
 テープ6は、基材シート61(フックキャリア)と係止部材62(メカニカルファスナ)とを有する。
 基材シート61の幅方向内側の基部61A(一箇所のみ符号を付す)は、例えば、ヒートシールや超音波シールによってサイドシート13及び/又はカバーシート14に熱融着されていてもよいし、ホットメルトなどの接着剤によってサイドシート13及び/又はカバーシート14に接着されていてもよい。また、図1に示すように、基部61Aがサイドシート13とカバーシート14との間に挟装され、シート13,14に熱融着又は接着されていてもよい。つまり、基部61Aをサイドシート13とカバーシート14との間に挟装する態様では、基部61Aに対して、サイドシート13のうち幅方向外側の端部が肌面側に積層され、カバーシート14のうち幅方向外側の端部が非肌面側に積層される。
 また、基材シート61において、基部61Aを除く延出部61B(一箇所のみ符号を付す)は、シート13,14よりも幅方向外側に延在する状態に設けられている。
(Fastening tape)
The tape 6 has a base sheet 61 (hook carrier) and a locking member 62 (mechanical fastener).
The base 61A (indicated only at one location) on the inner side in the width direction of the base sheet 61 may be thermally fused to the side sheet 13 and / or the cover sheet 14 by, for example, heat sealing or ultrasonic sealing, It may be bonded to the side sheet 13 and / or the cover sheet 14 with an adhesive such as hot melt. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the base 61 </ b> A may be sandwiched between the side sheet 13 and the cover sheet 14 and may be heat-sealed or bonded to the sheets 13 and 14. That is, in the mode in which the base 61A is sandwiched between the side sheet 13 and the cover sheet 14, the widthwise outer end of the side sheet 13 is laminated on the skin surface side with respect to the base 61A. Of these, the outer end in the width direction is laminated on the non-skin side.
Further, in the base sheet 61, an extension 61 </ b> B except for the base 61 </ b> A (only one reference numeral is attached) is provided so as to extend outward in the width direction from the sheets 13 and 14.
 基材シート61を構成する材料としては、例えば、織布、不織布、その他の布、紙、プラスチックフィルム又はこれらの複合素材を用いることができる。また、不織布を構成する素材としては、例えば、ポリエチレン系、ポリプロピレン系、ポリアミド系、ポリエステル系、ポリ塩化ビニル系又はポリスチレン系の合成樹脂を用いることが好ましい。 材料 As a material constituting the base sheet 61, for example, a woven cloth, a nonwoven cloth, other cloth, paper, a plastic film, or a composite material thereof can be used. Further, as a material constituting the nonwoven fabric, it is preferable to use, for example, a polyethylene-based, polypropylene-based, polyamide-based, polyester-based, polyvinyl chloride-based or polystyrene-based synthetic resin.
 係止部材62は、基材シート61における延出部61Bの肌面側に設けられる。すなわち、係止部材62と本体部100とが基材シート61によって幅方向に結ばれている。係止部材62はパッチ4に係合可能な部材である。係止部材62は、例えば、粘着剤や粘着テープであってもよいし、パッチ4に機械的に結合される面状ファスナであってもよい。面状ファスナとは、フック材(雄部材)とループ材(雌部材)の機械的結合により固定を行う仕組みである。面状ファスナは、例えば、表面に多数の突起(鉤状、きのこ状等)が形成されたフック材と、表面にループ状の繊維が配置されたループ材との組み合わせにより構成される。例えば、テープ6の係止部材62としてフック材を採用し、パッチ4の表面にループ材を形成すればよい。ただし、テープ6の係止部材62としてループ材を採用し、パッチ4の表面にフック材を形成することも可能である。ループ材の表面にフック材を貼り合わせると、フック材の多数の突起がループ材の表面に係合する。このため、面状ファスナによれば、フック材とループ材を剥離可能な状態で、かつ強固に固着させることができる。このように、繰り返しの使用が可能である点、及び固着強度が高いという点において、面状ファスナを採用することが好ましい。 The locking member 62 is provided on the skin side of the extending portion 61B of the base sheet 61. That is, the locking member 62 and the main body 100 are connected in the width direction by the base sheet 61. The locking member 62 is a member that can be engaged with the patch 4. The locking member 62 may be, for example, an adhesive or an adhesive tape, or may be a planar fastener mechanically coupled to the patch 4. The planar fastener is a mechanism for fixing the hook member (male member) and the loop member (female member) by mechanical connection. The planar fastener is composed of, for example, a combination of a hook material having a large number of protrusions (hook-like, mushroom-like, etc.) formed on the surface and a loop material having loop-shaped fibers arranged on the surface. For example, a hook material may be used as the locking member 62 of the tape 6 and a loop material may be formed on the surface of the patch 4. However, it is also possible to adopt a loop material as the locking member 62 of the tape 6 and form a hook material on the surface of the patch 4. When the hook member is attached to the surface of the loop member, a number of protrusions of the hook member engage with the surface of the loop member. Therefore, according to the planar fastener, the hook member and the loop member can be firmly fixed in a peelable state. As described above, it is preferable to use the planar fastener in that it can be used repeatedly and has high fixing strength.
(パッチ)
 パッチ4は、本体部100における前身頃1Aの外表面においてテープ6の止め着けを容易にするために設けられる。つまり、パッチ4は、本体部100の非肌面側に外装(積層)される。
 係止部材62がフック材の場合、パッチ4としては、フィルム層と、その外面全体に設けられたループ材とを有するフィルムタイプのものを好適に用いることができる。ループ材には、係止部材62のフック材が着脱自在に係合可能である。この場合におけるループ材としては、糸で編まれた網状体であってループを有するものがフィルム層上に取り付けられている形態の他、熱可塑性樹脂の不織布が間欠的な超音波シールによりフィルム層上に取り付けられ、不織布の繊維がループをなす形態等が挙げられる。また、パッチ4として、熱可塑性樹脂の不織布にエンボス加工を施したものでフィルム層が無いフィルムレスタイプのものを用いることもできる。フィルム層やループ材を構成する材料としては不織布が好ましく、基材シート61を構成する材料として例示した合成樹脂等を用いた不織布がより好ましい。
(patch)
The patch 4 is provided on the outer surface of the front body 1 </ b> A of the main body 100 in order to facilitate the fastening of the tape 6. That is, the patch 4 is packaged (laminated) on the non-skin side of the main body 100.
When the locking member 62 is a hook material, a film-type patch having a film layer and a loop material provided on the entire outer surface thereof can be suitably used as the patch 4. The hook member of the locking member 62 can be detachably engaged with the loop member. As the loop material in this case, in addition to the form in which a net-like body knitted with a thread and having a loop is attached on the film layer, a non-woven fabric of a thermoplastic resin is intermittently ultrasonically sealed with the film layer And a form in which the fibers of the nonwoven fabric form a loop. Further, as the patch 4, a filmless type in which a nonwoven fabric of a thermoplastic resin is embossed and has no film layer can be used. As a material forming the film layer or the loop material, a nonwoven fabric is preferable, and a nonwoven fabric using a synthetic resin or the like exemplified as the material forming the base sheet 61 is more preferable.
 上記のパッチ4は、以下に例示する機能1~3の少なくも何れかを満たす。
  ・機能1:係止部材62を取り付けるための適正な位置を示す機能
  ・機能2:係止部材62の繰り返しの止め着けを安定させる機能
  ・機能3:カバーシート14に止め着け不能な係止部材62の止め着け先を確保する機能
 上記の機能1は、パッチ4の延在範囲に係止部材62が止め着けられることにより、適正な位置へのテープ6の止め着けに寄与し、着用者へのおむつ1の適正な装着に資する。
 上記の機能2は、フック材の係止部材62が繰り返し止め着けられた際に毛羽立ちし難い強度(物性)をパッチ4にもたせることにより、係止部材62の繰り返しの止め着けが安定する。仮に、カバーシート14(不織布)にフック材の係止部材が繰り返し止め着けられる場合には、不織布の毛羽立ちや止め着け安定性の低下を招くおそれがある。これに対し、パッチ4に係止部材62を止め着けることにより、毛羽立ちの抑制や止め着け安定性の確保に資する。
 上記の機能3は、係止部材62がカバーシート14に止め着けられない場合に、係止部材62の止め着け先を確保することができる。
The patch 4 satisfies at least one of the functions 1 to 3 exemplified below.
-Function 1: Function to indicate an appropriate position for attaching the locking member 62-Function 2: Function to stabilize repeated fastening of the locking member 62-Function 3: Locking member that cannot be fixed to the cover sheet 14 Function 1 for Securing the Stopping Point of 62 The function 1 described above contributes to fastening of the tape 6 to an appropriate position by fastening the locking member 62 to the extension range of the patch 4 and to the wearer. Contributes to the proper wearing of the diaper 1.
The above function 2 provides the patch 4 with strength (physical properties) that makes it difficult for the hook member 62 to be fluffed when the hook member 62 is repeatedly fastened, so that the fastening member 62 can be stably fastened repeatedly. If the hook members are repeatedly fastened to the cover sheet 14 (nonwoven fabric), the nonwoven fabric may be fluffed or the fastening stability may be reduced. On the other hand, fixing the locking member 62 to the patch 4 contributes to suppressing fluffing and securing the fixing stability.
The above-mentioned function 3 can secure a place to which the locking member 62 is fixed when the locking member 62 is not fixed to the cover sheet 14.
〈シート積層部〉
 シート積層部50は、本体部100とテープ6との結合部位である。シート積層部50では、基材シート61のうち幅方向内側の基部61A(挟装部,一箇所のみ符号を付す)が、サイドシート13(肌面側シート)とカバーシート14(非肌面側シート)との間に挟装されている。この基部61Aを除く延出部61B(一箇所のみ符号を付す)は、シート13,14よりも幅方向外側に延在する状態に設けられている。
<Sheet lamination section>
The sheet stacking section 50 is a connection portion between the main body 100 and the tape 6. In the sheet stacking section 50, the base 61A (the sandwiching portion, only one of which is denoted by a reference numeral) of the base sheet 61 in the width direction includes a side sheet 13 (skin side sheet) and a cover sheet 14 (non-skin side). Sheet). The extension portion 61B (only one reference numeral is given) excluding the base portion 61A is provided so as to extend outward in the width direction from the sheets 13 and 14.
 図4に示すように、シート積層部50では、基材シート61の基部61Aに対しては、サイドシート13のうち幅方向外側の縁部(以下「サイド外縁部」という。)13aが肌面側に積層され、カバーシート14のうち幅方向外側の縁部(以下「カバー外縁部」という。)14aが非肌面側に積層されている。つまり、シート積層部50では、基材シート61の幅方向内側に対して肌面側及び非肌面側のそれぞれに二種のシート13,14が積層されている。なお、図4では、各構成を把握しやすくするため、厚み方向の寸法を誇張して示す。 As shown in FIG. 4, in the sheet stacking unit 50, the outer edge in the width direction (hereinafter, referred to as “side outer edge”) 13 a of the side sheet 13 with respect to the base 61 A of the base sheet 61 is a skin surface. The outer edge of the cover sheet 14 in the width direction (hereinafter, referred to as “cover outer edge”) 14a is stacked on the non-skin side. That is, in the sheet stacking unit 50, two types of sheets 13 and 14 are stacked on the skin side and the non-skin side with respect to the width direction inner side of the base sheet 61. In FIG. 4, the dimensions in the thickness direction are exaggerated for easy understanding of each configuration.
 さらに、サイドシート13及びカバーシート14は、外縁部13a,14aのそれぞれが基材シート61の基部61Aと接着層L12によって接着(結合)されている。具体的には、サイド外縁部13aと基部3Aとが第一接着層Lで貼り合わせられ、カバー外縁部14aと基部3Aとが第二接着層Lで貼り合わせられる。接着層L12には、接着性能の発揮タイミングを調節可能なオンデマンド型接着剤を用いることが好ましい。
 オンデマンド型接着剤としては、ホットメルト接着剤やUV(UltraViolet)硬化型接着剤が挙げられる。ホットメルト接着剤は、熱が印加されて溶融した後に硬化する。また、UV硬化型接着剤は、紫外線が照射されて硬化する。言い換えれば、ホットメルト接着剤は、熱が印加されるまでは接着性能を発揮しない。同様に、UV硬化型接着剤は、紫外線が照射されるまでは接着性能を発揮しない。
Further, the side sheet 13 and the cover sheet 14, the outer edge portions 13a, each of 14a is bonded (coupled) with the base 61A of the base sheet 61 by the adhesive layer L 12. Specifically, the side edge portion 13a and the base portion 3A is adhered by the first adhesive layer L 1, and the cover outer edge 14a and the base portion 3A are bonded with a second adhesive layer L 2. The adhesive layer L 12, it is preferable to use an adjustable on-demand adhesive exhibits timing of adhesive performance.
Examples of the on-demand adhesive include a hot melt adhesive and a UV (UltraViolet) curing adhesive. The hot melt adhesive is cured after being melted by applying heat. The UV-curable adhesive is cured by being irradiated with ultraviolet rays. In other words, hot melt adhesives do not exhibit adhesive performance until heat is applied. Similarly, UV-curable adhesives do not exhibit adhesive performance until they are irradiated with ultraviolet light.
 接着層L12には、UV照射のように特殊な設備が不要なことから、ホットメルト接着剤を用いることが特に好ましい。ただし、その他の公知の接着剤を接着層L12に用いてもよい。あるいは、接着層L12に替えて、超音波溶着やヒートシールといった接着手段によって接着層L12の接着機能を代替してもよい。 The adhesive layer L 12, a special equipment not be necessary as UV radiation, it is particularly preferable to use a hot melt adhesive. However, other known adhesives may be used in the adhesive layer L 12. Alternatively, instead of the adhesive layer L 12, it may be replaced with adhesive function of the adhesive layer L 12 by adhesive means such as ultrasonic welding or heat sealing.
〈デザイン部〉
 図2に示すように、本体部100には、前身頃1A及び後身頃1Cのそれぞれに外観可能な一対のデザイン部5A,5Bが付されている。デザイン部5A,5Bは、文字、図形、記号、模様若しくは色彩又はこれらの結合(以下、単に「図柄」という。)を有し、デザイン部5A,5Bとそれ以外の部分とを目視により区別可能な領域である。このようなデザイン部5A,5Bは、例えば、バックシート12又はカバーシート14の非肌面側に印刷加工を施すことで設けられる。あるいは、バックシート12とカバーシート14との間にデザイン部5が別設される。図2には、バックシート12に設けられたデザイン部5A,5Bを示す。
 前身頃1A及び後身頃1Cにおいてデザイン部5A,5Bが配置される領域は特に限定されない。例えば、図2には、前身頃1A及び後身頃1Cのそれぞれにおいて、本体部100の長手方向端部から長手方向寸法の1/3又は1/4程度の位置までの範囲で長手方向の境界が規定され、吸収体10の幅方向寸法と略等しい範囲で幅方向の境界が規定されたデザイン部5A,5Bを示す。
 デザイン部5A,5Bは互いに同一の図柄であってもよいし、互いに異なる図柄であってもよい。また、デザイン部5A,5Bは互いに少なくとも一部が同一の図柄であってもよい。なお、以下において「デザイン部5A,5B」を単に「デザイン部5」と記載することがある。
<Design Department>
As shown in FIG. 2, the main body 100 is provided with a pair of design portions 5A and 5B that can be viewed from the front 1A and the back 1C. The design units 5A and 5B have characters, figures, symbols, patterns or colors or a combination thereof (hereinafter simply referred to as "patterns"), and can visually distinguish the design units 5A and 5B from the other parts. Area. Such design portions 5A and 5B are provided by performing printing on the non-skin side of the back sheet 12 or the cover sheet 14, for example. Alternatively, the design part 5 is separately provided between the back sheet 12 and the cover sheet 14. FIG. 2 shows the design sections 5A and 5B provided on the back sheet 12.
In the front body 1A and the back body 1C, the area where the design parts 5A and 5B are arranged is not particularly limited. For example, in FIG. 2, in each of the front body 1 </ b> A and the back body 1 </ b> C, a longitudinal boundary is defined in a range from a longitudinal end of the main body 100 to a position of about 3 or の of a longitudinal dimension. The design portions 5A and 5B are defined, and the boundaries in the width direction are defined in a range substantially equal to the width dimension of the absorber 10.
The design portions 5A and 5B may have the same design or different designs. The design parts 5A and 5B may have the same design at least in part. In the following, “ design units 5A and 5B” may be simply referred to as “design unit 5”.
 ここで例示するデザイン部5A,5Bには、図2に示すように、前身頃1Aの前デザイン部5A(第一デザイン部)と及び後身頃1Cの後デザイン部5B(第二デザイン部)とが設けられている。
 本実施形態のデザイン部5A,5Bは、外観が互いに同一又は類似する。ここでいう「外観が互いに同一又は類似するデザイン部5A,5B」には、下記に例を列挙する態様1~4の少なくとも何れかが含まれる。
  ・態様1:色彩又は模様が同一又は類似するデザイン部5A,5B
  ・態様2:模様の配置が同一又は類似するデザイン部5A,5B
  ・態様3:幅方向寸法が同一又は略同一のデザイン部5A,5B
  ・態様4:長手方向寸法が同一又は略同一のデザイン部5A,5B
 例えば、デザイン部5A,5Bは、長手方向に線対称又は略線対称な外観をなしている。
As shown in FIG. 2, the design sections 5A and 5B exemplified here include a front design section 5A (first design section) of the front body 1A and a rear design section 5B (second design section) of the back body 1C. Is provided.
The appearance of the design units 5A and 5B of the present embodiment is the same or similar to each other. The “ design portions 5A and 5B having the same or similar appearance” here include at least one of modes 1 to 4 listed below.
-Aspect 1: Design parts 5A and 5B having the same or similar color or pattern
-Aspect 2: Design parts 5A and 5B with the same or similar pattern arrangement
-Aspect 3: Design portions 5A and 5B having the same or substantially the same width dimension.
Aspect 4: Design portions 5A and 5B having the same or substantially the same longitudinal dimension
For example, the design portions 5A and 5B have a line-symmetric or substantially line-symmetric appearance in the longitudinal direction.
[1-2.詳細構成]
 前身頃1A及び後身頃1Cのそれぞれに外観可能な一対のデザイン部5A,5Bの付された本体部100において、パッチ4は前デザイン部5Aに外装(非肌面側に配置)される。図2に示すように、パッチ4は前デザイン部5Aとの重複部4A(主部)を有し、重複部4Aにテープ6が止め着けられて固定される。なお、前デザイン部5Aの幅方向寸法よりもパッチ4の幅方向寸法が大きい場合には、パッチ4は、重複部4Aの幅方向外側に、デザイン部5と重複しない非重複部4B,4Bを有することがある。
 このような態様のおむつ1では、前デザイン部5Aとパッチ4との視覚的な混同を引き起こすことがあり、デザイン部5A,5Bのどちら側にパッチ4が配置されているか視認が困難になること、つまり、使用者にとってパッチ4の位置の判別が困難になることがある。パッチ4の位置が判別できないと、使用者は、テープ6を適正位置に迅速に固定し、適度なフィット感で着用者におむつ1を装着することが難しい。また、使用者は、パッチ4の位置によりおむつ1の前後を認識することがあるため、パッチ4の位置が判別できないと、着用者に対するおむつ1の前後を錯誤するおそれがある。
 特に、デザイン部5の視認性や見栄えを向上させるため、光透過性を有するパッチ4、すなわち透明又は半透明の材料を用いたパッチ4や、前デザイン部5Aが有する色彩と同系の色彩を有するパッチ4、前デザイン部5Aと同一の図柄のパッチ4や、前デザイン部5Aと少なくとも一部が同一の図柄を有するパッチ4といった一体的に前デザイン部5Aの外観を構成する重複部4Aの設けられたパッチ4を、デザイン部5に外装する場合には、パッチ4の位置の判別はさらに困難になる傾向がある。また、本体部100に、互いに同一の図柄のデザイン部5A,5Bや、互いに少なくとも一部が同一の図柄のデザイン部5A,5Bを設ける場合には、おむつ1の前後の判別が特に困難になる傾向がある。
 なお、パッチ4の「光透過性」とは、パッチ4が外装された位置のデザイン部5に光を透過させると共に、そのデザイン部5が反射する反射光を視認可能な程度に透過させる機能である。また、「同系の色彩」とは、実質的に同じ色彩を含む同系統の色彩、すなわち、色相が同じ又は近似する色彩を意味する。
[1-2. Detailed configuration]
In the main body 100 provided with a pair of design portions 5A and 5B that can be seen on the front body 1A and the back body 1C, the patch 4 is exteriorly provided on the front design part 5A (disposed on the non-skin side). As shown in FIG. 2, the patch 4 has an overlapping part 4A (main part) with the front design part 5A, and the tape 6 is fixed to the overlapping part 4A. When the width dimension of the patch 4 is larger than the width dimension of the front design part 5A, the patch 4 includes non-overlapping parts 4B and 4B that do not overlap with the design part 5 on the outside in the width direction of the overlapping part 4A. May have.
In the diaper 1 having such a configuration, visual confusion between the front design portion 5A and the patch 4 may be caused, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize on which side of the design portions 5A and 5B the patch 4 is arranged. That is, it may be difficult for the user to determine the position of the patch 4. If the position of the patch 4 cannot be determined, it is difficult for the user to quickly fix the tape 6 at an appropriate position and wear the diaper 1 on the wearer with an appropriate fit. In addition, since the user may recognize the position of the patch 4 before and after the diaper 1, if the position of the patch 4 cannot be determined, there is a possibility that the user may mistake the position of the diaper 1 before and after the wearer.
In particular, in order to improve the visibility and appearance of the design portion 5, the patch 4 having light transmittance, that is, a patch 4 using a transparent or translucent material, or a color similar to the color of the previous design portion 5A is provided. Provision of an overlapping portion 4A integrally forming the appearance of the front design portion 5A, such as the patch 4, the patch 4 having the same design as the front design portion 5A, and the patch 4 having at least a part of the same design as the front design portion 5A. In the case where the patch 4 thus obtained is packaged in the design unit 5, the position of the patch 4 tends to be more difficult to determine. When the main body 100 is provided with the design portions 5A and 5B having the same design, or the design portions 5A and 5B having the same design at least in part, it is particularly difficult to distinguish the front and rear of the diaper 1. Tend.
The “light transmittance” of the patch 4 is a function of transmitting light to the design portion 5 at the position where the patch 4 is provided and transmitting the reflected light reflected by the design portion 5 to a visible extent. is there. Further, “similar colors” means colors of the same system including substantially the same colors, that is, colors having the same or similar hue.
 また、おむつ1は、出荷時において所定形状に折り畳まれた状態で包装体に収納される。例えば、おむつ1は、本体部100の幅方向端部にて肌面側を内側にしてテープ6が折り返される。また、吸収体10の幅方向Wにおける両端部(ここではデザイン部5A,5Bの幅方向Wにおける両端部でもあり、デザイン部5A,5Bが仮想線VL1,VL2の幅方向内側に配置される)にて、幅方向Wに直交し長手方向Lへ延びる一対の仮想線VL1,VL2(折曲線)により、肌面側を内側にして、仮想線VL1,VL2よりも幅方向外側の部分が折り返される(図3A及び図3B参照)。その後、おむつ1は、幅方向Wに延びる仮想線VL3,VL4(折畳線)により、本体部100が長手方向Lに対して三つ折りされて、所定形状の折り畳み状態となる(図3C参照)。 (4) The diaper 1 is stored in a package in a state of being folded into a predetermined shape at the time of shipment. For example, in the diaper 1, the tape 6 is folded at the width direction end of the main body 100 with the skin side inside. Further, both ends in the width direction W of the absorber 10 (here, both ends in the width direction W of the design portions 5A and 5B, and the design portions 5A and 5B are arranged inside the virtual lines VL1 and VL2 in the width direction). At a pair of imaginary lines VL1 and VL2 (bent curves) that are orthogonal to the width direction W and extend in the longitudinal direction L, a portion outside the imaginary lines VL1 and VL2 in the width direction is folded back with the skin side inside. (See FIGS. 3A and 3B). Thereafter, the diaper 1 is folded in three in the longitudinal direction L by virtual lines VL3 and VL4 (folding lines) extending in the width direction W, and becomes a folded state of a predetermined shape (see FIG. 3C). .
 このような折り畳み工程は、一般に、おむつ1の製造ラインの一部に組み込まれている。展開状態のおむつ1に対して適切な位置(例えば、仮想線VL1,VL2)で折り加工が施されないと、折り畳み状態のおむつ1は所定形状にならず、そのサイズにバラつきが生じる。その結果、折り畳み状態のおむつ1を包装体に収納する際に、包装体が破損するおそれがある。つまり、折り畳み状態のおむつ1を包装体に収納することが困難になり、おむつ1の生産性の低下を招くことがある。
 特に、仮想線VL1,VL2での折り加工は、展開状態におけるおむつ1の肌面側を確認しながら行われるため、肌面側から平面視したときに本体部100が実質的に同じ色彩を有する場合には、折り加工を施す適切な位置を判別しにくい。
Such a folding process is generally incorporated into a part of the diaper 1 manufacturing line. If the diaper 1 in the unfolded state is not folded at an appropriate position (for example, the virtual lines VL1 and VL2), the diaper 1 in the folded state does not have a predetermined shape, and its size varies. As a result, when the folded diaper 1 is stored in the package, the package may be damaged. That is, it becomes difficult to store the folded diaper 1 in the package, which may cause a decrease in the productivity of the diaper 1.
In particular, since the folding process along the virtual lines VL1 and VL2 is performed while checking the skin surface side of the diaper 1 in the unfolded state, the main body 100 has substantially the same color when viewed from the skin surface in a plan view. In such a case, it is difficult to determine an appropriate position to be folded.
 また、折り畳み状態のおむつ1(図3C参照)を使用する際に、使用者は、まず、仮想線VL3,VL4による折り畳みを長手方向Lに展開する(図3B参照)。次いで、使用者は、仮想線VL1,VL2による折り返しを展開する。そして、肌面側に折り返されたテープ6を展開し、おむつ1を着用者に装着する。 When using the folded diaper 1 (see FIG. 3C), the user first unfolds the diaper 1 along the virtual lines VL3 and VL4 in the longitudinal direction L (see FIG. 3B). Next, the user develops a return by the virtual lines VL1 and VL2. Then, the tape 6 folded back to the skin side is deployed, and the diaper 1 is attached to the wearer.
 以下、図3A~図3Cに示すように少なくとも仮想線VL1,VL2で折り畳まれた状態を「折畳状態」と称する。折畳状態のおむつ1では、一対の仮想線VL1,VL2よりも幅方向外側の第一面が、一対の仮想線VL1,VL2よりも幅方向内側の第二面に対して対面して重ね合わせられる。また、図2に示すように仮想線VL1,VL2,VL3,VL4での折り畳みが展開された平面状の状態を「展開状態」と称する。
 折畳状態について、より詳しくは、図3Aの右半部に示すように本体部100の幅方向端部にて肌面側を内側にしてテープ6が折り返された状態を「第一折畳状態(第一状態)」と称する。また、図3Aの左半部や図3Bに示すように仮想線VL1,VL2で折り返された状態かつ仮想線VL3,VL4では折り畳まれていない状態を「第二折畳状態(第二状態)」と称する。第二折畳状態では、第一折畳状態の延出部61Bをサイドシート13に対面させて重ね合わせた状態に折り畳まれる。さらに、図3Cに示すように仮想線VL1,VL2,VL3,VL4で折られた状態を「第三折畳状態(第三状態)」と称する。
Hereinafter, as shown in FIGS. 3A to 3C, a state where at least the virtual lines VL1 and VL2 are folded is referred to as a “folded state”. In the folded diaper 1, the first surface in the width direction outside the pair of virtual lines VL1 and VL2 faces and overlaps the second surface in the width direction inside the pair of virtual lines VL1 and VL2. Can be In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, a planar state in which the folds at the virtual lines VL1, VL2, VL3, and VL4 are developed is referred to as an “expanded state”.
More specifically, as shown in the right half of FIG. 3A, the folded state of the tape 6 with the skin side inward at the width direction end of the main body 100 is referred to as a “first folded state”. (First state) ". Also, as shown in the left half of FIG. 3A and FIG. 3B, a state where the virtual lines VL1 and VL2 are folded and a state where the virtual lines VL3 and VL4 are not folded is referred to as a “second folded state (second state)”. Called. In the second folded state, the extended portion 61B in the first folded state is folded so as to face the side sheet 13 and be superposed. Further, a state of being folded along the virtual lines VL1, VL2, VL3, and VL4 as shown in FIG. 3C is referred to as a “third folded state (third state)”.
 このように、使用者はおむつ1を肌面側から平面視しながら展開し、着用者に対する装着作業を進める。光透過性を有するパッチ4(透明又は半透明の材料を用いたパッチ4)、デザイン部5と同一の図柄のパッチ4や、デザイン部5と少なくとも一部が同一の図柄を有するパッチ4をデザイン部5に外装する場合には、デザイン部5とパッチ4との視覚的な混同を引き起こしやすいため、図3Cに示す第三折畳状態のおむつ1を見た使用者は、パッチ4の視認が困難である。つまり、使用者は、パッチ4の位置により、おむつ1の前後を判別できないことがある。また、展開状態のおむつ1において前身頃1Aと後身頃1Cとは、長手方向の中心線CL2(基準線,図3参照)を基準として全体形状が線対称又は略線対称な形状である、あるいは、デザイン部5A,5Bの外観が互いに同一又は類似するため、展開状態のおむつ1を肌面側から平面視するだけでは、おむつ1の前後の判別が難しい。 使用 In this way, the user unfolds the diaper 1 while viewing it from the skin side in a plan view, and proceeds with the mounting work on the wearer. Design a patch 4 having light transmittance (a patch 4 using a transparent or translucent material), a patch 4 having the same design as the design unit 5, and a patch 4 having at least a part of the same design as the design unit 5. In the case where the diaper 1 is mounted on the diaper 1, visual confusion between the design part 5 and the patch 4 is likely to occur, so that the user who sees the diaper 1 in the third folded state shown in FIG. Have difficulty. That is, the user may not be able to determine the front and rear of the diaper 1 depending on the position of the patch 4. In the diaper 1 in the unfolded state, the front body 1A and the back body 1C have a shape which is line-symmetric or substantially line-symmetric with respect to a longitudinal center line CL2 (reference line, see FIG. 3), or Since the appearances of the design portions 5A and 5B are the same or similar to each other, it is difficult to distinguish the front and rear of the diaper 1 by simply viewing the diaper 1 in the deployed state from the skin side.
〈第一識別部〉
 そこで、パッチ4の幅方向の両端部に、展開状態のおむつ1を非肌面側から見たときに周囲の色彩と異なる色彩(第二色彩)である一対の第一識別部4C,4Cを設けている。具体的に言えば、第一識別部4C,4Cの色彩は、パッチ4の重複部4A及び本体部100の色彩とは異なる。このようにパッチ4において延在方向の両端部に位置する一対の第一識別部4C,4Cは、互いに実質的に同じ色彩を有している。一方、パッチ4の重複部4Aは、一体的に前デザイン部5Aの外観を構成する。
<First identification section>
Therefore, a pair of first identification portions 4C, 4C having different colors (second colors) from the surrounding colors when the diaper 1 in the unfolded state is viewed from the non-skin side are provided at both ends in the width direction of the patch 4. Provided. Specifically, the colors of the first identification sections 4C and 4C are different from the colors of the overlapping section 4A of the patch 4 and the main body 100. As described above, the pair of first identification portions 4C, 4C located at both ends in the extending direction of the patch 4 have substantially the same color. On the other hand, the overlapping portion 4A of the patch 4 integrally forms the appearance of the front design portion 5A.
 このような態様のおむつ1において、仮想線VL1,VL2で折り加工が行われると、肌面側から平面視したときに、第一識別部4C,4Cを視認できる(図3B参照)。そのため、第一識別部4C,4Cを折り加工が適切な位置にて行われたか否かを判別するマーカーとして利用できる。つまり、第一識別部4C,4Cの互いの位置をマーカー認識手段により検出することで、適切な位置で折り加工が行われたおむつと、不適切な位置で折り加工が行われたおむつとを判別できる。マーカー認識手段としては、反射タイプや透過タイプの光電管を用いる認識装置、CCDカメラや一般的なカメラを利用した撮像装置等が挙げられる。上記の適切な位置で折り加工が行われたおむつ1に対して、仮想線VL3,VL4による三つ折り加工を行うことで、所定形状に折り畳まれたおむつ1を効率よく製造できる。その結果、包装体に対する折り畳まれたおむつ1の収納性が向上し、おむつ1の生産性に優れる。なお、不適切な位置で折り加工が行われたおむつは、展開され、再び折り畳み工程が行われる。 In the diaper 1 having such an aspect, when the folding process is performed along the virtual lines VL1 and VL2, the first identification portions 4C and 4C can be visually recognized when viewed from the skin side in a plan view (see FIG. 3B). Therefore, the first identification sections 4C, 4C can be used as markers for determining whether or not the folding process has been performed at an appropriate position. That is, by detecting the positions of the first identification units 4C and 4C by the marker recognizing means, the diaper that has been folded at an appropriate position and the diaper that has been folded at an inappropriate position can be distinguished. Can be determined. Examples of the marker recognizing means include a recognizing device using a reflection-type or transmission-type phototube, an imaging device using a CCD camera or a general camera, and the like. The diaper 1 folded in a predetermined shape can be efficiently manufactured by performing three-fold processing on the diaper 1 that has been folded at the above-described appropriate position using the virtual lines VL3 and VL4. As a result, the storage of the folded diaper 1 in the package is improved, and the productivity of the diaper 1 is excellent. The diaper that has been folded at an inappropriate position is expanded and the folding process is performed again.
〈ファスニングテープ〉
 テープ6は、少なくとも一部が一対の第一識別部4C,4Cと同系の色彩(第二同系色彩)を有する。具体的には、基材シート61と係止部材62とを異なる色彩にするとともに、基材シート61又は係止部材62と第一識別部4C,4Cとを同系の色彩としている。
 例えば、テープ6において、基材シート61が本体部100と同系の色彩(第一同系色彩)であって、係止部材62が一対の第一識別部4C,4Cと同系の色彩(第二同系色彩)である。あるいは、基材シート61が一対の第一識別部4C,4Cと同系の色彩(第二同系色彩)であって、係止部材62が本体部100と同系の色彩(第一同系色彩)である。すなわち、本体部100に対して、基材シート61及び係止部材62の何れか一方を色彩の相違によって見分けるのが困難であるものの、基材シート61及び係止部材62の何れか他方を色彩の相違によって見分けやすい構成が好ましい。
 上記のように第二同系色彩の基材シート61又は係止部材62によって、おむつ1の前後を判別できるため、使用者は着用者に対するおむつ1の位置決めを迅速に行うことができる。
 なお、白色と異なる色彩(いわば着色した色彩)の係止部材62は色の調整が困難であり、製造コストが高まるおそれがある。これに対し、本体部100の白色と同系色彩の係止部材62は色の調整が容易であるうえに、係止部材62と比較して色の調整が容易な基材シート61に着色することから、製造コストの上昇が抑制可能である。
<Fastening tape>
At least a part of the tape 6 has a similar color (second similar color) to the pair of first identification portions 4C, 4C. Specifically, the base sheet 61 and the locking member 62 have different colors, and the base sheet 61 or the locking member 62 and the first identification portions 4C, 4C have similar colors.
For example, in the tape 6, the base sheet 61 has a color similar to the main body 100 (first similar color), and the locking member 62 has a similar color (second color) to the pair of first identification portions 4C and 4C. (Similar colors). Alternatively, the base sheet 61 is a color similar to the pair of first identification portions 4C, 4C (second similar color), and the locking member 62 is a color similar to the main body 100 (first similar color). is there. That is, although it is difficult to distinguish one of the base sheet 61 and the locking member 62 from the main body 100 due to the difference in color, the other of the base sheet 61 and the locking member 62 is colored. It is preferable to use a configuration that can be easily distinguished by the difference between the two.
As described above, since the front and rear of the diaper 1 can be determined by the base sheet 61 or the locking member 62 of the second similar color, the user can quickly position the diaper 1 with respect to the wearer.
Note that it is difficult to adjust the color of the locking member 62 having a color different from white (so-called colored color), and there is a possibility that the manufacturing cost may increase. On the other hand, the locking member 62 of the same color as the white color of the main body 100 can be easily adjusted in color, and the base sheet 61 whose color can be easily adjusted compared to the locking member 62 is colored. Therefore, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
 また、一対の第一識別部4C,4Cは、展開状態のおむつ1を非肌面側から見たときに周囲の色彩と異なる色彩(第二色彩)である。具体的に言えば、第一識別部4C,4Cの色彩は、パッチ4の重複部4A及び本体部100の色彩とは異なる。 {Circle around (1)} When the diaper 1 in the unfolded state is viewed from the non-skin side, the pair of first identification portions 4C, 4C has a color (second color) different from the surrounding color. Specifically, the colors of the first identification portions 4C and 4C are different from the colors of the overlapping portion 4A of the patch 4 and the main body 100.
 通常、パッチ4はおむつ1の幅方向の中心線CL1(図1参照)を基準として対称に配置される。パッチ4の幅方向Wにおける両端部に一対の第一識別部4C,4Cを設けることで、使用者は、おむつ1の中心位置、及び、一対の第一識別部4C,4Cの間に存在するパッチ4の位置を判別することができる。そして、使用者は、パッチ4の位置から、おむつ1の前後を推測できる。したがって、着用者に対するおむつ1の位置決めが容易になる。また、おむつ1を装着する際にテープ6のパッチ4への止め着け、すなわち、パッチ4に対するテープ6の位置決めが容易になる。
 なお、パッチ4は、中心線CL1を基準として非対称に配置されてもよい。このように配置されたパッチ4であっても、一対の第一識別部4C,4Cにより、使用者はパッチ4の位置を判別することができる。また、以下において「第一識別部4C,4C」を単に「第一識別部4C」と記載することがある。
Normally, the patches 4 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line CL1 in the width direction of the diaper 1 (see FIG. 1). By providing a pair of first identification portions 4C, 4C at both ends in the width direction W of the patch 4, the user exists between the center position of the diaper 1 and the pair of first identification portions 4C, 4C. The position of the patch 4 can be determined. Then, the user can guess the position of the diaper 1 from the position of the patch 4. Therefore, positioning of the diaper 1 with respect to the wearer is facilitated. In addition, when attaching the diaper 1, the tape 6 can be easily fixed to the patch 4, that is, the positioning of the tape 6 with respect to the patch 4 becomes easy.
Note that the patches 4 may be arranged asymmetrically with respect to the center line CL1. Even with the patches 4 arranged in this manner, the user can determine the position of the patches 4 by the pair of first identification units 4C, 4C. In the following, the “ first identification unit 4C, 4C” may be simply referred to as “first identification unit 4C”.
 また、基材シート61が係止部材62と異なる色彩を有することで、使用者は、テープ6における係止部材62の位置を容易に把握できる。また、基材シート61又は係止部材62が第一識別部4C,4Cと同系の色彩を有することで、使用者は、色彩の似ている部材同士を止め着けることを視覚的に容易に理解できる。また、第一識別部4C,4Cとテープ6との位置関係により、使用者はおむつ1の前後を容易に判別できる。したがって、使用者は、第一識別部4C,4Cの間に存在するパッチ4にテープ6を迅速に固定し、適度なフィット感で着用者におむつ1を装着できる。 Further, since the base sheet 61 has a different color from the locking member 62, the user can easily grasp the position of the locking member 62 on the tape 6. In addition, since the base sheet 61 or the locking member 62 has a similar color to the first identification portions 4C, 4C, the user can easily visually understand that members having similar colors can be stopped. it can. Further, the user can easily determine the front and rear of the diaper 1 based on the positional relationship between the first identification sections 4C and 4C and the tape 6. Therefore, the user can quickly fix the tape 6 to the patch 4 existing between the first identification portions 4C, 4C, and wear the diaper 1 on the wearer with an appropriate fit.
 そして、パッチ4を一対の仮想線VL1,VL2よりも幅方向外側に延在させている。このような態様のパッチ4とすることで、使用者は、保管状態のおむつ1(図3C参照)において、仮想線VL3,VL4による本体部100の折り返しを展開したとき(図3B参照)に、肌面側からの平面視により第一識別部4C,4Cを視認できる。さらに、展開状態のおむつ1を非肌面側から見たときに第一識別部4C,4Cを視認できる。換言すれば、折畳状態のおむつ1を非肌面側から見た場合、デザイン部5A,5Bは視認可能なものの、第一識別部4C,4Cは視認不能である。折畳状態のおむつ1を肌面側から見た場合には、第一識別部4C,4Cは視認可能であるものの、デザイン部5A,5Bは視認不能である。そのため、折畳状態のおむつ1を肌面側から見る使用者や展開状態のおむつ1を非肌面側から見る使用者は、パッチ4の位置を判別することで、おむつ1の前後を推測できる。
 したがって、使用者は着用者に対するおむつ1の位置決めを迅速に行うことができる。
 そのほか、折畳状態のおむつ1を非肌面側から見たときには、第一識別部4C,4Cが視認不能であることから、折畳状態のおむつ1を非肌面側から見たときのデザイン部5A,5Bによる装飾性を確保可能である。
The patch 4 extends outward in the width direction from the pair of virtual lines VL1 and VL2. By using the patch 4 in such an aspect, when the user unfolds the folded back of the main body 100 by the virtual lines VL3 and VL4 in the diaper 1 in the storage state (see FIG. 3C), The first identification portions 4C, 4C can be visually recognized in a plan view from the skin side. Further, when the diaper 1 in the deployed state is viewed from the non-skin side, the first identification portions 4C, 4C can be visually recognized. In other words, when the diaper 1 in the folded state is viewed from the non-skin side, the design portions 5A and 5B are visible, but the first identification portions 4C and 4C are not visible. When the folded diaper 1 is viewed from the skin surface side, the first identification portions 4C, 4C are visible, but the design portions 5A, 5B are not visible. Therefore, a user who looks at the diaper 1 in the folded state from the skin side or a user who looks at the diaper 1 in the unfolded state from the non-skin side can estimate the front and rear of the diaper 1 by determining the position of the patch 4. .
Therefore, the user can quickly position the diaper 1 with respect to the wearer.
In addition, when the diaper 1 in the folded state is viewed from the non-skin side, since the first identification portions 4C and 4C are not visible, the design when the diaper 1 in the folded state is viewed from the non-skin side. The decorativeness of the parts 5A and 5B can be ensured.
 第一識別部4Cを形成する方法は特に限定されない。例えば、第一識別部4Cはパッチ4に印刷加工を施すことで形成できる。 (4) The method for forming the first identification portion 4C is not particularly limited. For example, the first identification portion 4C can be formed by performing a printing process on the patch 4.
 また、基材シート61は係止部材62と異なる色彩を有すれば、単色であっても、2色以上を有していてもよい。係止部材62も同様に、単色であっても、2色以上を有していてもよい。基材シート61及び/又は係止部材62が、2色以上の色彩を有する場合には、平面視したときに最も広面積を占める色が互いに異なればよい。 The base sheet 61 may have a single color or two or more colors as long as the base sheet 61 has a color different from that of the locking member 62. Similarly, the locking member 62 may be a single color or have two or more colors. When the base sheet 61 and / or the locking member 62 have two or more colors, the colors that occupy the widest area in plan view may be different from each other.
〈ファスニングテープの色と透光性〉
 さらに、おむつ1を肌面側から見たときにテープ6の色(色彩)が透けて見える所定の透光性をもたせている。
 以下、テープ6の色に関して説明し、その後に所定の透光性を述べる。
<Color and translucency of fastening tape>
Furthermore, when the diaper 1 is viewed from the skin surface side, the tape 6 has a predetermined translucency that allows the color (color) of the tape 6 to be transparent.
Hereinafter, the color of the tape 6 will be described, and thereafter, the predetermined translucency will be described.
(ファスニングテープの色)
 テープ6は、少なくとも一部が本体部100の色とは異なる色である。ここでは、全域に亘って実質的に同じ白色の本体部100を例に挙げ、以下に示す色彩パターン1,2のテープ6を例示する。
(Color of fastening tape)
The tape 6 is at least partially different in color from the color of the main body 100. Here, the main body 100 having substantially the same white color over the entire region is taken as an example, and the tape 6 having the color patterns 1 and 2 shown below is exemplified.
――色彩パターン1――
 色彩パターン1は、以下に示すように各部位の色が組み合わせられている。
  ・基材シート61:本体部100の色(第一色彩)と同系の色(第一同系色彩)
  ・係止部材62:本体部100の色と異なる色(第三色彩)
――色彩パターン2――
 色彩パターン2は、以下に示すように各部位の色が組み合わせられている。
  ・基材シート61:係止部材62が積層される側の内層面61bが本体部100の色と異なる色(第三色彩)
  ・係止部材62:本体部100の色(第一色彩)と同系の色(第一同系色彩)
 なお、基材シート61のうち内層面61bを除く部位(主部)61aは本体部100の色と同系の色(第一同系色彩)である。
――Color pattern 1――
In the color pattern 1, the colors of the respective parts are combined as shown below.
-Base material sheet 61: Color similar to the color (first color) of main body 100 (first similar color)
Locking member 62: a color different from the color of main body 100 (third color)
――Color pattern 2――
In the color pattern 2, the colors of the respective parts are combined as shown below.
The base sheet 61: a color in which the inner layer surface 61b on the side where the locking member 62 is laminated is different from the color of the main body 100 (third color)
Locking member 62: a color similar to the color (first color) of main body 100 (first similar color)
The portion (main portion) 61 a of the base sheet 61 excluding the inner layer surface 61 b is a color similar to the color of the main body 100 (first similar color).
 ここで、「実質的に同じ色(色彩)」とは、明るさ、色相又は彩度の全てが略同じであることを意味する。換言すれば、「実質的に同じ色彩」とは、対比する色彩同士が完全に同一色彩でなくても、太陽光や通常の照明光の下で、対比する色彩同士を区別して視認することが困難な程度の同一性を有することである。
 「同系の色(色彩)」とは、実質的に同じ色彩を含む同系統の色彩、すなわち、色相が同じ又は近似する色彩を意味する。
 「異なる色(色彩)」とは、明るさ、色相又は彩度のうち、少なくともいずれか一つが異なることを意味する。例えば、単に色相が異なるものばかりでなく、同じ色相であっても、彩度又は明度が異なるものは「異なる色」である。
Here, “substantially the same color (color)” means that all of brightness, hue, and saturation are substantially the same. In other words, "substantially the same color" means that even when the colors to be compared are not completely the same, the colors to be compared can be visually distinguished under sunlight or normal illumination light. It has a difficult degree of identity.
“Similar colors (colors)” means colors of the same type including substantially the same colors, that is, colors having the same or similar hues.
“Different colors (colors)” means that at least one of brightness, hue, and saturation is different. For example, not only those having different hues but also those having the same saturation but different saturation or lightness are “different colors”.
 例えば、市販の測色器を用いて測色を行い、JIS Z 8729等に規定されるCIE1976(L)色空間に基づいて数値化した値を比較することによって求めることができる。具体的には、測定対象たる2点(例えば、本体部100の色の点とテープ6の少なくとも一部の色の点)間のL値の差がΔL、a値の差がΔa、b値の差がΔbであるときに、色差ΔEab=[(ΔL+(Δa+(Δb1/2によって求められる。この色差ΔEabが好ましくは1.5以上、より好ましくは3.0以上である場合に、使用者が目視により感知し得る程度に色彩が異なるといえる。言い換えれば、上記「異なる色」とは、色差が上記範囲であることを意味する。上記「同系の色」とは、色差が好ましくは1.5未満であることを意味し、上記「実質的に同じ色」とは、色差が好ましくは1.0未満であることを意味する。 For example, it can be obtained by performing colorimetry using a commercially available colorimeter and comparing values quantified based on the CIE1976 (L * a * b * ) color space specified in JIS Z 8729 and the like. . Specifically, the difference in L * value between two points to be measured (for example, the color point of the main body 100 and at least a part of the color of the tape 6) is ΔL * , and the difference in a * value is Δa. When the difference between the * and b * values is Δb * , the color difference ΔE * ab = [(ΔL * ) 2 + (Δa * ) 2 + (Δb * ) 2 ] 1/2 is obtained. When the color difference ΔE * ab is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more, it can be said that the colors are different to the extent that the user can visually recognize them. In other words, the “different color” means that the color difference is within the above range. The “similar color” means that the color difference is preferably less than 1.5, and the “substantially the same color” means that the color difference is preferably less than 1.0.
〈所定の透光性〉
 本実施形態の「所定の透光性」は、第一折畳状態や第二折畳状態のおむつ1を肌面側から見たときに、テープ6の第三色彩が透けて見える光学的な性状を意味する。以下、所定の透光性をもたせた構成を二つ例示する。
――第一の構成例――
 第一の構成例では、色彩パターン1のおむつ1に設定された透光性を説明する。
 このおむつ1には、第一折畳状態の場合における所定の透光性(以下「第一透光性」と称する)が設定されている。すなわち「第一透光性」は、第一折畳状態のおむつ1を肌面側から見たときに、肌面側から基材シート61を通して係止部材62の第三色彩が透けて見える所定の透光性を意味する。
<Specified translucency>
The “predetermined translucency” of the present embodiment is an optical property in which the third color of the tape 6 can be seen through when the diaper 1 in the first folded state or the second folded state is viewed from the skin side. Means properties. Hereinafter, two configurations having a predetermined light-transmitting property will be exemplified.
――First configuration example――
In the first configuration example, the translucency set in the diaper 1 of the color pattern 1 will be described.
The diaper 1 is set to have a predetermined translucency (hereinafter referred to as “first translucency”) in the first folded state. That is, the “first translucency” is a predetermined color in which the third color of the locking member 62 can be seen through the base sheet 61 from the skin side when the diaper 1 in the first folded state is viewed from the skin side. Means translucency.
 上記の「第一透光性」は、下記の例示する三つの態様I~IIIによって実現可能である。
  ・態様I:基材シート61の全光線透過率が65~99%である
  ・態様II:基材シート61に複数の貫通孔が設けられる
  ・態様III:基材シート61の全光線透過率が65~99%のフィルム化された部分(フィルム状部)が設けられる
 態様Iで上記した全光線透過率の基材シート61によれば、第一折畳状態のおむつ1を肌面側から見たとき(基材シート61に対して係止部材62が積層される側とは反対側から見たとき)に、係止部材62の色が基材シート61の厚み方向に透けて視認可能である。
 態様IIの貫通孔は、その外接円の孔径が0.1~1.0[mm]である。基材シート61は、複数の貫通孔を有することが好ましい。例えば、各貫通孔は、相互に間隔を設けて散点状に形成される。各貫通孔の形状としては、基材シート61の平面視において円形状である。ただし、基材シート61の平面視で多角形状の貫通孔を採用してもよい。また、複数の貫通孔は、千鳥状の配置パターンで形成されている。かかる貫通孔によれば、第一折畳状態のおむつ1を肌面側から見たときに、係止部材62の色が貫通孔を通して直接的かつ部分的に視認可能である。
 態様IIIで上記したフィルム状部によれば、第一折畳状態のおむつ1を肌面側から見たときに、係止部材62の色がフィルム状部を通して視認可能である。
The above-mentioned “first translucency” can be realized by the following three embodiments I to III.
-Aspect I: The total light transmittance of the base sheet 61 is 65 to 99%.-Aspect II: A plurality of through holes are provided in the base sheet 61.-Aspect III: The total light transmittance of the base sheet 61 is According to the base sheet 61 having the total light transmittance described in the embodiment I, the diaper 1 in the first folded state is viewed from the skin side. (When viewed from the side opposite to the side on which the locking members 62 are laminated with respect to the base sheet 61), the color of the locking members 62 is visible through the base sheet 61 in the thickness direction. is there.
The through-hole of Embodiment II has a circumscribed circle diameter of 0.1 to 1.0 [mm]. The base sheet 61 preferably has a plurality of through holes. For example, each through-hole is formed in a scattered point shape at intervals. Each of the through holes has a circular shape in plan view of the base sheet 61. However, a through hole having a polygonal shape in plan view of the base sheet 61 may be employed. The plurality of through holes are formed in a staggered arrangement pattern. According to such a through hole, when the diaper 1 in the first folded state is viewed from the skin surface side, the color of the locking member 62 is directly and partially visible through the through hole.
According to the film-shaped portion described in the aspect III, when the diaper 1 in the first folded state is viewed from the skin side, the color of the locking member 62 can be visually recognized through the film-shaped portion.
 さらに、おむつ1が第二折畳状態の場合における所定の透光性(以下「第二透光性」と称する)が設定されることが好ましい。「第二透光性」は、第二折畳状態のおむつ1を肌面側から見たときに、係止部材62や内層面61bよりも肌面側に積層された部材(例えばカバーシート14,基部61A,サイドシート13)を通して係止部材62や内層面61bの色が透けて見える所定の透光性を意味する。
 上記の「第二透光性」は、下記に例示する態様IVによって実現可能である。
  ・態様IV:カバーシート14,基部61A,サイドシート13の全光線透過率が50~99%である
 態様IVで上記した全光線透過率のカバーシート14,基部61A,サイドシート13によれば、第二折畳状態のおむつ1を肌面側から見たときに、係止部材62や内層面61bの色が透けて視認可能である。
 上記の「視認可能」とは、係止部材62の色彩が、肌面側からシート積層部50を透過して肉眼によって認識できることをいう。
Furthermore, it is preferable that a predetermined translucency (hereinafter referred to as “second translucency”) when the diaper 1 is in the second folded state is set. The “second translucency” refers to a member (for example, the cover sheet 14) that is stacked closer to the skin than the locking member 62 and the inner surface 61 b when the diaper 1 in the second folded state is viewed from the skin. , Base portion 61A, side sheet 13) means a predetermined translucency in which the color of locking member 62 and inner layer surface 61b can be seen through.
The above-mentioned “second translucency” can be realized by the embodiment IV exemplified below.
Aspect IV: The total light transmittance of the cover sheet 14, the base 61A, and the side sheet 13 is 50 to 99%. According to the cover sheet 14, the base 61A, and the side sheet 13 having the total light transmittance described in the aspect IV, When the diaper 1 in the second folded state is viewed from the skin side, the colors of the locking member 62 and the inner layer surface 61b can be seen through.
The above “visible” means that the color of the locking member 62 can be perceived by the naked eye through the sheet laminated portion 50 from the skin side.
 このような構成を有する展開状態のおむつ1は、製造ライン上で、本体部100の幅方向端部にてテープ6が肌面側を内側にして折り返され、仮想線VL1,VL2にて肌面側を内側にして、本体部100の仮想線VL1,VL2よりも幅方向外側の部分が折り返されると、肌面側から平面視したときに、係止部材62あるいは基材シート61の内層面61bの色彩を視認できる(図3B参照)。つまり、図5に示す肌面側からの平面視により、シート積層部50を透過して係止部材62の色彩が認識できる。
 そのため、係止部材62や内層面61bの色彩を折り加工が適切な位置にて行われたか否かを判別するマーカーとして利用できる。つまり、本体部100の両端部に設けられたテープ6における係止部材62や内層面61bの互いの位置をマーカー認識手段により検出することで、適切な位置で折り加工が行われたおむつと、不適切な位置で折り加工が行われたおむつとを判別できる。マーカー認識手段としては、反射タイプや透過タイプの光電管を用いる認識装置、CCDカメラや一般的なカメラを利用した撮像装置等の光学認識手段が挙げられる。上記の適切な位置で折り加工が行われたおむつ1に対して、仮想線VL3,VL4による三つ折り加工を行うことで、所定形状に折り畳まれたおむつ1を効率よく製造できる。その結果、包装体に対する折り畳まれたおむつ1の収納性が向上し、おむつ1の生産性に優れる。なお、不適切な位置で折り加工が行われたおむつは、展開され、再び折り畳み工程が行われる。
In the unfolded diaper 1 having such a configuration, the tape 6 is folded back on the manufacturing line at the width direction end of the main body 100 with the skin side facing inward, and the phantom lines VL1 and VL2 are used. When the portion of the main body 100 outside the imaginary lines VL1 and VL2 in the width direction is turned upside down, the locking member 62 or the inner layer surface 61b of the base sheet 61 when viewed from the skin side in a plan view. (See FIG. 3B). In other words, the color of the locking member 62 can be recognized through the sheet stacking portion 50 in a plan view from the skin side shown in FIG.
Therefore, the color of the locking member 62 and the inner layer surface 61b can be used as a marker for determining whether or not the folding process has been performed at an appropriate position. That is, by detecting the mutual position of the locking member 62 and the inner layer surface 61b of the tape 6 provided at both ends of the main body 100 by the marker recognition means, the diaper folded at an appropriate position can be It can be determined that the diaper has been folded at an inappropriate position. Examples of the marker recognizing unit include an optical recognizing unit such as a recognizing device using a reflection-type or transmissive-type phototube, and an imaging device using a CCD camera or a general camera. The diaper 1 folded in a predetermined shape can be efficiently manufactured by performing the tri-folding process using the virtual lines VL3 and VL4 on the diaper 1 that has been folded at the above-described appropriate position. As a result, the storage of the folded diaper 1 in the package is improved, and the productivity of the diaper 1 is excellent. The diaper that has been folded at an inappropriate position is expanded and the folding process is performed again.
 また、本構成のおむつ1によれば、使用者は、第三折畳状態のおむつ1(図3C参照)から、仮想線VL3,VL4での折り返しを展開した第二折畳状態のとき(図3B参照)に、上述した第二透光性によって、肌面側から平面視すると係止部材62あるいは基材シート61の内層面61bの色を視認できる。さらに、第二折畳状態から仮想線VL1,VL2での折り返しを展開した第一折畳状態のとき(図3Aの右半部参照)に、上述した第一透光性によって、肌面側から平面視すると係止部材62あるいは内層面61bの色彩を視認できる。そのため、使用者は係止部材62や内層面61bの位置を判別することで、おむつ1の前後を推測できる。
 したがって、使用者は着用者に対するおむつ1の位置決めを迅速に行うことができる。
Further, according to the diaper 1 of the present configuration, the user can start the diaper 1 in the third folded state (see FIG. 3C) in the second folded state in which the diaper 1 is folded back along the virtual lines VL3 and VL4 (see FIG. 3C). 3B), the color of the locking member 62 or the color of the inner layer surface 61b of the base sheet 61 can be visually recognized in a plan view from the skin side due to the second light-transmitting property described above. Further, in the first folded state in which the folding at the virtual lines VL1 and VL2 is developed from the second folded state (see the right half of FIG. 3A), the first light-transmitting property described above causes When viewed in a plan view, the color of the locking member 62 or the inner layer surface 61b can be visually recognized. Therefore, the user can estimate the front and rear of the diaper 1 by determining the positions of the locking member 62 and the inner layer surface 61b.
Therefore, the user can quickly position the diaper 1 with respect to the wearer.
 シート積層部50の全光線透過率は、各シート(例えば、基材シート61、サイドシート13及びカバーシート14)を構成する材料の選択(例えば、不織布を使用する場合にはその繊維径〔dtex(デシテックス)〕やその目付量、填料〔酸化チタン等〕の配合量)や、各シートの厚み寸法等により調整できる。 The total light transmittance of the sheet laminated portion 50 is determined by selecting the material constituting each sheet (for example, the base sheet 61, the side sheet 13 and the cover sheet 14) (for example, when a nonwoven fabric is used, its fiber diameter [dtex]). (Decitex)], the basis weight thereof, the blending amount of filler [titanium oxide, etc.]), the thickness of each sheet, and the like.
 また、上記範囲の全光線透過率を充足するシート積層部50を構成する各シートの材料として不織布を用いる場合、その繊維径は0.5~1.2dtexが好ましく、また、その目付量は16g/m以下が好ましい。
 ここで、繊維径は、シートを幅方向に略5等分し、略5等分されたシートからそれぞれ1cm角の試験片をサンプリングし、顕微鏡で繊維の直径を各20点ずつ測定し、その平均値から算出できる。また、目付量は、シートから、縦20cm×横20cmの試験片を任意に5枚採取して質量を測定し、その平均値を単位面積当たりの重量に換算して算出できる。
When a nonwoven fabric is used as the material of each sheet constituting the sheet laminated portion 50 satisfying the total light transmittance in the above range, the fiber diameter is preferably 0.5 to 1.2 dtex, and the basis weight is 16 g. / M 2 or less.
Here, the fiber diameter is obtained by dividing the sheet into approximately 5 equal parts in the width direction, sampling a 1 cm square test piece from each of the approximately five equally divided sheets, measuring the fiber diameter by 20 points each with a microscope. It can be calculated from the average value. The basis weight can be calculated by arbitrarily collecting five test pieces of 20 cm long by 20 cm wide from the sheet, measuring the mass, and converting the average value to the weight per unit area.
〈ファスニングテープ〉
 基材シート61と本体部100とが同系の色の場合、使用者は、第三折畳状態のおむつ1(図3C参照)から、仮想線VL3,VL4による本体部100の折り返しを展開した第二折畳状態(図3B参照)において、肌面側から平面視したときにテープ6の位置を判別しづらいことがある。このような態様であっても、上記構成を有するおむつ1によれば、係止部材62の色彩により、使用者は係止部材62の位置を判別することで、おむつ1の前後を推測できる。
 したがって、使用者は着用者に対するおむつ1の位置決めを迅速に行うことができる。
 係止部材62の位置の判別をより容易にし、シート積層部50の全光線透過率の調整が容易であるという観点からは、基材シート61の全光線透過率は65~99%であることが好ましく、75~99%であることがより好ましい。
<Fastening tape>
When the base sheet 61 and the main body 100 are of the same color, the user unfolds the folded back of the main body 100 along the virtual lines VL3 and VL4 from the diaper 1 in the third folded state (see FIG. 3C). In the two-fold state (see FIG. 3B), it may be difficult to determine the position of the tape 6 when viewed from above the skin side. Even in such a mode, according to the diaper 1 having the above configuration, the user can estimate the front and rear of the diaper 1 by determining the position of the locking member 62 based on the color of the locking member 62.
Therefore, the user can quickly position the diaper 1 with respect to the wearer.
From the viewpoint of making it easier to determine the position of the locking member 62 and easily adjusting the total light transmittance of the sheet laminated portion 50, the total light transmittance of the base sheet 61 should be 65 to 99%. , And more preferably 75 to 99%.
 おむつ1を装着する際に、使用者は、テープ6を引っ張ってパッチ4に止め着ける。そのため、テープ6、特に、本体部100に結合する基材シート61は、幅方向Wに所定の引張強度を有することが好ましい。基材シート61の引張強度はその厚み寸法により調整されるため、幅方向Wに所定の引張強度を有する基材シート61を得るためには、その厚み寸法が大きくなる傾向にある。一方、基材シート61の厚み寸法が大きくなると、基材シート61の全光線透過率が低下し、シート積層部50の全光線透過率の調整が困難な傾向にある。基材シート61に複数の貫通孔を設けることで、適度な引張強度を有するとともに、所定の全光線透過率を有する基材シート61を得ることが容易になる。 When putting on the diaper 1, the user pulls the tape 6 to fix it to the patch 4. Therefore, it is preferable that the tape 6, especially the base sheet 61 bonded to the main body 100, have a predetermined tensile strength in the width direction W. Since the tensile strength of the base sheet 61 is adjusted by its thickness, in order to obtain the base sheet 61 having a predetermined tensile strength in the width direction W, the thickness tends to be large. On the other hand, when the thickness dimension of the base sheet 61 is increased, the total light transmittance of the base sheet 61 is reduced, and it tends to be difficult to adjust the total light transmittance of the sheet stacked unit 50. By providing a plurality of through holes in the base sheet 61, it becomes easy to obtain the base sheet 61 having an appropriate tensile strength and a predetermined total light transmittance.
 フィルム状部は、基材シート61の構成繊維(例えば、合成樹脂製繊維)が熱的に溶融されて繊維の形態を失い、被膜化している部分である。フィルム状部は、基材シート61に加熱加圧処理を行うことで形成できる。加熱加圧処理の条件は、基材シート61の構成繊維に応じて適宜設定される。
 フィルム状部は、フィルム化される前の基材シート61と比較して全光線透過率が大きくなる。そのため、フィルム状部を有する基材シート61を用いることで、シート積層部50の全光線透過率の調整が容易になる。また、第一折畳状態においておむつ1を肌面側から平面視したときに、係止部材62の色彩の視認性が向上する。
The film-shaped portion is a portion where the constituent fibers (for example, synthetic resin fibers) of the base sheet 61 are thermally melted, lose the fiber form, and are formed into a film. The film-shaped portion can be formed by performing a heat and pressure treatment on the base sheet 61. The conditions of the heating and pressurizing treatment are appropriately set according to the constituent fibers of the base sheet 61.
The film portion has a higher total light transmittance than the base sheet 61 before being formed into a film. Therefore, by using the base sheet 61 having the film-shaped portion, the adjustment of the total light transmittance of the sheet laminated portion 50 becomes easy. In addition, when the diaper 1 is viewed in a plan view from the skin side in the first folded state, the visibility of the color of the locking member 62 is improved.
 なお、上述した用語の意味は以下のとおりである。
 「実質的に同じ色彩」とは、明るさ、色相又は彩度の全てが略同じであることを意味する。換言すれば、「実質的に同じ色彩」とは、対比する色彩同士が完全に同一色彩でなくても、太陽光や通常の照明光の下で、対比する色彩同士を区別して視認することが困難な程度の同一性を有することである。
The meanings of the above terms are as follows.
“Substantially the same color” means that all of the brightness, hue, and saturation are substantially the same. In other words, "substantially the same color" means that even when the colors to be compared are not completely the same, the colors to be compared can be visually distinguished under sunlight or normal illumination light. It has a difficult degree of identity.
 「第一識別部4C」とは、第一識別部4Cとその他の部分とを目視により区別可能な領域である。具体的には、第一識別部4Cは、おむつ1を展開した状態(図2参照)において非肌面側から平面視したときに、パッチ4における他の部位のほか、前デザイン部5A及び本体部100と異なる色彩、あるいは、パッチ4における他の部位及び本体部100と異なる色彩を有する。
 ここで、「パッチ4における他の部位」とは、パッチ4における第一識別部4C,4C以外の部位をいい、例えば、重複部4Aや非重複部4Bが挙げられる。つまり、展開状態のおむつ1を非肌面側から平面視したとき、パッチ4における他の部位の色彩には、重複部4Aの色彩及び非重複部4Bの色彩が含まれる。また、非肌面側から平面視したときの本体部100の色彩には、デザイン部5の色彩及び、デザイン部5以外の本体部100の色彩が含まれる。
 なお、「前デザイン部5Aの色彩」とは、前デザイン部5Aを平面視したときに、最も広面積を占める色彩のことをいう。
 「デザイン部5の色彩」とは、デザイン部5を平面視したときに、最も広面積を占める色彩のことをいう。
 また、「本体部100の色彩」とは、非肌面側から本体部100を平面視したときに主に視認できる色彩(以下、「非肌面側の地色」と記載することがある。)である。具体的には、図2に示す展開したおむつ1を非肌面側から平面視したときに、本体部100において最も広面積を占める色彩を、非肌面側の地色という。ここでは、全域に亘って実質的に同じ白色(第一色彩)の本体部100を例に挙げる。すなわち、本体部100の地色として白色を例示する。ただし、非肌面側に2色以上の色彩を有する本体部100では、この本体部100において最も広面積を占める色が地色となる。
 例えば、展開状態のおむつ1を非肌面側から平面視したときに第一識別部4Cの全てが前デザイン部5Aと重複する場合には、第一識別部4Cは、重複部4Aの色彩及び前デザイン部5Aの色彩と異なる色彩を有する。前デザイン部5Aと第一識別部4Cとが一部重複する場合には、第一識別部4Cは、重複部4Aの色彩、前デザイン部5Aの色彩、及び、非肌面側の地色と異なる色彩を有する。前デザイン部5Aと第一識別部4Cとが重複しない場合には、第一識別部4Cは、非重複部4Bの色彩及び本体部100の非肌面側の地色と異なる色彩を有する。
The “first identification unit 4C” is an area where the first identification unit 4C and other parts can be visually distinguished. More specifically, when the diaper 1 is unfolded (see FIG. 2), the first identification unit 4 </ b> C includes the front design unit 5 </ b> A and the main body in addition to the other parts of the patch 4 when viewed from the non-skin side. It has a color different from that of the portion 100 or a color different from other portions of the patch 4 and the main body 100.
Here, the "other part in the patch 4" refers to a part other than the first identification units 4C and 4C in the patch 4, and includes, for example, an overlapping part 4A and a non-overlapping part 4B. That is, when the diaper 1 in the unfolded state is viewed from the non-skin side in a plan view, the colors of the other portions of the patch 4 include the color of the overlapping portion 4A and the color of the non-overlapping portion 4B. In addition, the colors of the main body 100 when viewed in plan from the non-skin side include the colors of the design unit 5 and the colors of the main body 100 other than the design unit 5.
The “color of the front design part 5A” refers to a color that occupies the largest area when the front design part 5A is viewed in plan.
The “color of the design unit 5” refers to a color that occupies the largest area when the design unit 5 is viewed in a plan view.
In addition, the “color of the main body 100” may be described as a color mainly visible when the main body 100 is viewed in plan from the non-skin side (hereinafter, may be referred to as “non-skin side ground color”). ). Specifically, when the developed diaper 1 shown in FIG. 2 is viewed from the non-skin side, the color occupying the largest area in the main body 100 is referred to as the non-skin side ground color. Here, the main body 100 having substantially the same white color (first color) over the entire region will be described as an example. That is, white is exemplified as the ground color of the main body 100. However, in the main body 100 having two or more colors on the non-skin side, the color occupying the widest area in the main body 100 is the ground color.
For example, when the diaper 1 in the unfolded state is viewed in a plan view from the non-skin side, when all of the first identification unit 4C overlaps with the front design unit 5A, the first identification unit 4C uses the color of the overlap unit 4A and It has a color different from the color of the front design part 5A. When the front design part 5A and the first identification part 4C partially overlap, the first identification part 4C determines the color of the overlap part 4A, the color of the front design part 5A, and the ground color of the non-skin side. Has different colors. When the front design part 5A and the first identification part 4C do not overlap, the first identification part 4C has a color different from the color of the non-overlapping part 4B and the ground color of the non-skin surface side of the main body part 100.
 「異なる色彩」とは、明るさ、色相又は彩度のうち、少なくともいずれか一つが異なることを意味する。例えば、単に色相が異なるものばかりでなく、同じ色相であっても、彩度又は明度が異なるものは「異なる色彩」である。
 「同系の色彩」とは、実質的に同じ色彩を含む同系統の色彩、すなわち、色相が同じ又は近似する色彩を意味する。
“Different colors” means that at least one of brightness, hue, and saturation is different. For example, not only those having different hues but also those having the same hue but different chroma or lightness are “different colors”.
“Similar colors” means colors of the same type including substantially the same colors, that is, colors having the same or similar hues.
 そのほか、基材シート61が本体部100と同系の色彩であって係止部材62が第一識別部4C,4Cと同系の色彩である場合のテープ6は、基材シート61を通して係止部材62の色が透けて見えることが好ましい。具体的に言えば、テープ6は、展開状態のおむつ1において、基材シート61で係止部材62が非肌面側から覆われる状態で、係止部材の第二同系色彩が透けて非肌面側から見える所定の透光性を有することが好ましい。
 この所定の透光性は、下記の例示する二つの態様V,VIによって実現可能である。
  ・態様V:基材シート61の全光線透過率は65~99%である
  ・態様VI:基材シート61にフィルム化された部分(フィルム状化部)が設けられる
In addition, when the base sheet 61 has the same color as the main body 100 and the locking members 62 have the same color as the first identification portions 4C, 4C, the tape 6 passes through the base sheet 61 and the locking members 62. Is preferably seen through. Specifically, in the diaper 1 in the unfolded state, in a state where the locking member 62 is covered by the base sheet 61 from the non-skin side, the tape 6 is transparent through the second similar color of the locking member. It is preferable to have a predetermined translucency seen from the surface side.
This predetermined translucency can be realized by the following two examples V and VI.
-Aspect V: The total light transmittance of the base sheet 61 is 65 to 99%.-Aspect VI: The base sheet 61 is provided with a film-formed portion (film-formed portion).
 態様Vで上記した全光線透過率の基材シート61は、少なくとも基材シート61が透明又は半透明となる。この基材シート61によれば、折畳状態のおむつ1を肌面側から見たとき(基材シート61に対して係止部材62が積層される側とは反対側から見たとき)や展開状態のおむつ1を非肌面側から見たときに、係止部材62の色が基材シート61の厚み方向に透けて視認可能である。
 態様VIで上記したフィルム状部によれば、折畳状態のおむつ1を肌面側から見たときや展開状態のおむつ1を非肌面側から見たときに、係止部材62の色がフィルム状部を通して視認可能である。
 フィルム状部は、基材シート61の構成繊維(例えば、合成樹脂製繊維)が熱的に溶融されて繊維の形態を失い、被膜化している部分である。フィルム状部は、基材シート61に加熱加圧処理を行うことで形成できる。加熱加圧処理の条件は、基材シート61の構成繊維に応じて適宜設定される。
 フィルム状部は、フィルム化される前の基材シート61と比較して全光線透過率が大きくなる。このフィルム状部は、所定の透光性を確保する観点から、全光線透過率が65~99%であることが好ましい。このようなフィルム状部を有する基材シート61を用いることで、シート積層部50の全光線透過率の調整が容易になる。また、折畳状態で肌面側からおむつ1を平面視したときや展開状態で非肌面側からおむつ1を平面視したときに、係止部材62の色彩の視認性が向上する。
 なお、下記の式(1)で算出されるフィルム化前後における全光線透過率の変化率は、好ましくは65~99%である。
 フィルム化前後における全光線透過率の変化率[%]
   =フィルム化後の全光線透過率/フィルム化前の全光線透過率×100 (1)
 上記の態様V,VIでは、透けて見える係止部材62の色彩によって、使用者が視覚的にパッチ4の位置を判別することができ、おむつ1の前後も判別することができる。
In the base sheet 61 having the total light transmittance described in the aspect V, at least the base sheet 61 is transparent or translucent. According to the base sheet 61, when the diaper 1 in the folded state is viewed from the skin side (when viewed from the side opposite to the side on which the locking members 62 are stacked with respect to the base sheet 61), When the diaper 1 in the deployed state is viewed from the non-skin side, the color of the locking member 62 is visible through the base sheet 61 in the thickness direction.
According to the film-shaped portion described in the aspect VI, when the diaper 1 in the folded state is viewed from the skin side or the diaper 1 in the unfolded state is viewed from the non-skin side, the color of the locking member 62 is changed. Visible through the film.
The film-shaped portion is a portion where the constituent fibers (for example, synthetic resin fibers) of the base sheet 61 are thermally melted, lose the fiber form, and are formed into a film. The film-shaped portion can be formed by performing a heat and pressure treatment on the base sheet 61. The conditions of the heating and pressurizing treatment are appropriately set according to the constituent fibers of the base sheet 61.
The film portion has a higher total light transmittance than the base sheet 61 before being formed into a film. The film portion preferably has a total light transmittance of 65 to 99% from the viewpoint of securing a predetermined light transmittance. By using the base sheet 61 having such a film-shaped portion, the adjustment of the total light transmittance of the sheet laminated portion 50 becomes easy. In addition, when the diaper 1 is viewed in a plan view from the skin side in a folded state or when the diaper 1 is viewed in a plan view from a non-skin side in an unfolded state, the visibility of the color of the locking member 62 is improved.
The change rate of the total light transmittance before and after the film formation calculated by the following equation (1) is preferably 65 to 99%.
Change rate of total light transmittance before and after film formation [%]
= Total light transmittance after film formation / Total light transmittance before film formation × 100 (1)
In the above modes V and VI, the user can visually determine the position of the patch 4 by the color of the locking member 62 that can be seen through, and can also determine the front and rear of the diaper 1.
〈重複部〉
 前デザイン部5Aに外装されるパッチ4において、重複部4Aの全光線透過率は65~99%であることが好ましい。重複部4Aの全光線透過率が上記範囲のパッチ4は、少なくとも重複部4Aが透明又は半透明となる。このような態様では、前デザイン部5Aとパッチ4との視覚的な混同を引き起こしやすく、パッチ4の位置の判別がより困難になる傾向がある。しかし、パッチ4が幅方向Wの両端部に第一識別部4C,4Cを有することで、使用者はパッチ4の位置を容易に判別できる。
 また、重複部4Aの全光線透過率が上記範囲のパッチ4を用いると、前デザイン部5Aにパッチ4を外装しても、前デザイン部5Aの外観がパッチ4の存在に影響されにくく、前デザイン部5Aの視認性や見栄えに優れる。その結果、使用者のおむつ1に対する購買意欲を高めることができる。
 重複部4Aの全光線透過率は、パッチ4を構成する材料の選択(例えば、不織布を使用する場合にはその繊維径〔dtex(デシテックス)〕やその目付量、填料〔酸化チタン等〕の配合量)や、パッチ4の厚み寸法等により調整できる。上記範囲の全光線透過率を充足するパッチ4を構成する材料として不織布を用いる場合、その繊維径は0.5~1.2dtexが好ましく、また、その目付量は16g/m以下が好ましい。繊維径や目付量の算出方法は上記のとおりである。
<Overlapping part>
In the patch 4 provided on the front design part 5A, the total light transmittance of the overlapping part 4A is preferably 65 to 99%. In the patch 4 in which the total light transmittance of the overlapping portion 4A is in the above range, at least the overlapping portion 4A is transparent or translucent. In such an aspect, visual confusion between the front design part 5A and the patch 4 is likely to occur, and the position of the patch 4 tends to be more difficult to determine. However, since the patch 4 has the first identification portions 4C and 4C at both ends in the width direction W, the user can easily determine the position of the patch 4.
Further, when the patch 4 having the total light transmittance of the overlapping portion 4A in the above range is used, even if the patch 4 is externally mounted on the front design portion 5A, the appearance of the front design portion 5A is hardly affected by the presence of the patch 4, and The visibility and appearance of the design section 5A are excellent. As a result, the user's willingness to purchase the diaper 1 can be increased.
The total light transmittance of the overlapping portion 4A is determined by selecting the material constituting the patch 4 (for example, in the case of using a nonwoven fabric, the fiber diameter [dtex (decitex)], the basis weight thereof, and the blending of filler [titanium oxide etc.] Amount), the thickness of the patch 4, and the like. When a nonwoven fabric is used as a material constituting the patch 4 that satisfies the total light transmittance in the above range, the fiber diameter is preferably 0.5 to 1.2 dtex, and the basis weight is preferably 16 g / m 2 or less. The method for calculating the fiber diameter and the basis weight is as described above.
 また、前デザイン部5Aの面積に対する重複部4Aの面積の割合は30~70%であることが好ましい。前デザイン部5Aの面積に対する重複部4Aの面積の割合を上記範囲とすることで、テープ6をパッチ4に固定する際の位置決めが容易になると共に、デザイン部5の視認性や見栄えに優れる。したがって、使用者は着用者におむつ1を装着させることが容易になり、また、使用者のおむつ1に対する購買意欲を向上させることができる。 (4) The ratio of the area of the overlapping portion 4A to the area of the front design portion 5A is preferably 30 to 70%. By setting the ratio of the area of the overlapping portion 4A to the area of the front design portion 5A in the above range, the positioning when fixing the tape 6 to the patch 4 becomes easy, and the visibility and appearance of the design portion 5 are excellent. Therefore, the user can easily wear the diaper 1 on the wearer, and the user's willingness to purchase the diaper 1 can be improved.
 また、パッチ4が透明又は半透明な場合、重複部4Aは、前デザイン部5Aの色彩とは異なる色彩を有してもよい。前デザイン部5Aの色彩と重複部4Aの色彩とが異なることで、パッチ4の位置の判別がより容易になる。 In the case where the patch 4 is transparent or translucent, the overlapping portion 4A may have a color different from the color of the front design portion 5A. Since the color of the front design portion 5A is different from the color of the overlapping portion 4A, the position of the patch 4 can be easily determined.
〈パッチとデザイン部の幅方向寸法の関係〉
 また、図2に示すように、パッチ4の幅方向寸法は、前デザイン部5Aの幅方向寸法よりも大きく、第一識別部4C,4Cは前デザイン部5Aから幅方向外側に離隔している。言い換えると、パッチ4は、重複部4Aの幅方向外側に前デザイン部5Aと重複しない非重複部4Bを有する。つまり、この態様のパッチ4は、重複部4A、非重複部4B及び第一識別部4Cを有する。非重複部4Bの幅方向寸法は特に限定されないが、第一識別部4C,4Cと重複部4Aとを適度に離間させ、第一識別部4C,4Cの視認性を向上させる観点からは、好ましくは5mm以上、より好ましくは10mm以上であり、好ましくは30mm以下、より好ましくは20mm以下である。ただし、パッチ4は、テープ6よりも幅方向内側に配置される。言い換えれば、幅方向の中心線CL1(図1参照)に対して幅方向に離間する寸法は、テープ6よりもパッチ4のほうが短い。また、おむつ1の幅方向端部に対して幅方向内側に第一識別部4C,4Cが配置される。
<Relationship between patch and width dimension of design section>
Also, as shown in FIG. 2, the width dimension of the patch 4 is larger than the width dimension of the front design part 5A, and the first identification parts 4C, 4C are spaced outward from the front design part 5A in the width direction. . In other words, the patch 4 has a non-overlapping portion 4B that does not overlap with the front design portion 5A outside the overlapping portion 4A in the width direction. That is, the patch 4 of this aspect has the overlapping portion 4A, the non-overlapping portion 4B, and the first identifying portion 4C. The dimension in the width direction of the non-overlapping portion 4B is not particularly limited, but is preferable from the viewpoint of appropriately separating the first identification portions 4C, 4C from the overlapping portion 4A and improving the visibility of the first identification portions 4C, 4C. Is 5 mm or more, more preferably 10 mm or more, preferably 30 mm or less, more preferably 20 mm or less. However, the patch 4 is arranged inside the tape 6 in the width direction. In other words, the dimension of the patch 4 that is spaced apart from the center line CL1 in the width direction (see FIG. 1) in the width direction is shorter than that of the tape 6. Further, the first identification portions 4C, 4C are arranged on the inner side in the width direction with respect to the width direction end of the diaper 1.
 このような態様のパッチ4によれば、使用者は、保管状態のおむつ1(図3C参照)において、仮想線VL3,VL4による本体部100の折り返しを展開したとき(図3B参照)に、肌面側からの平面視により第一識別部4C,4Cを視認できる。また、使用者は、非肌面側の地色との色差や非重複部4Bとの色差により第一識別部4C,4Cを視認しやすいため、パッチ4の位置を容易に把握できる。 According to the patch 4 in such an aspect, when the user unfolds the folded back of the main body 100 by the virtual lines VL3 and VL4 (see FIG. 3B), the user can use the skin on the diaper 1 (see FIG. 3C) in the storage state. The first identification portions 4C, 4C can be visually recognized in a plan view from the surface side. Further, the user can easily visually recognize the first identification portions 4C and 4C based on the color difference with the ground color on the non-skin surface side and the color difference with the non-overlapping portion 4B, so that the position of the patch 4 can be easily grasped.
 例えば、第一識別部4C,4Cと非肌面側の地色との色差は、市販の測色器を用いて測色を行い、JIS Z 8729等に規定されるCIE1976(L)色空間に基づいて数値化した値を比較することによって求めることができる。具体的には、測定対象たる2点(第一識別部4Cの色彩と非肌面側の地色)間のL値の差がΔL、a値の差がΔa、b値の差がΔbであるときに、色差ΔEab=[(ΔL+(Δa+(Δb1/2によって求められる。この色差ΔEabが好ましくは1.5以上、より好ましくは3.0以上である場合に、使用者が目視により感知し得る程度に色彩が異なるといえる。言い換えれば、上記「異なる色彩」とは、色差が上記範囲であることを意味する。上記「同系の色彩」とは、色差が好ましくは1.5未満であることを意味し、上記「実質的に同じ色彩」とは、色差が好ましくは1.0未満であることを意味する。
 なお、ここでいう「第一識別部4Cの色彩」とは、第一識別部4Cを平面視したときに、最も広面積を占める色彩のことをいう。
For example, the color difference between the first identification units 4C and 4C and the ground color on the non-skin side is measured by using a commercially available colorimeter, and CIE1976 (L * a * b) specified in JIS Z 8729 and the like is performed. * ) It can be obtained by comparing values quantified based on the color space. Specifically, the difference in L * value between two points to be measured (the color of the first identification unit 4C and the ground color on the non-skin side) is ΔL * , and the difference in a * value is Δa * , b * value. Is Δb * , the color difference ΔE * ab = [(ΔL * ) 2 + (Δa * ) 2 + (Δb * ) 2 ] 1/2 . When the color difference ΔE * ab is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more, it can be said that the colors are different to the extent that the user can visually recognize them. In other words, the “different colors” means that the color difference is within the above range. The “similar color” means that the color difference is preferably less than 1.5, and the “substantially the same color” means that the color difference is preferably less than 1.0.
Here, the “color of the first identification unit 4C” refers to a color that occupies the largest area when the first identification unit 4C is viewed in a plan view.
〈フラップ〉
 また、図6に示すように、パッチ4は幅方向の両端部に一対のフラップ4D,4Dを有する。フラップ4D,4Dはパッチ4の両端部に形成された自由端である。なお、以下において「フラップ4D,4D」を単に「フラップ4D」と記載することがある。
 図6では、フラップ4Dは、パッチ4において第一識別部4Cと共に、端部に設けられている。幅方向Wの両端部にフラップ4Dを有するパッチ4によれば、使用者は触覚でもパッチ4の位置を判別することが可能になる。
 フラップ4Dの幅方向寸法W4Dは特に限定されない。フラップ4Dの幅方向寸法W4Dが小さすぎると触覚による判別が困難になる傾向がある。一方、フラップ4Dの幅方向寸法W4Dが大きすぎると、おむつ1を仮想線VL1,VL2にて折り畳む際にフラップ4Dが装置に挟まる等の不具合を引き起こす原因になることがある。上記観点から、フラップ4Dの幅方向寸法W4Dは、好ましくは1mm以上、より好ましくは3mm以上であり、好ましくは10mm以下、より好ましくは7mm以下である。なお、フラップ4Dの長手方向寸法は、パッチ4の長手方向寸法と略同じである。
<flap>
As shown in FIG. 6, the patch 4 has a pair of flaps 4D, 4D at both ends in the width direction. The flaps 4D, 4D are free ends formed at both ends of the patch 4. In the following, “flaps 4D, 4D” may be simply described as “flaps 4D”.
In FIG. 6, the flap 4D is provided at an end of the patch 4 together with the first identification unit 4C. According to the patch 4 having the flaps 4D at both ends in the width direction W, the user can determine the position of the patch 4 by touch.
The width dimension W 4D flap 4D is not particularly limited. Discrimination tactile the width direction dimension W 4D flap 4D is too small it tends to become difficult. On the other hand, if the width dimension W 4D flap 4D is too large, the flap 4D when folding the diaper 1 in phantom lines VL1, VL2 may become causes of defects such as sandwiched device. In view of the above, the width dimension W 4D flap 4D is preferably 1mm or more, more preferably 3mm or more, preferably 10mm or less, and more preferably 7mm or less. The longitudinal dimension of the flap 4D is substantially the same as the longitudinal dimension of the patch 4.
 また、視覚及び触覚によるパッチ4の位置の判別をより容易にする観点からは、第一識別部4Cの幅方向寸法W4Cに対するフラップ4Dの幅方向寸法W4Dの割合(W4D/W4C)は、好ましくは15%以上、より好ましくは25%以上であり、好ましくは50%以下、より好ましくは40%以下である。 Also, from the viewpoint of making it easier to visually and tactually determine the position of the patch 4, the ratio of the width dimension W 4D of the flap 4D to the width dimension W 4C of the first identification portion 4C (W 4D / W 4C ). Is preferably at least 15%, more preferably at least 25%, preferably at most 50%, more preferably at most 40%.
〈模様〉
 また、パッチ4は模様を有していてもよい。非肌面側からの平面視において、パッチ4の模様が前デザイン部5Aや本体部100の有する模様と異なる場合には、模様によりパッチ4の位置を判別することができる。このような模様は、印刷加工やエンボス加工により形成できる。模様は、パッチ4の全体に形成してもよいし、一部に形成してもよい。例えば、第一識別部4C,4Cにのみ模様を形成すこともできる。パッチ4の位置の判別を容易にする観点からは、パッチ4の全体に模様を施すことが好ましい。
<pattern>
Further, the patch 4 may have a pattern. When the pattern of the patch 4 is different from the pattern of the front design part 5A or the main body part 100 in a plan view from the non-skin side, the position of the patch 4 can be determined based on the pattern. Such a pattern can be formed by printing or embossing. The pattern may be formed on the entire patch 4 or on a part thereof. For example, a pattern can be formed only on the first identification portions 4C, 4C. From the viewpoint of facilitating the determination of the position of the patch 4, it is preferable to apply a pattern to the entire patch 4.
〈寸法〉
 また、パッチ4やデザイン部5等の具体的寸法は以下のとおりである。
 パッチ4の幅方向寸法は、通常100mm以上、好ましくは150mm以上であり、通常250mm以下、好ましくは200mm以下である。また、パッチ4の長手方向寸法は、通常20mm以上、好ましくは30mm以上であり、通常60mm以下、好ましくは50mm以下である。なお、図2には、幅方向寸法が180mmであり、長手方向寸法が40mmのパッチ4を示す。
<Size>
The specific dimensions of the patch 4, the design unit 5, and the like are as follows.
The width dimension of the patch 4 is usually 100 mm or more, preferably 150 mm or more, and usually 250 mm or less, preferably 200 mm or less. The longitudinal dimension of the patch 4 is usually 20 mm or more, preferably 30 mm or more, and is usually 60 mm or less, preferably 50 mm or less. FIG. 2 shows the patch 4 having a width dimension of 180 mm and a longitudinal dimension of 40 mm.
 第一識別部4Cの幅方向寸法W4Cは、通常5mm以上、好ましくは10mm以上であり、通常25mm以下、好ましくは20mm以下である。また、第一識別部4Cの長手方向寸法は、通常20mm以上、好ましくは30mm以上であり、通常60mm以下、好ましくは50mm以下である。なお、図2には、長手方向寸法がパッチ4の長手方向寸法と同じであって、パッチ4の端部から幅方向内側に15mmの領域に色彩の付された一対の第一識別部4C,4Cを示す。 The width dimension W 4C of the first identification portion 4C is generally 5mm or more, preferably 10mm or more, typically 25mm or less, preferably 20mm or less. The longitudinal dimension of the first identification portion 4C is usually at least 20 mm, preferably at least 30 mm, and is usually at most 60 mm, preferably at most 50 mm. In FIG. 2, a pair of first identification portions 4 </ b> C having the same size in the longitudinal direction as the length of the patch 4 and colored in a region 15 mm inward in the width direction from the end of the patch 4. 4C is shown.
 デザイン部5の幅方向寸法は、通常80mm以上、好ましくは100mm以上であり、通常200mm以下、好ましくは150mm以下である。また、デザイン部5の長手方向寸法は、通常80mm以上、好ましくは100mm以上であり、通常200mm以下、好ましくは150mm以下である。なお、図2には、幅方向寸法及び長手方向寸法がそれぞれ120mmのデザイン部5A,5Bを示す。 The width direction dimension of the design part 5 is usually 80 mm or more, preferably 100 mm or more, and usually 200 mm or less, preferably 150 mm or less. The length of the design portion 5 in the longitudinal direction is usually 80 mm or more, preferably 100 mm or more, and usually 200 mm or less, preferably 150 mm or less. FIG. 2 shows the design portions 5A and 5B each having a width dimension and a longitudinal dimension of 120 mm.
 上記寸法のパッチ4及び前デザイン部5Aを備えるおむつ1では、前デザイン部5Aとパッチ4との視覚的な混同が特に生じやすい傾向にある。したがって、パッチ4の両端部に上記寸法の第一識別部4C,4Cを設けることで、このような混同を確実に防止し、使用者はパッチ4の位置を容易に判別できる。 In the diaper 1 including the patch 4 and the front design part 5A having the above dimensions, visual confusion between the front design part 5A and the patch 4 tends to occur particularly easily. Therefore, by providing the first identifying portions 4C, 4C having the above dimensions at both ends of the patch 4, such confusion is reliably prevented, and the user can easily determine the position of the patch 4.
〈止着部〉
 そのほか、ここで例示するテープ6は、基材シート61の色彩が、本体部100の白色と異なる色彩であるとともに一対の第一識別部4C,4Cと同系の第二同系色彩であってもよい。一方、係止部材62は、本体部100の白色と同系の色彩(第一色彩又は第一同系色彩)であってもよい。すなわち、本体部100に対して、係止部材62を色彩の相違によって見分けるのが困難であるものの、基材シート61を色彩の相違によって見分けやすい構成が採用されている。
 例えば、白色と異なる色彩(いわば着色した色彩)の係止部材62は色の調整が困難であり、製造コストが高まるおそれがある。これに対し、本体部100の白色と同系色彩の係止部材62は色の調整が容易であるうえに、係止部材62と比較して色の調整が容易な基材シート61に着色することから、製造コストの上昇が抑制可能である。
 ただし、基材シート61が本体部100の白色と同系の色彩(第一色彩又は第一同系色彩)であって、係止部材62が本体部100の白色と異なる色彩(第二色彩,第二同系色彩)であってもよい。
<Fixing part>
In addition, in the tape 6 exemplified here, the color of the base sheet 61 may be a color different from the white color of the main body 100 and may be a second similar color similar to the pair of first identification portions 4C and 4C. . On the other hand, the locking member 62 may be a color similar to the white color of the main body 100 (first color or first similar color). That is, although it is difficult to distinguish the locking member 62 from the main body 100 due to the difference in color, a configuration is adopted in which the base sheet 61 is easily distinguishable due to the difference in color.
For example, it is difficult to adjust the color of the locking member 62 having a color different from white (so-called colored color), which may increase the manufacturing cost. On the other hand, the locking member 62 of the same color as the white color of the main body 100 can be easily adjusted in color, and the base sheet 61 whose color can be easily adjusted compared to the locking member 62 is colored. Therefore, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
However, the base sheet 61 has a color similar to the white color of the main body 100 (first color or first similar color), and the locking member 62 has a color different from the white color of the main body 100 (second color, second color). (Similar colors).
 上記のように、テープ6の少なくとも一部が本体部100の白色と異なる色彩(第二色彩,第二同系色彩)である場合には、テープ6の色彩によって当該テープ6の配置された後身頃1Cの判別が可能となり、おむつ1の前後を判別することができる。さらに、テープ6の色彩とパッチ4の第一識別部4C,4Cの色彩とが同系の色彩である場合には、テープ6の止め着け先を判別しやすくなり、おむつ1の装着性向上に資する。
 なお、テープ6が全域に亘って白色(第一色彩)であってもよい。この場合には、上述したようにテープ6の色彩でおむつ1の前後を判別することはできないものの、第一識別部4Cの色彩によっておむつ1の前後判別する手段が確保されたうえで、テープ6の着色コストを抑えることができる。
As described above, when at least a part of the tape 6 has a color (second color, second similar color) different from the white color of the main body 100, the rear body on which the tape 6 is arranged according to the color of the tape 6. 1C can be determined, and the front and rear of the diaper 1 can be determined. Furthermore, when the color of the tape 6 and the color of the first identification portions 4C and 4C of the patch 4 are similar colors, it is easy to determine where the tape 6 is fixed, which contributes to the improvement of the diaper 1's mounting property. .
Note that the tape 6 may be white (first color) over the entire area. In this case, although the front and rear of the diaper 1 cannot be determined by the color of the tape 6 as described above, a means for determining the front and rear of the diaper 1 by the color of the first identification unit 4C is secured, and Coloring cost can be suppressed.
〈止着部の色彩の変形例〉
 また、変形例として、テープ6は、少なくとも一部がデザイン部5A,5Bの色彩(第四色彩)と同系の色彩(第四同系色彩)を有していてもよい。具体的には、テープ6において、基材シート61がデザイン部5A,5Bと同系の第四同系色彩である。
 ここで、デザイン部5A,5Bの色彩(第四色彩)は、上述した本体部100の白色(第一色彩),第一識別部4Cの色彩(第二色彩)、及び、テープ6の第三色彩の何れとも異なる色彩であってもよい。あるいは、第四色彩は、第一色彩,第二色彩及び第三色彩の何れか一つと同じ色彩又は、何れか一つと同系の色彩であってもよい。より好ましくは、デザイン部5A,5Bとそれ以外の部分とを目視により区別可能とするという観点から、第四色彩は、本体部100の白色と異なる色彩である。
 テープ6の少なくとも一部を第四同系色彩とすることで、係止部材62をカバーシート14に止め着けた状態で、テープ6が前デザイン部5A上に重なり合ったとき、テープ6の色彩(第四同系色彩)が前デザイン部5Aの色彩に調和するので、デザイン部5A,5Bのデザイン性が阻害されない。また、テープ6の色彩によりテープ6の視認性が向上される。すなわち、テープ6の視認性向上効果と、デザイン阻害抑制効果との両立ができる。
<Modified color of the fastening part>
As a modification, at least a part of the tape 6 may have a color (fourth similar color) similar to the color (fourth color) of the design parts 5A and 5B. Specifically, in the tape 6, the base material sheet 61 has a fourth similar color similar to the design portions 5A and 5B.
Here, the colors (fourth color) of the design units 5A and 5B are the white color (first color) of the main body 100 described above, the color (second color) of the first identification unit 4C, and the third color of the tape 6. The color may be different from any of the colors. Alternatively, the fourth color may be the same color as any one of the first color, the second color, and the third color, or a color similar to any one of the first, second, and third colors. More preferably, the fourth color is a color different from the white color of the main body 100 from the viewpoint that the design portions 5A and 5B can be visually distinguished from the other portions.
By making at least part of the tape 6 a fourth similar color, when the tape 6 overlaps the front design portion 5A in a state where the locking member 62 is fixed to the cover sheet 14, the color of the tape 6 (the fourth color) Since the four similar colors match the color of the front design part 5A, the design of the design parts 5A and 5B is not hindered. In addition, the color of the tape 6 improves the visibility of the tape 6. That is, both the effect of improving the visibility of the tape 6 and the effect of suppressing design inhibition can be achieved.
 視認性向上効果は、第四同系色彩が本体部100の白色(第一色彩)と異なる色彩である場合に特に発揮される。この場合、テープ6において、基材シート61が第四同系色彩を有し、係止部材62が第一同系色彩を有しているとよい。係止部材62が第一同系色彩(基材シート61と異なる色彩)であるため、上記のテープ6の視認性向上効果とデザイン阻害抑制効果とに加えて、基材シート61に対する係止部材62の識別性が向上される。 (4) The visibility improving effect is particularly exhibited when the fourth similar color is a color different from the white color (first color) of the main body 100. In this case, in the tape 6, the base sheet 61 preferably has a fourth similar color, and the locking member 62 preferably has a first similar color. Since the locking member 62 is a first similar color (a color different from that of the base sheet 61), in addition to the effect of improving the visibility of the tape 6 and the effect of suppressing design inhibition, the locking member for the base sheet 61 is also provided. 62 is improved.
 また、別の変形例として、テープ6の少なくとも一部が第一識別部4Cの第二色彩と異なる第五色彩を有していてもよい。テープ6の少なくとも一部が第五色彩であることで、第一識別部4Cに対するテープ6の視認性が向上される。テープ6の視認性の向上という観点から、テープ6の第五色彩は、本体部100の白色(第一色彩)と異なる色彩であることが好ましい。 As another modified example, at least a part of the tape 6 may have a fifth color different from the second color of the first identification unit 4C. Since at least a part of the tape 6 is in the fifth color, the visibility of the tape 6 with respect to the first identification unit 4C is improved. From the viewpoint of improving the visibility of the tape 6, it is preferable that the fifth color of the tape 6 be a color different from the white color (first color) of the main body 100.
 テープ6の第五色彩とは、例えば、デザイン部5A,5Bの色彩と同系の第四同系色彩である。この場合、基材シート61(テープ6の少なくとも一部)の色彩を、デザイン部5A,5Bの色彩と同系の第四同系色彩であり、且つ、第一識別部4Cの第二色彩と異なる色彩とすることができる。そのため、テープ6の視認性向上効果と、デザイン阻害抑制効果とが、より一層発揮される。
 更に、第一識別部4Cの色彩(第二色彩)はデザイン部5A,5Bの色彩(第四色彩)よりも薄い色彩であるとよい。ここで「薄い色彩」とは、例えば第四色彩よりも明度の高い及び/又は彩度の低い色彩である。この場合、第一識別部4Cの色彩が薄い色彩であることで、デザイン部5A,5Bのデザインを邪魔せず、デザイン阻害抑制効果が発揮される。
The fifth color of the tape 6 is, for example, a fourth similar color similar to the colors of the design units 5A and 5B. In this case, the color of the base sheet 61 (at least a part of the tape 6) is a fourth similar color similar to the colors of the design units 5A and 5B, and is different from the second color of the first identification unit 4C. It can be. Therefore, the effect of improving the visibility of the tape 6 and the effect of suppressing design inhibition are further exhibited.
Further, the color (second color) of the first identification unit 4C is preferably a lighter color than the color (fourth color) of the design units 5A and 5B. Here, the “light color” is, for example, a color having higher lightness and / or lower saturation than the fourth color. In this case, since the color of the first identification unit 4C is a light color, the design of the design units 5A and 5B is not disturbed, and a design inhibition suppressing effect is exhibited.
 上記をまとめると、本体部100,第一識別部4C,デザイン部5A,5B,基材シート61および係止部材62の好ましい色彩の組み合わせとして、以下の組み合わせが例示される。
  ・本体部100の第一色彩が白色であり、
  ・第一識別部4Cの第二色彩が第一色彩およびデザイン部5A,5Bの第四色彩とは異なり、且つ、第四色彩よりも薄い色彩であり、
  ・デザイン部5A,5Bの第四色彩が第一色彩とも第一識別部4Cの第二色彩とは異なる色彩であり、
  ・基材シート61の色彩が、第一色彩とは異なる色彩(第三色彩)でデザイン部5A,5Bの第四色彩と同系(第四同系色彩)であり、且つ、第一識別部4Cの第二色彩とは異なる色彩(第五色彩)であり、
  ・係止部材62が第一同系色彩(基材シート61と異なる色彩)である。
 この場合、テープ6の識別性向上効果と、デザイン阻害性の抑制効果とが、より一層発揮される。
To summarize the above, the following combinations are exemplified as preferable combinations of colors of the main body 100, the first identification section 4C, the design sections 5A and 5B, the base sheet 61, and the locking members 62.
-The first color of the main body 100 is white,
The second color of the first identification unit 4C is different from the first color and the fourth color of the design units 5A and 5B, and is lighter than the fourth color;
The fourth color of the design units 5A and 5B is different from the first color in the first color and the second color of the first identification unit 4C;
The color of the base sheet 61 is a color (third color) different from the first color and is similar to the fourth color of the design units 5A and 5B (fourth similar color), and the color of the first identification unit 4C. It is a color different from the second color (fifth color),
The locking member 62 is a first similar color (a color different from the base sheet 61).
In this case, the effect of improving the discriminability of the tape 6 and the effect of suppressing the design inhibition are further exhibited.
 上記の組み合わせの変形例として、第一識別部4Cの色彩(第二色彩)がデザイン部5A,5Bの色彩(第四色彩)と同色であってもよい。この場合、基材シート61(テープ6の少なくとも一部)は、デザイン部5A,5Bだけでなく第一識別部4Cの色彩とも同系の第四同系色彩を有する。この組み合わせでも、テープ6の識別性向上効果と、デザイン阻害性の抑制効果とが発揮される。
 さらに別の変形例として、基材シート61及び係止部材62(テープ6の全部)が第四同系色彩を有していてもよい。この場合も、テープ6の識別性向上効果と、デザイン阻害性の抑制効果とが発揮される。
As a modified example of the above combination, the color (second color) of the first identification unit 4C may be the same as the color (fourth color) of the design units 5A and 5B. In this case, the base sheet 61 (at least a part of the tape 6) has a fourth similar color similar to the color of the first identification portion 4C as well as the design portions 5A and 5B. Also in this combination, the effect of improving the discernability of the tape 6 and the effect of suppressing the design inhibition are exhibited.
As yet another modification, the base sheet 61 and the locking members 62 (all of the tape 6) may have a fourth similar color. Also in this case, the effect of improving the discernability of the tape 6 and the effect of suppressing the design inhibition are exhibited.
[2.作用及び効果]
 本第一実施形態のおむつ1は、上述のように構成されるため、以下のような作用及び効果を奏する。
 (1)本発明によれば、新規な吸収性物品が提供される。
 (2)前身頃1A及び後身頃1Cのそれぞれに設けられたデザイン部5A,5Bによりパッチ4の位置の判別が困難な態様の吸収性物品1であっても、パッチ4が幅方向の両端部に第一識別部4C,4Cを有するため、使用者はパッチ4の位置を確実に判別できる。また、使用者は、パッチ4の位置から吸収性物品1の前後関係を認識できる。したがって、本発明によれば、パッチ4の位置、及び着用者に対する吸収性物品1の前後の判別が容易であり、ファスニングテープ6をパッチ4に固定する際の位置決めがしやすい吸収性物品1が提供される。
 (3)本発明に係る吸収性物品では、パッチ4の幅方向の両端部に第一識別部4C,4Cを設け、テープ6を構成する基材シート61と係止部材62とを異なる色彩にするとともに、基材シート61と第一識別部4C,4Cとを同系の色彩としている。そのため、前身頃1A及び後身頃1Cのそれぞれに設けられたデザイン部5A,5Bによりパッチ4の位置の判別や、前後の判別が困難な態様の吸収性物品1であっても、使用者は、テープ6の位置を把握しやすく、また、色彩の似ている部材同士を止め着けることを視覚的に容易に理解できる。さらに、第一識別部4C,4Cとテープ6との位置関係により、使用者はおむつ1の前後を容易に判別できる。したがって、使用者は、吸収性物品を着用者に迅速に装着できる。
 (4)本発明によれば、第二折畳状態の吸収性物品を肌面側から平面視したときに、係止部材62の色彩を視認できる。その結果、係止部材62の色彩を製造工程中のマーカーとして利用することで、仮想線VL1,VL2での折り加工が適切に行われているか否かを容易に判別できる。したがって、所定形状に折り畳まれたおむつ1を効率よく製造できる。つまり、おむつ1の生産性に優れる。
 (5)また、第一折畳状態および第二折畳状態のおむつ1において、テープ6の少なくとも一部の第三色彩が透けて見える所定の透光性を有することから、使用者は透けて見えた第三色彩の位置からおむつ1の前後を推測できる。したがって、使用者は着用者に対するおむつ1の位置決めを迅速に行うことができる。 
[2. Action and effect]
Since the diaper 1 of the first embodiment is configured as described above, it has the following operations and effects.
(1) According to the present invention, a novel absorbent article is provided.
(2) Even if the position of the patch 4 is difficult to determine due to the design portions 5A and 5B provided on the front body 1A and the back body 1C, respectively, the patch 4 has both ends in the width direction. The first identification portions 4C, 4C, the user can reliably determine the position of the patch 4. Further, the user can recognize the context of the absorbent article 1 from the position of the patch 4. Therefore, according to the present invention, it is easy to determine the position of the patch 4 and the front and rear of the absorbent article 1 with respect to the wearer, and it is easy to perform the positioning when fixing the fastening tape 6 to the patch 4. Provided.
(3) In the absorbent article according to the present invention, the first identification portions 4C and 4C are provided at both ends in the width direction of the patch 4, and the base sheet 61 and the locking member 62 constituting the tape 6 are provided in different colors. In addition, the base sheet 61 and the first identification portions 4C, 4C have similar colors. Therefore, even in the case of the absorbent article 1 in which it is difficult to determine the position of the patch 4 or to determine the front and rear by the design portions 5A and 5B provided on the front body 1A and the back body 1C, respectively, The position of the tape 6 can be easily grasped, and it can be easily understood visually that members having similar colors can be fixed to each other. Further, the user can easily determine the front and rear of the diaper 1 based on the positional relationship between the first identification sections 4C and 4C and the tape 6. Therefore, the user can quickly wear the absorbent article on the wearer.
(4) According to the present invention, the color of the locking member 62 can be visually recognized when the absorbent article in the second folded state is viewed in plan from the skin side. As a result, by using the color of the locking member 62 as a marker during the manufacturing process, it can be easily determined whether or not the folding process along the virtual lines VL1 and VL2 is properly performed. Therefore, the diaper 1 folded into a predetermined shape can be manufactured efficiently. That is, the diaper 1 is excellent in productivity.
(5) Further, in the diaper 1 in the first folded state and the second folded state, since the tape 6 has a predetermined translucency in which at least a part of the third color can be seen through, the user can see through. The front and rear of the diaper 1 can be estimated from the position of the visible third color. Therefore, the user can quickly position the diaper 1 with respect to the wearer.
[3.その他]
 上述した実施形態はあくまでも例示に過ぎず、この実施形態で明示しない種々の変形や技術の適用を排除する意図はない。本実施形態の各構成は、それらの趣旨を逸脱しない範囲で種々変形して実施することができる。また、必要に応じて取捨選択することができ、適宜組み合わせることもできる。
[3. Others]
The above-described embodiment is merely an example, and there is no intention to exclude various modifications and application of technology not explicitly described in this embodiment. Each configuration of the present embodiment can be variously modified and implemented without departing from the spirit thereof. In addition, they can be selected as needed and can be appropriately combined.
 例えば、テープ6の配置箇所(前身頃1A及び後身頃1Cの一方)は、後身頃1Cに限定されず、前身頃1Aであってもよい。この場合には、パッチ4の配置箇所(前身頃1A及び後身頃1Cの他方)は後身頃1Cとなる。そして、上記実施形態においては、「前身頃1A」を「後身頃1C」と読み替えるとともに「後身頃1C」を「前身頃1A」と読み替えればよい。 For example, the location of the tape 6 (one of the front body 1A and the back body 1C) is not limited to the back body 1C but may be the front body 1A. In this case, the location of the patch 4 (the other of the front body 1A and the back body 1C) is the back body 1C. Then, in the above embodiment, "the front body 1A" may be read as "the back body 1C" and "the back body 1C" may be read as "the front body 1A".
 また、第一識別部4Cは、前デザイン部5Aと同じ図柄を有してもよい。このような態様の場合には、パッチ4の幅方向寸法をデザイン部5の幅方向寸法よりも大きくし、さらに、第一識別部4Cを前デザイン部5Aから幅方向に離隔させることで、使用者が第一識別部4Cを視認しやすくなるため、パッチ4の位置を判別することができる。 (4) The first identification unit 4C may have the same design as the front design unit 5A. In the case of such an embodiment, the width of the patch 4 is made larger than the width of the design portion 5 and the first identification portion 4C is further separated from the front design portion 5A in the width direction, so that the patch 4 is used. This makes it easier for the user to visually recognize the first identification unit 4C, so that the position of the patch 4 can be determined.
[II.第二実施形態]
[1.構成]
[1-1.基本構成]
 図7~図10を参照して、テープ型紙おむつ300の基本的な構成を説明する。なお、図9の断面図では、各構成を把握しやすくするため、各シート類の厚みを誇張して示している。下記の説明では、「テープ型紙おむつ」を単に「紙おむつ」と略称する。
[II. Second Embodiment]
[1. Constitution]
[1-1. Basic configuration]
The basic configuration of the tape-type paper diaper 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 9, the thickness of each sheet is exaggerated for easy understanding of each configuration. In the following description, “tape-type paper diaper” is simply referred to as “paper diaper”.
 図7では、幅方向の中心線Aを基準として対称に紙おむつ300が形成されている。この紙おむつ300は、長手方向に沿って前身頃202、股下部203、及び後身頃204の三つの領域に大別される。前身頃202は、装着時に着用者の下腹部側に位置する領域である。後身頃204は、装着時に着用者の臀部側に位置する領域である。股下部203は、前身頃202と後身頃204との間に位置して、装着時に着用者の股下に位置する領域である。 In FIG. 7, the paper diaper 300 is formed symmetrically with respect to the center line A in the width direction. The disposable diaper 300 is roughly divided into three regions along the longitudinal direction: a front body 202, a crotch 203, and a back body 204. The front body 202 is an area located on the lower abdomen side of the wearer when worn. The back body 204 is an area located on the buttocks side of the wearer when worn. The crotch 203 is an area located between the front body 202 and the back body 204 and positioned at the wearer's crotch when worn.
 紙おむつ300は、前身頃202及び後身頃204において、長手方向の両側縁部から股下部203よりも幅方向外方に延出する、左右一対の前方サイドフラップ205及び左右一対の後方サイドフラップ206をそれぞれ有している。 The disposable diaper 300 includes a pair of left and right front side flaps 205 and a pair of right and left rear side flaps 206 extending from both longitudinal side edges outward in the width direction from the crotch portion 203 in the front body 202 and the back body 204. Each has.
 紙おむつ300は、前身頃202及び後身頃204のうち少なくとも一方(ここでは後身頃204)において、長手方向の両側縁部から外方に突出して設けられる左右一対のファスニングテープ(以下、「テープ」と略称する)260を有している。また、紙おむつ300は、前身頃202及び後身頃204のうち他方(ここでは前身頃202)において、テープ260が止着されるパッチ238を有する。 The disposable diaper 300 includes a pair of left and right fastening tapes (hereinafter, referred to as “tapes”) provided on at least one of the front body 202 and the back body 204 (here, the back body 204) so as to protrude outward from both side edges in the longitudinal direction. (Abbreviated) 260. The disposable diaper 300 has a patch 238 to which a tape 260 is fixed on the other of the front body 202 and the back body 204 (here, the front body 202).
 紙おむつ300は、少なくとも股下部203に積層体210を備える。より具体的には、紙おむつ300は、前身頃202、股下部203、及び後身頃204に亘って長手方向に設けられる積層体210を備える。図8,図9に示すように、積層体210は、吸収体220と、吸収体220の肌対向面側に積層されるトップシート231とを備える。さらに、積層体210は、吸収体220の肌非対向面側に積層されるバックシート232を備える。また、バックシート232の肌非対向面側には、カバーシート235が積層される。また、トップシート231の側方(幅方向外側)から肌対向面側に亘って、サイドシート233が配置される。図9に示すように、吸収体220は、吸収性コア221を内蔵している。さらに、図7,図8,図10に示すように、紙おむつ300には、股下部203に一対の第二識別部280a,280bが設けられ、前身頃202及び後身頃204にデザイン部291,292が設けられている。
 以下、紙おむつ300の各構成要素について説明する。
The disposable diaper 300 includes a laminate 210 at least in the crotch 203. More specifically, the disposable diaper 300 includes a laminated body 210 provided in the longitudinal direction over the front body 202, the crotch 203, and the back body 204. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the laminated body 210 includes an absorbent body 220 and a top sheet 231 laminated on the skin facing side of the absorbent body 220. Further, the laminate 210 includes a back sheet 232 laminated on the non-skin facing side of the absorber 220. In addition, a cover sheet 235 is laminated on the non-skin-facing surface side of the back sheet 232. Further, the side sheet 233 is arranged from the side (outside in the width direction) of the top sheet 231 to the skin facing surface side. As shown in FIG. 9, the absorber 220 has a built-in absorbent core 221. Further, as shown in FIGS. 7, 8, and 10, the disposable diaper 300 is provided with a pair of second identification portions 280a and 280b in the crotch portion 203, and the design portions 291 and 292 in the front body 202 and the back body 204. Is provided.
Hereinafter, each component of the disposable diaper 300 will be described.
〔吸収性コア〕
 吸収性コア221は、液体を吸収して保持するマット状の部材である。図9に示すように、吸収性コア221は、高吸収性ポリマー(SAP(Superabsorbent polymer)、高吸水性高分子あるいは高吸水性樹脂とも称される)222と、繊維材料223とを含んでいる。吸収性コア221は、繊維材料223に高吸収性ポリマー222が混合されることにより形成されている。繊維材料223は、親水性を有する極細の繊維が絡まり合って形成されている。高吸収性ポリマー222は、繊維材料223に混合されることにより、通常、繊維材料223に埋没保持されている。高吸収性ポリマー222は、繊維材料223によって拡散された液体を吸収し保持することができる。
(Absorptive core)
The absorbent core 221 is a mat-shaped member that absorbs and holds a liquid. As shown in FIG. 9, the absorbent core 221 includes a superabsorbent polymer (SAP (superabsorbent polymer), also referred to as a superabsorbent polymer or a superabsorbent resin) 222 and a fiber material 223. . The absorbent core 221 is formed by mixing the superabsorbent polymer 222 with the fiber material 223. The fiber material 223 is formed by intertwining ultrafine fibers having hydrophilicity. The superabsorbent polymer 222 is usually buried and held in the fiber material 223 by being mixed with the fiber material 223. The superabsorbent polymer 222 can absorb and retain the liquid diffused by the fiber material 223.
<高吸収性ポリマー>
 高吸収性ポリマー222としては、使い捨ておむつや尿パッドのような吸収性物品における吸収体の材料として用いられている各種公知のものを用いることができる。高吸収性ポリマー222としては、例えば、デンプン-アクリル酸(塩)グラフト共重合体、デンプン-アクリロニトリル共重合体のケン化物、デンプン-アクリル酸エチルグラフト共重合体のケン化物等のデンプン系;ナトリウムカルボキシメチルセルロースの架橋物等のセルロース系;ポリアクリル酸(塩)、アクリル酸で架橋されたポリエチレンオキシド、ポリビニルアルコール-無水マレイン酸反応物の架橋物等の合成ポリマー系のものを用いることができる。これらの中でも、吸収性の観点から、ポリアクリル酸(塩)が好ましく、ポリアクリル酸ナトリウムがより好ましい。これらは、1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。高吸収性ポリマー222の形状は特に限定されないが、例えば、粒状、粉体状、ペレット状、ゾル状、フィルム状、繊維状等のものを用いることができる。
<Super absorbent polymer>
As the superabsorbent polymer 222, various known polymers used as a material of an absorbent in an absorbent article such as a disposable diaper or a urine pad can be used. Examples of the superabsorbent polymer 222 include starch-based polymers such as starch-acrylic acid (salt) graft copolymer, saponified starch-acrylonitrile copolymer, and saponified starch-ethyl acrylate graft copolymer; Cellulose-based ones such as cross-linked carboxymethylcellulose; synthetic polymer-based ones such as polyacrylic acid (salt), polyethylene oxide cross-linked with acrylic acid, and cross-linked products of polyvinyl alcohol-maleic anhydride reactant can be used. Among these, from the viewpoint of absorbability, polyacrylic acid (salt) is preferred, and sodium polyacrylate is more preferred. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Although the shape of the superabsorbent polymer 222 is not particularly limited, for example, a granular, powdery, pellet, sol, film, fibrous, or the like can be used.
<繊維材料>
 繊維材料223としては、例えば、パルプ繊維、レーヨン繊維、コットン繊維等のセルロース系の繊維や;ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリエチレンテレフタレート等の合成繊維に親水化処理を施したものが挙げられる。中でも、吸収性の観点から、繊維又は合成繊維を粉砕あるいは解繊したフラッフパルプを用いることが好ましい。これらは、1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
<Fiber material>
Examples of the fiber material 223 include cellulosic fibers such as pulp fiber, rayon fiber, and cotton fiber; and synthetic fibers such as polyethylene, polypropylene, and polyethylene terephthalate that have been subjected to a hydrophilic treatment. Above all, from the viewpoint of absorbability, it is preferable to use fluff pulp obtained by pulverizing or fibrillating fibers or synthetic fibers. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
〔吸収体〕
 吸収体220は、着用者から排泄される尿や経血といった液体の水分(以下「排泄水分」という)を吸収して保持する吸液性をもつマット状(あるいはパッド状)の部材である。図7に示すように、本実施形態では、前身頃202及び後身頃204よりも股下部203のほうが幅方向寸法の小さい、砂時計形状の吸収体220を例示する。より具体的には、この吸収体220は、後身頃204における幅方向寸法が大きい部分の長手方向の寸法が、前身頃202における幅方向寸法が大きい部分の長手方向の寸法よりも大きい、非対称砂時計形状となっている。ただし、吸収体220の平面視形状は、上記したような砂時計形状に限らず、平面視で矩形(すなわち幅方向寸法が一定)であってもよいし、それぞれ円形の前身頃202及び後身頃204を結ぶダンベル形状であってもよい。
〔Absorber〕
The absorber 220 is a liquid-absorbing mat-like (or pad-like) member that absorbs and retains liquid moisture (hereinafter, “excreted moisture”) such as urine and menstrual blood excreted from the wearer. As shown in FIG. 7, in the present embodiment, an hourglass-shaped absorber 220 in which the crotch 203 has a smaller width dimension than the front body 202 and the back body 204 is illustrated. More specifically, this absorptive body 220 has an asymmetric hourglass in which a longitudinal dimension of a portion of the back body 204 having a large width direction is larger than a longitudinal dimension of a portion of the front body 202 having a large width direction. It has a shape. However, the shape of the absorber 220 in plan view is not limited to the hourglass shape as described above, and may be rectangular (that is, the width direction dimension is constant) in plan view, or may be circular front and back bodies 202 and 204, respectively. May be in a dumbbell shape.
 図9に示すように、吸収体220は、吸収性コア221とコアラップシート(以下、「ラップシート」と略称する)224とを有している。吸収体220は、吸収性コア221がラップシート224によって被包(ラップ)されることで形成されている。ラップシート224は、吸収性コア221の肌対向面側と肌非対向面側とを含めて、吸収性コア221の全体を被覆している。 吸収 As shown in FIG. 9, the absorber 220 has an absorbent core 221 and a core wrap sheet (hereinafter abbreviated as “wrap sheet”) 224. The absorber 220 is formed by encapsulating (wrapping) the absorbent core 221 with a wrap sheet 224. The wrap sheet 224 covers the entire absorbent core 221 including the skin facing surface side and the non-skin facing surface side of the absorbent core 221.
<ラップシート>
 ラップシート224は、吸収性コア221を被覆するシート状の部材である。ラップシート224によって吸収性コア221が被包されることで、吸収性コア221の定形性が確保される。
<Wrap sheet>
The wrap sheet 224 is a sheet-like member that covers the absorbent core 221. By covering the absorbent core 221 with the wrap sheet 224, the fixed shape of the absorbent core 221 is ensured.
 ラップシート224は、吸収性物品に用いられている公知の材料で形成することができる。例えばティッシュペーパーのような紙;スパンボンド不織布、ニードルパンチ不織布、スパンレース不織布、エアスルー不織布、SMS(Spunbound Meltblown Spunbound)不織布等を用いることができる。 The wrap sheet 224 can be formed of a known material used for an absorbent article. For example, paper such as tissue paper; spunbonded nonwoven fabric, needle-punched nonwoven fabric, spunlace nonwoven fabric, air-through nonwoven fabric, SMS (Spunbound @ Meltblown @ Spunbound) nonwoven fabric and the like can be used.
〔積層体〕
 積層体210は、吸収体220の両主面側にトップシート231とバックシート232とがそれぞれ配置された積層構造体である。中でも、トップシート231は、吸収体220の肌対向面側の表面に配置される。また、バックシート232は、吸収体220の肌非対向面側の表面に配置される。積層体210は、肌対向面側からの排泄水分をトップシート231に透過させて、透過した排泄水分を吸収体220によって吸収保持するとともに、バックシート232によって肌非対向面側から外部への漏出を阻止する。トップシート231及びバックシート232と吸収体220とは、ホットメルト接着剤等の公知の接着剤によって固定することができる。
(Laminate)
The laminated body 210 is a laminated structure in which a top sheet 231 and a back sheet 232 are arranged on both main surfaces of the absorber 220, respectively. Among them, the top sheet 231 is arranged on the surface of the absorber 220 on the skin facing surface side. The back sheet 232 is disposed on the surface of the absorber 220 on the non-skin facing side. The laminated body 210 allows the excreted moisture from the skin-facing surface side to pass through the top sheet 231, absorbs and retains the permeated excreted moisture by the absorber 220, and leaks to the outside from the non-skin-facing surface side by the back sheet 232. To block. The top sheet 231 and the back sheet 232 and the absorber 220 can be fixed with a known adhesive such as a hot melt adhesive.
<トップシート>
 トップシート231は、積層体210において最も肌対向面側に配置されるシート状の部材である。このトップシート231は、吸収体220よりも幅方向寸法が大きく、肌対向面側から吸収体220の全面を被覆する。また、トップシート231は、紙おむつ300が装着された状態において、着用者の肌に接触して、排泄水分を透過させて吸収体220に吸収させる。このため、トップシート231は、少なくとも一部又は全部が透水性をもつ材料で構成される。また、トップシート231は、装着時のフィット性のため、柔軟性が高い材料で構成されることが好ましい。また、装着状態での蒸れを抑えるため、通気性を併せもつ材料で構成されることが好ましい。
<Top sheet>
The top sheet 231 is a sheet-like member arranged on the side of the laminate 210 closest to the skin. The top sheet 231 has a larger width dimension than the absorber 220 and covers the entire surface of the absorber 220 from the side facing the skin. The top sheet 231 is in contact with the wearer's skin in a state in which the disposable diaper 300 is attached, and allows excreted moisture to permeate and be absorbed by the absorber 220. For this reason, the top sheet 231 is at least partially or entirely made of a material having water permeability. Further, it is preferable that the top sheet 231 be made of a material having high flexibility for fitting at the time of mounting. In addition, in order to suppress stuffiness in the mounted state, it is preferable that the material is formed of a material having air permeability.
 トップシート231を構成する材料としては、例えば、織布、不織布、多孔性フィルム等を用いることができる。または、トップシート231としては、ポリプロピレン、ポリエチレン、ポリエステル、ナイロン等の熱可塑性樹脂の繊維に親水化処理を施して、不織布にしたものを用いてもよい。トップシート231を構成する不織布としては、例えば、スパンボンド不織布、ニードルパンチ不織布、スパンレース不織布、エアスルー不織布、メルトブローン不織布、SMS不織布等を用いることができる。 材料 As a material forming the top sheet 231, for example, a woven fabric, a nonwoven fabric, a porous film, or the like can be used. Alternatively, as the top sheet 231, a non-woven fabric obtained by subjecting fibers of a thermoplastic resin such as polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, or nylon to a hydrophilic treatment may be used. As the nonwoven fabric forming the top sheet 231, for example, a spunbonded nonwoven fabric, a needle punched nonwoven fabric, a spunlace nonwoven fabric, an air-through nonwoven fabric, a melt blown nonwoven fabric, an SMS nonwoven fabric, and the like can be used.
<バックシート>
 バックシート232は、積層体210で最も肌非対向面側に配置されるシート状の部材である。このバックシート232は、吸収体220及びトップシート231よりも幅方向寸法が大きく、肌非対向面側から吸収体220及びトップシート231の全面を被覆する。また、バックシート232は、吸収体220から肌非対向面側に排泄物が漏れるのを防ぐ。このため、バックシート232は、非透水性をもつ材料で構成される。また、バックシート232は、装着状態での蒸れを抑えるため、透湿性を併せもつ材料で構成されることが好ましい。
<Back sheet>
The back sheet 232 is a sheet-shaped member disposed on the side of the laminate 210 closest to the skin. The back sheet 232 has a larger width dimension than the absorber 220 and the top sheet 231 and covers the entire surface of the absorber 220 and the top sheet 231 from the non-skin-facing surface side. Further, the back sheet 232 prevents excrement from leaking from the absorber 220 to the non-skin-facing surface side. For this reason, the back sheet 232 is made of a material having water impermeability. Further, it is preferable that the back sheet 232 be made of a material having moisture permeability in order to suppress stuffiness in a mounted state.
 バックシート232を構成する材料としては、例えば、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン等の熱可塑性樹脂シートを用いることができる。中でも、バックシート232としては、0.1~0.4μmの微細な孔が複数形成された微多孔性の熱可塑性樹脂シートを用いることが好ましい。このようなシートとしては、例えば、熱可塑性樹樹脂中に無機充填剤を混練してシートを成形した後に、延伸することにより得られるシートを用いることができる。 (4) As a material forming the back sheet 232, for example, a thermoplastic resin sheet such as polyethylene or polypropylene can be used. Above all, as the back sheet 232, it is preferable to use a microporous thermoplastic resin sheet in which a plurality of fine holes of 0.1 to 0.4 μm are formed. As such a sheet, for example, a sheet obtained by kneading an inorganic filler into a thermoplastic resin, forming the sheet, and then stretching the sheet can be used.
〔サイドシート、カバーシート〕
 紙おむつ300は、積層体210に対して積層されるサイドシート233及びカバーシート235をさらに備えている。サイドシート233は、積層体210の幅方向側方から肌対向面側に亘って配置される。また、カバーシート235は、積層体210の肌非対向面側に配置される。サイドシート233及びカバーシート235と積層体210とは、ホットメルト接着剤等の公知の接着剤によって固定することができる。
[Side sheet, cover sheet]
The disposable diaper 300 further includes a side sheet 233 and a cover sheet 235 laminated on the laminated body 210. The side sheet 233 is arranged from the side in the width direction of the laminated body 210 to the skin facing surface side. The cover sheet 235 is arranged on the non-skin facing side of the laminate 210. The side sheet 233, the cover sheet 235, and the laminate 210 can be fixed with a known adhesive such as a hot melt adhesive.
<サイドシート>
 サイドシート233は、積層体210の両側部に後述する立体ギャザー242を形成するために幅方向両側に設けられる左右一対の部材である。図8に示すように、サイドシート233は、前身頃202及び後身頃204において、長手方向の両側縁部から股下部203よりも幅方向外方に延出するフラップ部234A及びフラップ部234Bをそれぞれ有している。図9に示すように、サイドシート233は、トップシート231及びバックシート232の幅方向側方のそれぞれに設けられている。さらに、サイドシート233は、トップシート231及びバックシート232の幅方向側方から、幅方向側部にかけて肌対向面側に積層される。サイドシート233は、後述する立体ギャザー242の収縮を利用して、着用者の肌に当接する方向に向かって起立する。
<Side seat>
The side sheets 233 are a pair of left and right members provided on both sides in the width direction to form three-dimensional gathers 242 described later on both sides of the laminated body 210. As shown in FIG. 8, the side sheet 233 includes a flap portion 234A and a flap portion 234B that extend outward in the width direction beyond the crotch portion 203 from both longitudinal edges in the front body 202 and the back body 204, respectively. Have. As shown in FIG. 9, the side sheets 233 are provided on each of the width direction sides of the top sheet 231 and the back sheet 232. Furthermore, the side sheet 233 is laminated on the skin facing surface side from the width direction side of the top sheet 231 and the back sheet 232 to the width direction side portion. The side sheet 233 stands up in the direction in which it comes into contact with the wearer's skin by utilizing the contraction of the three-dimensional gather 242 described later.
 サイドシート233は、幅方向側方への液漏れを防ぐため、非透水性をもつ材料で構成されることが好ましい。サイドシート233としては、スパンボンド不織布を用いることができる。また、サイドシート233の一部は、紙おむつ300において最も肌対向面側に配置される(このことから、サイドシート233はトップシート231と同様に「トップシート」とも称される)。このように着用者に対して接触しうるサイドシート233としては、SMS不織布やSMMS(Spunbound Meltblown Meltblown Spunbound)不織布のようにメルトブローン層を含ませることにより、柔軟性を高めたスパンボンド不織布を用いることが好ましい。あるいは、スパンボンド不織布をなす繊維の繊度や目付量が抑えられることにより、柔軟性を向上させたスパンボンド不織布を用いることが好ましい。 The side sheet 233 is preferably made of a water-impermeable material in order to prevent liquid leakage to the side in the width direction. As the side sheet 233, a spunbonded nonwoven fabric can be used. In addition, a part of the side sheet 233 is disposed on the skin-facing surface side in the disposable diaper 300 (for this reason, the side sheet 233 is also referred to as a “top sheet” like the top sheet 231). As the side sheet 233 that can be brought into contact with the wearer, a spunbonded nonwoven fabric having increased flexibility by including a melt blown layer such as an SMS nonwoven fabric or an SMMS (Spunbound Meltblown Meltblown Spunbound) nonwoven fabric is used. Is preferred. Alternatively, it is preferable to use a spunbonded nonwoven fabric having improved flexibility by suppressing the fineness and the basis weight of the fibers constituting the spunbonded nonwoven fabric.
 なお、「繊度」とは、繊維の繊維径(太さ)や断面積に対応するパラメータであり、所定の長さあたりの重量で表される。例えば、一本の繊維について10000mあたりのグラム数(デシテックス)が「繊度」として用いられる。
 また、「目付量」とは、シートの厚みあるいは積層度合いに対応するパラメータであり、単位面積あたりの重量で表される。例えば、一平米あたりのグラム数が「目付量」として用いられる。
The “fineness” is a parameter corresponding to a fiber diameter (thickness) or a cross-sectional area of the fiber, and is represented by a weight per a predetermined length. For example, the number of grams per 10,000 m (decitex) of one fiber is used as “fineness”.
The “weight per unit area” is a parameter corresponding to the thickness or the degree of lamination of the sheet, and is represented by a weight per unit area. For example, the number of grams per square meter is used as the “basis weight”.
<カバーシート>
 カバーシート235は、積層体210を肌非対向面側から被覆するシート状の部材である。カバーシート235は、紙おむつ300でパッチ238を除いて最も肌非対向面側に配置されることで、バックシート232を補強し、バックシート232の手触り(触感)を良好なものとするために用いられる。カバーシート235は、吸収体220、トップシート231、及びバックシート232よりも幅方向寸法が大きく設定され、装着状態で着用者の股下、臀部、腰、腹等のまわりに配置される。図8に示すように、カバーシート235は、前身頃202及び後身頃204において、長手方向の両側縁部から股下部203よりも幅方向外方に延出する、左右一対のフラップ部236A及び左右一対のフラップ部236Bをそれぞれ有している。
<Cover sheet>
The cover sheet 235 is a sheet-like member that covers the laminate 210 from the non-skin-facing surface side. The cover sheet 235 is used to reinforce the back sheet 232 and improve the feel (tactile sensation) of the back sheet 232 by being disposed on the most non-skin-facing side except the patch 238 in the disposable diaper 300. Can be The cover sheet 235 has a larger width dimension than the absorber 220, the top sheet 231, and the back sheet 232, and is arranged around the wearer's inseam, buttocks, hips, waist, belly, and the like in the mounted state. As shown in FIG. 8, the cover sheet 235 includes a pair of left and right flap portions 236 </ b> A and a left and right Each has a pair of flap portions 236B.
 カバーシート235を構成する材料としては、例えば、織布、不織布等を挙げることができる。中でも、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリエステル等の熱可塑性樹脂の不織布、湿式不織布を用いることが好ましい。特には、触感(手触り)を確保するために柔軟性の観点から、カバーシート235としては、スパンボンド不織布を好適に用いることができる。 材料 As a material for forming the cover sheet 235, for example, a woven fabric, a nonwoven fabric, or the like can be given. Among them, it is preferable to use a nonwoven fabric or a wet nonwoven fabric of a thermoplastic resin such as polyethylene, polypropylene, and polyester. In particular, a spun bond nonwoven fabric can be suitably used as the cover sheet 235 from the viewpoint of flexibility in order to secure a tactile sensation (touch).
 カバーシート235は、通常、半透明のシートである。具体的に、カバーシート235は、全光線透過率が、好ましくは65%以上、より好ましくは75%以上であり、好ましくは99%以下、より好ましくは90%以下である。カバーシート235の全光線透過率が上記下限値以上であると、紙おむつ300の非対向面側からカバーシート235を通じて、第二識別部280a,280b、及びデザイン部291,292を視認しやすくなる。また、カバーシート235の全光線透過率が上記上限値以下であると、バックシート232や、第二識別部280a,280b、及びデザイン部291,292が、他の部材との接触や擦れ等から保護されやすくなる。 The cover sheet 235 is usually a translucent sheet. Specifically, the cover sheet 235 has a total light transmittance of preferably 65% or more, more preferably 75% or more, preferably 99% or less, more preferably 90% or less. When the total light transmittance of the cover sheet 235 is equal to or more than the lower limit, the second identification portions 280a and 280b and the design portions 291 and 292 are easily visible through the cover sheet 235 from the non-opposite surface of the disposable diaper 300. When the total light transmittance of the cover sheet 235 is equal to or less than the above upper limit, the back sheet 232, the second identification portions 280a and 280b, and the design portions 291 and 292 may be in contact with or rubbing with other members. It is easier to be protected.
 本明細書において、「全光線透過率」とは、JIS K 7361-1(プラスチック-透明材料の全光線透過率の試験方法-第一部:シングルビーム法)に準拠した測定法により測定された値をいうものとする。カバーシート235が不織布である場合、全光線透過率は、不織布の繊度や目付量、又は酸化チタン等の填料の含有量によって調整することができる。 In the present specification, the “total light transmittance” is measured by a measuring method based on JIS K 7361-1 (Plastic—Testing method for total light transmittance of transparent material—Part 1: Single beam method). Value. When the cover sheet 235 is a nonwoven fabric, the total light transmittance can be adjusted by the fineness and basis weight of the nonwoven fabric, or the content of a filler such as titanium oxide.
 上述のように構成された紙おむつ300では、肌対向面側から肌非対向面側へ向けて、サイドシート233、トップシート231、吸収体220、バックシート232、カバーシート235の順に各部材が積層されている。サイドシート233とカバーシート235とは、ホットメルト接着剤等の公知の接着剤によって貼り合わされる。そして、フラップ部234Aとフラップ部236Aとにより、前方サイドフラップ205が形成される。また、フラップ部234Bとフラップ部236Bとにより、後方サイドフラップ206が形成される。 In the disposable diaper 300 configured as described above, the respective members are laminated in the order of the side sheet 233, the top sheet 231, the absorber 220, the back sheet 232, and the cover sheet 235 from the skin facing surface side to the skin non-facing surface side. Have been. The side sheet 233 and the cover sheet 235 are attached to each other with a known adhesive such as a hot melt adhesive. Then, the front side flap 205 is formed by the flap portion 234A and the flap portion 236A. Further, the rear side flap 206 is formed by the flap portion 234B and the flap portion 236B.
 紙おむつ300の本体部201(図7参照)は、吸収体220をはじめ、シート231~233,235やフラップ部234A,234B,236A,236Bといった前身頃202、股下部203、及び後身頃204に亘って設けられる基本的な部材を有する。なお、パッチ238やテープ260、第二識別部280a,280b、デザイン部291,292は、付加的な構成であり(基本的な部材ではなく)、本体部201に含まれない。 The main body 201 (see FIG. 7) of the disposable diaper 300 extends over the front body 202, the crotch 203, and the back body 204 such as the absorber 220, the sheets 231 to 233, 235 and the flaps 234A, 234B, 236A, 236B. It has a basic member provided. Note that the patch 238, the tape 260, the second identification units 280a and 280b, and the design units 291 and 292 are additional components (not basic members) and are not included in the main unit 201.
〔パッチ〕
 パッチ238は、テープ260と共に止め着け機能を実現するファスニング機構を構成し、テープ260を貼着可能なループ部材である。テープ260及びパッチ238によって、ファスニング機構が構成される。このファスニング機構としては、例えば、少なくともフック部材(雄部材)を有し、このフック部材とループ部材(雌部材)とによって機械的に結合する面状ファスナ(メカニカルファスナ)を用いることができる。フック部材は、表面に鉤状、きのこ状、錨状等の突起が多数形成されているシート状の部材である。また、ループ部材は、表面にループ状の繊維が配置された、又は短繊維で構成された不織布を用いたシート状の部材である。または、ファスニング機構としては、粘着剤や粘着テープを用いることができる。中でも、フック部材とループ部材とを強固に固着させることができるとともに、これらを剥離して繰り返しの使用ができることから、面状ファスナが好ましい。本実施形態では、テープ260がフック部材として機能し、パッチ238がループ部材として機能する場合を例示する。
〔patch〕
The patch 238 constitutes a fastening mechanism that realizes a fastening function together with the tape 260, and is a loop member to which the tape 260 can be attached. The tape 260 and the patch 238 constitute a fastening mechanism. As the fastening mechanism, for example, a planar fastener (mechanical fastener) having at least a hook member (male member) and mechanically coupled by the hook member and a loop member (female member) can be used. The hook member is a sheet-shaped member having a large number of protrusions such as hooks, mushrooms, and anchors formed on the surface. Further, the loop member is a sheet-like member using a non-woven fabric having loop-like fibers disposed on the surface or made of short fibers. Alternatively, an adhesive or an adhesive tape can be used as the fastening mechanism. Among them, a planar fastener is preferable because the hook member and the loop member can be firmly fixed, and they can be peeled off and used repeatedly. In the present embodiment, a case where the tape 260 functions as a hook member and the patch 238 functions as a loop member will be exemplified.
 本実施形態では、カバーシート235において前身頃202の外表面(積層体210の最も肌非対向面側)にフロントパッチ(以下、「パッチ」と略称する)238が取り付けられている。パッチ238としては、例えば、ポリプロピレン、ポリエチレン、ポリエステル、ナイロン等の熱可塑性樹脂の繊維を用いた不織布が用いられる。 In the present embodiment, a front patch (hereinafter abbreviated as “patch”) 238 is attached to the outer surface of the front body 202 of the cover sheet 235 (the non-skin-facing surface of the laminate 210). As the patch 238, for example, a nonwoven fabric using fibers of a thermoplastic resin such as polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, and nylon is used.
〔テープ〕
 テープ260は、パッチ238と共にファスニング機構を構成し、パッチ238に貼着可能なフック部材を有している。テープ260は、前方サイドフラップ205及び後方サイドフラップ206のうち少なくとも一方において、幅方向外方に突出するように取り付けられる。本実施形態では、後方サイドフラップ206にテープ260が設けられる場合を例示する。股下部203を中心として前身頃202と後身頃204とが対向するようにして肌対向面側に紙おむつ300を折り曲げた際に、テープ260が幅方向外方に引っ張られてパッチ238に止め着けられる。そしてこの状態で、紙おむつ300が着用者に装着される。
〔tape〕
The tape 260 forms a fastening mechanism together with the patch 238 and has a hook member that can be attached to the patch 238. The tape 260 is attached to at least one of the front side flap 205 and the rear side flap 206 so as to protrude outward in the width direction. In the present embodiment, a case where the tape 260 is provided on the rear side flap 206 is exemplified. When the disposable diaper 300 is bent toward the skin-facing surface with the front body 202 and the back body 204 facing each other with the crotch 203 as the center, the tape 260 is pulled outward in the width direction and is fixed to the patch 238. . Then, in this state, the disposable diaper 300 is worn on the wearer.
 図7,図8に示すように、テープ260は、後方サイドフラップ206に固定されると共に、後方サイドフラップ206から外方に延出して設けられるシート状の止着部261を有している。さらに、止着部261の一主面に、前身頃202と後身頃204とを固定するためのフック部材である係止部材264が設けられている。止着部261は、係止部材264及びパッチ238を介して、前身頃202と後身頃204とを止め着けることができる。 As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the tape 260 is fixed to the rear side flap 206 and has a sheet-like fastening portion 261 extending outward from the rear side flap 206. Further, a locking member 264 serving as a hook member for fixing the front body 202 and the back body 204 is provided on one main surface of the fastening portion 261. The fastening portion 261 can stop the front body 202 and the rear body 204 via the locking member 264 and the patch 238.
 止着部261は、幅方向内側の基部262と、基部262から幅方向外方に突出する突出部263とを有している。基部262は、フラップ部234Bとフラップ部236Bとの間に狭装されることで、後方サイドフラップ206に固定されている。突出部263は、サイドシート233及びカバーシート235よりも幅方向外側に突出して、外部に露出した状態で設けられている。そして、突出部263の肌対向面側に、係止部材264が設けられている。 The fastening part 261 has a base part 262 on the inner side in the width direction, and a protruding part 263 protruding outward from the base part 262 in the width direction. The base portion 262 is fixed to the rear side flap 206 by being narrowed between the flap portions 234B and 236B. The protruding portion 263 protrudes outward in the width direction from the side sheet 233 and the cover sheet 235 and is provided in a state of being exposed to the outside. A locking member 264 is provided on the side of the protruding portion 263 facing the skin.
 テープ260の止着部261を構成する材料としては、例えば、織布、不織布、樹脂フィルム、紙等を用いることができる。織布、不織布、又は樹脂フィルムを構成する素材としては、例えば、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリアミド、ポリエステル、ポリ塩化ビニル、ポリスチレン等の熱可塑性樹脂を用いることができる。 材料 As a material of the fastening portion 261 of the tape 260, for example, a woven fabric, a nonwoven fabric, a resin film, paper, or the like can be used. As a material constituting the woven fabric, the nonwoven fabric, or the resin film, for example, a thermoplastic resin such as polyethylene, polypropylene, polyamide, polyester, polyvinyl chloride, and polystyrene can be used.
〔ギャザー〕
 紙おむつ300には、装着状態における着用者への追従性を高めるため、レッグギャザー241、立体ギャザー242、ウエストギャザー243等のギャザー240が設けられている。ギャザー240は、ゴムやポリウレタン、伸縮フィルムといった伸縮性をもつ部材(伸縮性部材)を伸張状態で不織布などのシートの間に挟んで、ホットメルト、ヒートシール、超音波溶着等で固定することによって伸縮性をもたせたシート複合体から構成される。このシート複合体は、伸縮性部材が伸張状態からもと(自然長の状態)に戻ろうとする力(復元力、弾性力)でシートに細かな皺が寄った状態となる。ここでは、伸縮性部材として糸状のゴム部材(以下、「糸ゴム」と略称する)250を例示する。
〔gather〕
The disposable diaper 300 is provided with gathers 240 such as leg gathers 241, three-dimensional gathers 242, and waist gathers 243 in order to enhance the ability to follow the wearer in the worn state. The gathers 240 are formed by sandwiching a stretchable member (stretchable member) such as rubber, polyurethane, or a stretch film between stretched sheets of nonwoven fabric or the like, and fixing the stretchable member by hot melt, heat sealing, ultrasonic welding, or the like. It is composed of an elastic sheet composite. The sheet composite is in a state in which the sheet has fine wrinkles due to the force (restoring force, elastic force) of the elastic member returning from the stretched state to the original state (natural length state). Here, a thread-like rubber member (hereinafter, abbreviated as “thread rubber”) 250 is exemplified as the elastic member.
 この紙おむつ300には、糸ゴム250で形成されるギャザー240として、三種の糸ゴム251,252,253で伸縮性が付与された三種のギャザー241,242,243を例示する。一つは、バックシート232の幅方向外側端縁部、サイドシート233、及びカバーシート235が、第一糸ゴム251で皺寄せされたレッグギャザー241である。もう一つは、サイドシート233の幅方向内側端縁部が第二糸ゴム252で皺寄せられた立体ギャザー242である。さらにもう一つは、トップシート231、バックシート232、サイドシート233、及びカバーシート235の長手方向背側端縁部が、第三糸ゴム253で皺寄せられたウエストギャザー243である。 In the disposable diaper 300, as the gathers 240 formed by the thread rubber 250, three kinds of gathers 241, 242, 243 provided with elasticity by three kinds of thread rubbers 251, 252, 253 are exemplified. One is a leg gather 241 in which the widthwise outer edge of the back sheet 232, the side sheet 233, and the cover sheet 235 are wrinkled by the first thread rubber 251. The other is a three-dimensional gather 242 in which the widthwise inner edge of the side sheet 233 is wrinkled by the second thread rubber 252. The other is a waist gather 243 in which the longitudinally rear edges of the top sheet 231, the back sheet 232, the side sheet 233, and the cover sheet 235 are wrinkled by the third thread rubber 253.
 レッグギャザー241は、着用者の脚部に対する追従を高めて紙おむつ300との隙間を抑えるために設けられる。図7に示すように、レッグギャザー241は、装着状態において着用者の脚部周縁となる箇所に設けられる。図7,図8に示すように、レッグギャザー241では、股下部203及びその周辺において、バックシート232の幅方向外側の端縁であって、長手方向に沿って第一糸ゴム251が設けられている。また、図9に示すように、第一糸ゴム251は、サイドシート233とカバーシート235との間に介装されている。 The ギ ャ leg gathers 241 are provided in order to increase the follow-up of the wearer's legs and suppress the gap with the disposable diaper 300. As shown in FIG. 7, the leg gathers 241 are provided at locations where the legs become peripheral edges of the wearer in the mounted state. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, in the leg gather 241, the first thread rubber 251 is provided along the longitudinal direction at the outer edge in the width direction of the back sheet 232 in the crotch portion 203 and the periphery thereof. ing. As shown in FIG. 9, the first thread rubber 251 is interposed between the side sheet 233 and the cover sheet 235.
 立体ギャザー242は、排泄箇所の周縁で着用者に対する追従性を高めることにより、排泄物の幅方向側方への漏れを防ぐために設けられる。図7に示すように、立体ギャザー242は、サイドシート233の幅方向内側に配備される。図7,図8に示すように、立体ギャザー242では、サイドシート233の幅方向内側の端縁で長手方向に沿って第二糸ゴム252が設けられている。また、図9に示すように、立体ギャザー242では、サイドシート233の幅方向内側の端縁部に位置するシート部233A,233Bが折り曲げられて重ねられる。これらのシート部233A,233Bによって、長手方向に延在する第二糸ゴム252が囲まれている。 The three-dimensional gathers 242 are provided in order to prevent the excrement from leaking laterally in the width direction by improving the followability to the wearer at the periphery of the excretion point. As shown in FIG. 7, the three-dimensional gathers 242 are arranged inside the side sheets 233 in the width direction. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, in the three-dimensional gather 242, the second thread rubber 252 is provided along the longitudinal direction at the widthwise inner edge of the side sheet 233. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, in the three-dimensional gather 242, the sheet portions 233 </ b> A and 233 </ b> B located at the inner edge in the width direction of the side sheet 233 are folded and overlapped. The second thread rubber 252 extending in the longitudinal direction is surrounded by these sheet portions 233A and 233B.
 ウエストギャザー243は、着用者の臀部や下腹部に対する追従性を高めるために設けられる。詳細に言えば、ウエストギャザー243では、幅方向に延びる複数の第三糸ゴム253が、伸張状態で、一組の非伸縮性の基材シートに狭装された伸縮シート254が用いられる。図7,図8に示すように、この伸縮シート254が、トップシート231とカバーシート235との間において、長手方向背側端縁部に介装されている。 The waist gather 243 is provided to enhance the ability to follow the buttocks and lower abdomen of the wearer. More specifically, in the waist gather 243, a stretchable sheet 254 in which a plurality of third thread rubbers 253 extending in the width direction are stretched and narrowly mounted on a set of non-stretchable base sheets is used. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the elastic sheet 254 is interposed between the top sheet 231 and the cover sheet 235 at the longitudinally rear edge.
[1-2.詳細構成]
 次に、紙おむつ300の詳細な構成を述べる。
[1-2. Detailed configuration]
Next, a detailed configuration of the disposable diaper 300 will be described.
〔第二識別部〕
 図7,図8に示すように、紙おむつ300には、股下部203において長手方向の中央位置且つ幅方向の左右対称位置に、肌非対向面側から視覚的に識別可能な一対の第二識別部280a,280bがそれぞれ設けられている。ここでは、バックシート232に印刷された第二識別部280a,280bを例示する。なお、本明細書においては、第二識別部280a,280bを特に区別しない場合には、「第二識別部280」として符合を付して説明する場合がある。図10に示すように、第二識別部280は、バックシート232及び紙おむつ300の長手方向中央位置を認識させるためのマーカーとして機能する。さらに、第二識別部280は、第二識別部280を中心にして紙おむつ300を長手方向に折り曲げるようにして装着することで、第二識別部280が紙おむつ300の最下部に位置して、この最下部から長手方向両端までのそれぞれの長さが略同一となることを利用者に認識させるためのマーカーとして機能する。なお、本明細書において最下部とは、重力の作用方向を下方として、紙おむつ300の着用者が直立した場合に、紙おむつ300の中で最も下方に位置する部分をいう。また、第二識別部280は、長尺のシートから複数のバックシート232を切り出して製造する際に、シートの切断位置を制御するためのマーカーとしても機能する。
(Second identification unit)
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the disposable diaper 300 includes a pair of second identifications that can be visually identified from the non-skin-facing surface side at a central position in the longitudinal direction and a symmetrical position in the width direction in the crotch 203. Parts 280a and 280b are provided, respectively. Here, the second identification units 280a and 280b printed on the back sheet 232 are illustrated. In the present specification, when the second identification units 280a and 280b are not particularly distinguished from each other, they may be described with “2nd identification unit 280” with reference numerals. As shown in FIG. 10, the second identification unit 280 functions as a marker for recognizing the longitudinal center positions of the backsheet 232 and the disposable diaper 300. Further, the second identification unit 280 is attached by bending the paper diaper 300 in the longitudinal direction around the second identification unit 280, so that the second identification unit 280 is located at the lowermost part of the paper diaper 300. It functions as a marker for allowing the user to recognize that the lengths from the bottom to both ends in the longitudinal direction are substantially the same. In the present specification, the lowermost portion refers to a portion located at the lowest position in the disposable diaper 300 when the wearer of the disposable diaper 300 stands upright with the direction of gravity acting downward. The second identification unit 280 also functions as a marker for controlling the cutting position of the sheet when a plurality of back sheets 232 are cut out from a long sheet and manufactured.
 第二識別部280は、第二識別部280以外の部分と視覚的に識別可能なものであれば特に限定されないが、通常、バックシート232とは異なる色を有している。ここでは、バックシート232を含む本体部201が全域に亘って実質的に同じ白色(色彩)である。そのため、第二識別部280の色は特に限定されないが、本体部201が全域に亘って実質的に同じ白色(色彩)であることから白色以外が好ましく、例えば、赤色、橙色、黄色、緑色、空色、青色、紫色、灰色、黒色等である。そして、第二識別部280は、このような他の部分とは異なる色による、文字、図形、記号、或いは模様、又はこれらの組み合わせを有していてもよい。本実施形態では、図7,図10に示すように、第二識別部280は、長円形の図形として設けられている。 The second identification unit 280 is not particularly limited as long as it is visually distinguishable from a portion other than the second identification unit 280, but usually has a color different from that of the back sheet 232. Here, the main body 201 including the back sheet 232 is substantially the same white (color) over the entire area. Therefore, the color of the second identification unit 280 is not particularly limited, but is preferably other than white because the main body 201 is substantially the same white (color) over the entire area. For example, red, orange, yellow, green, Light blue, blue, purple, gray, black, etc. The second identification unit 280 may have a character, a graphic, a symbol, a pattern, or a combination thereof in a color different from those of the other parts. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 10, the second identification unit 280 is provided as an oval figure.
 なお、第二実施形態において、「実質的に同じ色彩」とは、色差が好ましくは1.0未満であることを意味する。「異なる色彩」とは、色差が好ましくは1.5以上、より好ましくは3.0以上であることを意味する。ここでいう「色差」は、市販の測色器を用いて測色を行い、JIS Z 8729等に規定されるCIE1976(L)色空間に基づいて数値化した値を比較することによって求めることができる。具体的には、測定対象たる2点間のL値の差がΔL、a値の差がΔa、b値の差がΔbであるときに、色差ΔEab=[(ΔL+(Δa+(Δb1/2によって求められる。この色差ΔEabが好ましくは1.5以上、より好ましくは3.0以上である場合に、利用者が目視により感知し得る程度に色彩が異なるといえ、好ましくは1.0未満である場合に利用者が目視により感知し得ない程度に色彩が実質的に同じといえる。 In the second embodiment, “substantially the same color” means that the color difference is preferably less than 1.0. "Different colors" means that the color difference is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more. The term "color difference" used herein refers to a method of measuring color using a commercially available colorimeter and comparing values quantified based on a CIE1976 (L * a * b * ) color space defined in JIS Z 8729 or the like. Can be obtained by: Specifically, when the difference in L * value between two points to be measured is ΔL * , the difference in a * value is Δa * , and the difference in b * value is Δb * , the color difference ΔE * ab = [( ΔL * ) 2 + (Δa * ) 2 + (Δb * ) 2 ] 1/2 . When the color difference ΔE * ab is preferably 1.5 or more, more preferably 3.0 or more, it can be said that the colors are different enough to be visually perceivable by the user, and preferably less than 1.0. It can be said that the colors are substantially the same to the extent that the user cannot visually recognize them.
 第二識別部280は、例えば、所望の色のインクを活版印刷、グラビア印刷、フレキソ印刷、オフセット印刷、スクリーン印刷、インクジェット印刷等の印刷方法による印刷によって形成することができる。インクは、水性であっても油性であってもよいが、通常、油性のインクが用いられる。インクは、色材として公知の染料又は顔料、及び溶剤や界面活性剤等を含有する。また、インクは、蛍光材料や蓄光材料を含有していてもよい。 The second identification unit 280 can be formed, for example, by printing ink of a desired color by a printing method such as letterpress printing, gravure printing, flexographic printing, offset printing, screen printing, or inkjet printing. The ink may be water-based or oil-based, but usually oil-based ink is used. The ink contains a known dye or pigment as a coloring material, a solvent, a surfactant, and the like. Further, the ink may contain a fluorescent material or a phosphorescent material.
 この第二識別部280は、バックシート232の肌非対向面側に設けられている。これにより、第二識別部280は、積層体210の肌非対向面側の最外層に設けられている。そして、紙おむつ300の肌非対向面側に位置して、装着時にはカバーシート235を介して紙おむつ300の外側に向けられている。 第二 The second identification portion 280 is provided on the non-skin-facing surface side of the back sheet 232. Thereby, the second identification unit 280 is provided on the outermost layer on the non-skin-facing surface side of the laminate 210. The diaper 300 is located on the non-skin-facing surface side of the diaper 300 and is directed to the outside of the diaper 300 via the cover sheet 235 at the time of mounting.
 第二識別部280は、紙おむつ300の幅方向外側の端縁である、側縁部232Aに設けられている。図10に示すように、レッグギャザー241が設けられることで、紙おむつ300が装着されている場合には、股下部203において幅方向外側の端縁が第一糸ゴム251で皺寄せされて、側縁部232Aが中央部よりも上方に持ち上げられる。これにより、紙おむつ300を下方又は斜め下方から看取した場合にはもちろん、側方から看取した場合にも、第二識別部280を視覚的に識別することができるようになっている。 The second identification portion 280 is provided on a side edge portion 232 </ b> A that is an outer edge in the width direction of the disposable diaper 300. As shown in FIG. 10, by providing the leg gathers 241, when the paper diaper 300 is mounted, the outer edge in the width direction of the crotch part 203 is creased by the first thread rubber 251, and the side edge The portion 232A is lifted above the center. Thus, the second identification unit 280 can be visually identified not only when the diaper 300 is viewed from below or obliquely below but also when viewed from the side.
〔デザイン部〕
 デザイン部291,292は、肌非対向面側から外観可能に設けられ、例えば、文字、図形、記号、或いは模様、又はこれらの組み合わせを有している。文字としては、例えば、ひらがな、カタカナ、漢字、アルファベット等が挙げられる。文字は、一字だけであってもよく、複数の文字から構成される単語であってもよく、複数の単語を繋げて構成される文であってもよい。また、図形の例としては、例えば、円形、三角形、四角形、星型、その他多角形や、立体を平面に図示したもの等が挙げられる。また、記号の例としては、例えば、地図記号、天気記号、数学記号、ピクトグラム等が挙げられる。模様の例としては、例えば、人、動物、植物、及びキャラクタ、又はこれらを図案化したものが挙げられる。デザイン部291,292は、文字、図形、記号、模様を単独、又は複数を表示することができ、複数を繰り返し配列して表示することができる。また、デザイン部291,292は、文字、図形、記号、模様を重複して表示することができ、例えば図形を背景にして、さらに文字、図形、記号、模様等を表示することができる。なお、デザイン部291,292は、それぞれ同じ文字、図形、記号、模様等を有していても良く、異なる同じ文字、図形、記号、模様等を有していても良い。デザイン部291,292は、紙おむつ300に設けられることで、紙おむつ300の着用者又は着用者に装着させる者などの利用者の興味を引いたり、又は楽しませたり、喜ばせたりすることができる。また、デザイン部291,292は、紙おむつ300を装着する際の位置あわせに利用される。デザイン部291,292は、第二識別部280と同様に、印刷によって形成することができる。
[Design Department]
The design portions 291 and 292 are provided so as to be able to be viewed from the non-skin-facing surface side, and have, for example, characters, figures, symbols, patterns, or a combination thereof. Examples of the characters include hiragana, katakana, kanji, and the alphabet. The character may be a single character, a word composed of a plurality of characters, or a sentence composed of a plurality of words connected. Examples of figures include, for example, circles, triangles, squares, stars, other polygons, and figures in which a solid is illustrated on a plane. Examples of symbols include, for example, map symbols, weather symbols, mathematical symbols, pictograms, and the like. Examples of patterns include, for example, people, animals, plants, and characters, or patterns of these. The design units 291 and 292 can display a single character or a plurality of characters, graphics, symbols, and patterns, and can repeatedly display a plurality of them. In addition, the design units 291 and 292 can display characters, figures, symbols, and patterns in an overlapping manner. For example, with the figure as a background, the design units 291 and 292 can further display characters, figures, symbols, and patterns. The design units 291 and 292 may have the same characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like, or may have different same characters, figures, symbols, patterns, and the like. By providing the design units 291 and 292 on the disposable diaper 300, it is possible to attract, entertain, and delight a user such as a wearer of the disposable diaper 300 or a person who wears the disposable diaper 300. The design units 291 and 292 are used for positioning when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted. The design units 291 and 292 can be formed by printing, like the second identification unit 280.
 デザイン部291,292は、図7,図10に示すように、前身頃202の前デザイン部291(第一デザイン部)と後身頃204の後デザイン部292(第二デザイン部)とが設けられて、所定の範囲を占める輪郭形状を有している。前身頃202及び後身頃204においてデザイン部291,292の占める範囲の割合は特に限定されないが、好ましくは20%以上、より好ましくは40%以上、さらに好ましくは60%以上、特に好ましくは70%以上である。上限は特に限定されないが、好ましくは100%以下、より好ましくは90%以下、さらに好ましくは80%以下である。デザイン部291,292の占める範囲の割合が上記下限以上であると、視認性が増し、デザイン部291,292を看取する者により強い印象を与えることができる。また、デザイン部291,292の形状を把握しやすくなり、デザイン部291,292を利用した紙おむつ300の位置あわせをしやすくなる。 As shown in FIGS. 7 and 10, the design units 291 and 292 are provided with a front design unit 291 (first design unit) of the front body 202 and a rear design unit 292 (second design unit) of the back body 204. And has a contour shape occupying a predetermined range. The proportion of the range occupied by the design portions 291 and 292 in the front body 202 and the back body 204 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 20% or more, more preferably 40% or more, further preferably 60% or more, and particularly preferably 70% or more. It is. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100% or less, more preferably 90% or less, and further preferably 80% or less. When the ratio of the range occupied by the design units 291 and 292 is equal to or more than the lower limit, visibility is increased, and a stronger impression can be given to a person who views the design units 291 and 292. Further, the shapes of the design units 291 and 292 can be easily grasped, and the positioning of the disposable diaper 300 using the design units 291 and 292 can be easily performed.
 デザイン部291,292は、長手方向の長さに対して幅方向の長さの方が長いことが好ましい。具体的に、デザイン部291,292は、長手方向の長さに対する幅方向の長さが、好ましくは105%以上、より好ましくは110%以上、さらに好ましくは120%以上、特に好ましくは140%以上である。上限は特に限定されないが、好ましくは400%以下、より好ましくは300%以下、さらに好ましくは200%以下である。デザイン部291,292の長手方向の長さに対する幅方向の長さが上記下限以上であると、デザイン部291,292が幅広くなることで、デザイン部291,292を互いに見比べてそれらの位置の比較を行うことが容易になる。したがって、紙おむつ300を装着する際に、デザイン部291,292の互いの高さが略一致するように揃えやすくなる。なお、本明細書において、デザイン部291,292の長手方向の長さとは、デザイン部291,292それぞれにおいて長手方向で最も離れた2点の間の長手方向の長さをいう。デザイン部291,292の幅方向の長さとは、デザイン部291,292それぞれにおいて幅方向で最も離れた2点の間の幅方向の長さをいう。 It is preferable that the length of the design portions 291 and 292 in the width direction is longer than the length in the longitudinal direction. Specifically, the design portions 291 and 292 preferably have a length in the width direction with respect to the length in the longitudinal direction of preferably 105% or more, more preferably 110% or more, further preferably 120% or more, and particularly preferably 140% or more. It is. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 400% or less, more preferably 300% or less, and further preferably 200% or less. If the length in the width direction with respect to the length in the longitudinal direction of the design portions 291 and 292 is equal to or larger than the lower limit, the design portions 291 and 292 are widened, and the design portions 291 and 292 are compared with each other to compare their positions. Is easier to do. Therefore, when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted, it is easy to align the design portions 291 and 292 such that the heights of the design portions 291 and 292 substantially match each other. In this specification, the length in the longitudinal direction of the design portions 291 and 292 refers to the length in the longitudinal direction between the two furthest points in the longitudinal direction in each of the design portions 291 and 292. The length in the width direction of the design portions 291 and 292 refers to the length in the width direction between the two furthest points in the width direction in each of the design portions 291 and 292.
 デザイン部291,292は、紙おむつ300の長手方向の腹側端部232Bから前デザイン部291の股下部203側の末端部291A(第二股下端縁)までの長さL31(第二股下離間寸法)と、長手方向の背側端部232Cから後デザイン部292の股下部203側の末端部292A(第一股下端縁)までの長さL32(第一股下離間寸法)が、互いに同一又は略同一に配置されている。ここでの末端部291A,292Aとは、デザイン部291,292のうち、股下部203側に最も突出した部位をいう。 The design portions 291 and 292 have a length L 31 from the longitudinal abdominal end 232B of the disposable diaper 300 to the distal end 291A (second crotch lower edge) of the front design portion 291 on the crotch 203 side (second crotch separation). Dimension) and the length L 32 (first crotch separation dimension) from the longitudinal back end 232C to the end 292A (first crotch lower edge) of the rear design portion 292 on the crotch 203 side are the same. Or, they are arranged almost identically. Here, the end portions 291A and 292A are portions of the design portions 291 and 292 that protrude most toward the crotch portion 203 side.
 また、デザイン部291,292は、紙おむつ300の長手方向の腹側端部232Bから前デザイン部291の股下部203とは反対側の末端部291B(第二前後端縁)までの長さL21(第二前後離間寸法)と、長手方向の背側端部232Cから後デザイン部292の股下部203とは反対側の末端部292B(第一前後端縁)までの長さL22(第一前後離間寸法)が、互いに同一又は略同一に配置されている。 Further, the design portions 291 and 292 have a length L 21 from the longitudinal abdominal end portion 232B of the disposable diaper 300 to the terminal end portion 291B (second front and rear end edge) of the front design portion 291 opposite to the crotch portion 203. (Second front-rear separation dimension) and a length L 22 (first front-rear end edge) from the rear end 232C in the longitudinal direction to the end 292B (first front-rear edge) on the opposite side of the crotch 203 of the rear design portion 292. Front-rear separation dimensions) are the same or substantially the same.
 上記のように、前デザイン部291の長手方向寸法(L31-L21)と後デザイン部292の長手方向寸法(L32-L22)とが同一又は略同一に設定されている。
 本明細書において、長さが略同一とは、一方の長さに対する他方の長さが、好ましくは±15%の範囲内、より好ましくは±10%の範囲内、さらに好ましくは±5%の範囲内にあることをいう。
As described above, the longitudinal dimension (L 31 -L 21 ) of the front design part 291 and the longitudinal dimension (L 32 -L 22 ) of the rear design part 292 are set to be the same or substantially the same.
In the present specification, substantially the same length means that the length of one side relative to the other side is preferably within a range of ± 15%, more preferably within a range of ± 10%, and still more preferably ± 5%. It is within the range.
 デザイン部291,292は、股下部203側の末端部291A,292Aが、紙おむつ300の長手方向端部232B,232Cとそれぞれ略平行な形状の端縁(幅方向に沿う端縁)である。ここで、通常、長手方向端部232B,232Cは直線状であって、紙おむつ300及びバックシート232の幅方向に対して平行に形成されている。末端部291A,292Aと長手方向端部232B,232Cとがそれぞれ略平行な関係となるように、末端部291A,292Aは、直線状又は曲線状に形成されていることが好ましい。また、末端部291A,292Aが曲線状に形成されている場合には、図7に示すように、末端部291A,292Aの中央部が両端部よりも股下部203側に延長されて膨出した、左右対称の形状となっていることが好ましい。本明細書において、末端部291A,292Aが長手方向端部232B,232Cとそれぞれ略平行とは、末端部291A,292Aの最も股下部203側に凸出した部位における接線の垂線と、長手方向端部232B,232Cの端辺とのなす角度が、好ましくは90°±20°の範囲内、より好ましくは90°±10°の範囲、さらに好ましくは90°±5°の範囲にあることをいう。ただし、末端部291A,292Aの形状が直線状の形状の場合には、末端部291A,292Aを形成する直線のなす角度は90°となる。 The design portions 291 and 292 are edges (edges along the width direction) of which the end portions 291A and 292A on the crotch portion 203 side are substantially parallel to the longitudinal ends 232B and 232C of the paper diaper 300, respectively. Here, the longitudinal ends 232 </ b> B and 232 </ b> C are generally linear, and are formed parallel to the width direction of the paper diaper 300 and the backsheet 232. The end portions 291A, 292A are preferably formed in a linear or curved shape such that the end portions 291A, 292A and the longitudinal ends 232B, 232C have a substantially parallel relationship. When the end portions 291A and 292A are formed in a curved shape, as shown in FIG. 7, the central portions of the end portions 291A and 292A extend toward the crotch portion 203 side from the both end portions and bulge. It is preferable that the shape is symmetrical. In the present specification, the end portions 291A and 292A are substantially parallel to the longitudinal ends 232B and 232C, respectively. The angle between the edge of each of the portions 232B and 232C is preferably in a range of 90 ° ± 20 °, more preferably in a range of 90 ° ± 10 °, and further preferably in a range of 90 ° ± 5 °. . However, when the shapes of the end portions 291A and 292A are linear, the angle between the straight lines forming the end portions 291A and 292A is 90 °.
 本実施形態のデザイン部291,292は、外観が互いに同一又は類似する。ここでいう「外観が互いに同一又は類似するデザイン部291,292」には、下記に例を列挙する態様1~4の少なくとも何れかが含まれる。
  ・態様1:色彩又は模様が同一又は類似するデザイン部291,292
  ・態様2:模様の配置が同一又は類似するデザイン部291,292
  ・態様3:幅方向寸法が同一又は略同一のデザイン部291,292
  ・態様4:長手方向寸法が同一又は略同一のデザイン部291,292
 例えば、長手方向に線対称又は略線対称な外観のデザイン部291,292が設けられる。
The appearance of the design units 291 and 292 of the present embodiment is the same or similar to each other. The “ design portions 291 and 292 having the same or similar appearance” here include at least one of modes 1 to 4 listed below.
-Aspect 1: Design parts 291 and 292 with the same or similar color or pattern
-Aspect 2: Design parts 291 and 292 with the same or similar pattern arrangement
-Aspect 3: Design portions 291 and 292 having the same or substantially the same width dimension.
Aspect 4: Design portions 291 and 292 having the same or substantially the same longitudinal dimension
For example, design portions 291 and 292 having an external appearance that is line-symmetric or substantially line-symmetric in the longitudinal direction are provided.
 そのほか、紙おむつ300は、折り畳まれた状態で出荷される。具体的には、吸収体220の幅方向における両端部において幅方向に直交して長手方向へ仮想的に延びる一対の仮想線VL5,VL6(折曲線)により、肌面側を内側にして、仮想線VL5,VL6よりも幅方向外側の部分が折り返される。このように折り畳まれた状態を「折畳状態」と称する。折畳状態の紙おむつ300では、一対の仮想線VL5,VL6よりも幅方向外側の第一面が、一対の仮想線VL5,VL6よりも幅方向内側の第二面に対して対面して重ね合わせられる。
 つまり、製品出荷時に折畳状態の紙おむつ300を使用する際に、利用者は、仮想線VL5,VL6による折り畳みを長手方向に展開し、その後、紙おむつ300を着用者に装着する。このように紙おむつ300が平面状に展開された状態を「展開状態」と称する。
In addition, the disposable diaper 300 is shipped in a folded state. More specifically, a pair of virtual lines VL5 and VL6 (bent curves) virtually extending in the longitudinal direction orthogonal to the width direction at both ends in the width direction of the absorber 220, with the skin surface side inside and virtual A portion outside the line VL5 and VL6 in the width direction is folded back. The state folded in this manner is referred to as a “folded state”. In the folded diaper 300, the first surface in the width direction outside the pair of virtual lines VL5 and VL6 faces and overlaps the second surface in the width direction inside the pair of virtual lines VL5 and VL6. Can be
That is, when using the folded paper diaper 300 at the time of product shipment, the user expands the folding by the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the longitudinal direction, and then wears the paper diaper 300 on the wearer. The state in which the disposable diaper 300 is unfolded in a planar manner in this manner is referred to as an “unfolded state”.
 本実施形態の紙おむつ300は、上記の仮想線VL5,VL6よりも幅方向外側に第二識別部280が配置されている。なお、ここでいう「仮想線VL5,VL6よりも幅方向外側」とは、第二識別部280の少なくとも一部が仮想線VL5,VL6よりも幅方向外側に位置することを意味する。そのため、第二識別部280は、その全体が仮想線VL5,VL6よりも幅方向外側に配置されてもよいし、仮想線VL5,VL6を幅方向に跨いで延在していてもよい。 紙 In the disposable diaper 300 of the present embodiment, the second identification unit 280 is arranged outside the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction. Note that “outside the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction” here means that at least a part of the second identification unit 280 is located outside the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction. Therefore, the whole of the second identification unit 280 may be disposed outside the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction, or may extend across the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction.
[2.作用及び効果]
 本実施形態の紙おむつ300は、上述したように構成されるため、下記のような作用及び効果を得ることができる。
[2. Action and effect]
Since the disposable diaper 300 of the present embodiment is configured as described above, the following operations and effects can be obtained.
 従来、紙おむつに設けられた模様は、主に着用者や利用者の感情に訴えるものであって、機能的な役割を果たすにはものではなかった。また、シートに設けられる切断位置を制御するためのマーカーも、その目的のために設けられていた。 Conventionally, patterns provided on disposable diapers appeal mainly to the emotions of the wearer and user, and do not serve a functional role. Further, a marker for controlling the cutting position provided on the sheet has been provided for that purpose.
 ところで、紙おむつは着用者の身体に合わせてフィットするように取り付けない場合には、排泄物の漏れが生じることがある。例えば、パンツ型の紙おむつでは、前身頃と後身頃とが連接されて、着用者の腰周りが周状に連続して構成されて位置決めされていることで、比較的に位置あわせが容易となる。しかしながら、テープ型の紙おむつは、係止部材によって前身頃と後身頃とが取り外し可能に固定されるため、前身頃又は後身頃の一方が腹側又は背側に偏って、他方よりも大きく引き出されてずれた状態で紙おむつが装着されることがあった。このとき、吸収体や紙おむつが着用者にフィットしなくなり、排泄物の漏れが生じることがあった。また、テープ型の紙おむつは、前身頃と後身頃との位置が合っていたとしても、股下部の位置がずれることで、吸収体や紙おむつが着用者にフィットしなくなり、排泄物の漏れが生じることがあった。このように、装着時にずれを防いで適切な位置に紙おむつの位置あわせをすることが必要であり、着用者の身体にフィットするように紙おむつを装着することが求められていた。特には、前身頃と後身頃とに同様なデザインが施されて、前後の見分けがつけづらい紙おむつでは、上述したような装着時のずれと、排泄物の漏れが生じやすかった。 By the way, if the disposable diaper is not attached so as to fit the wearer's body, excrement may leak. For example, in a pants-type disposable diaper, the front body and the back body are connected, and the waist circumference of the wearer is configured and positioned continuously in a circumferential shape, so that the positioning is relatively easily performed. . However, the tape-type disposable diaper has a front body and a back body that are detachably fixed by a locking member, so that one of the front body or the back body is biased toward the abdomen or the back, and is drawn out more than the other. A disposable diaper was sometimes worn in a misaligned state. At this time, the absorbent or the disposable diaper may not fit the wearer, and the excrement may leak. In addition, even if the front body and the back body of the tape-type disposable diaper are aligned, the position of the crotch is displaced, so that the absorbent body and the disposable diaper do not fit the wearer, resulting in leakage of excrement. There was something. As described above, it is necessary to position the disposable diaper at an appropriate position while preventing displacement at the time of attachment, and it has been required to attach the disposable diaper so as to fit the wearer's body. In particular, in a disposable diaper in which the front body and the back body have the same design and are difficult to distinguish between the front and the back, the above-described displacement at the time of wearing and the leakage of excrement are likely to occur.
 紙おむつ300では、バックシート232の股下部203において長手方向の中央位置に一対の第二識別部280が設けられている。これにより、紙おむつ300を装着する際に、第二識別部280によって、紙おむつ300の長手方向の中央位置を確認することができる。また、第二識別部280が最下部となるようにしながら、第二識別部280を中心にして紙おむつ300を長手方向に折り曲げるようにして装着することで、紙おむつ300を折り曲げた中心位置から長手方向両端部それぞれまでの長さが略等しくなる。このように、第二識別部280を利用することで、股下部203が腹側又は背側のいずれか一方に偏るようにしてずれて取り付けられることを防ぎ、適切な位置に紙おむつ300の位置あわせをすることができる。また、第二識別部280は幅方向の左右対称位置に設けられていることで、幅方向にもバランスが取れるようにして適切な位置に紙おむつ300の位置あわせをすることができる。 In the disposable diaper 300, a pair of second identification portions 280 are provided at the central portion in the longitudinal direction in the crotch portion 203 of the back sheet 232. Thus, when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted, the center position in the longitudinal direction of the disposable diaper 300 can be confirmed by the second identification unit 280. In addition, by attaching the disposable diaper 300 so as to bend in the longitudinal direction around the second identifying portion 280 while the second identifying portion 280 is at the lowermost position, the disposable diaper 300 is bent from the center position in the longitudinal direction. The lengths to both ends are substantially equal. As described above, by using the second identification unit 280, the crotch part 203 is prevented from being attached to the abdominal side or the back side so as to be deviated to one side, and the disposable diaper 300 is positioned at an appropriate position. Can be. In addition, since the second identification section 280 is provided at a position symmetrical in the width direction, the paper diaper 300 can be positioned at an appropriate position so as to be balanced in the width direction.
 さらに、前身頃202及び後身頃204に設けられたデザイン部291,292において幅方向に沿う末端部291A,291B,292A,292Bも紙おむつ300の位置あわせに利用することができ、紙おむつ300の適切な装着に資する。
 よって、紙おむつ300の位置あわせが容易になり、着用者の身体にフィットするように装着することができる紙おむつ300を提供することができる。
Further, the end portions 291A, 291B, 292A, and 292B along the width direction in the design portions 291 and 292 provided on the front body 202 and the back body 204 can also be used for positioning the disposable diaper 300. Contributes to mounting.
Therefore, the positioning of the disposable diaper 300 is facilitated, and the disposable diaper 300 that can be worn so as to fit the wearer's body can be provided.
 デザイン部291,292は、それぞれの長手方向寸法が同一又は略同一に設定されているため、紙おむつ300の長手方向位置を容易に調節することができる。
 上記のデザイン部291,292は、紙おむつ300の長手方向端部232B,232Cから股下部203側の末端部291A,292Aまでの長さL31,L32が互いに同一又は略同一に配置されている。そのため、装着状態の紙おむつ300においてデザイン部291,292の末端部291A,292Aどうしの位置を揃えることで、適切な位置に紙おむつ300を容易に装着することができる。
The design portions 291 and 292 have the same or substantially the same longitudinal dimension, so that the longitudinal position of the disposable diaper 300 can be easily adjusted.
The above design portion 291 and 292, the longitudinal ends of the disposable diaper 300 232B, the distal end 291A of the crotch portion 203 side from 232C, the length L 31, L 32 up to 292A are arranged identical or substantially identical to each other . Therefore, by aligning the positions of the end portions 291A and 292A of the design portions 291 and 292 in the disposable diaper 300 in the attached state, the disposable diaper 300 can be easily attached to an appropriate position.
 また、デザイン部291,292は、紙おむつ300の長手方向の腹側端部232Bから前デザイン部291の股下部203とは反対側の末端部291Bまでの長さL21と、長手方向の背側端部232Cから後デザイン部292の股下部203とは反対側の末端部292Bまでの長さL22も互いに同一又は略同一に配置されている。そのため、装着状態の紙おむつ300においてデザイン部291,292の末端部291B,292Bどうしの位置を揃えることで、適切な位置に紙おむつ300を容易に装着することができる。
 上述した紙おむつ300の位置あわせをまとめると、第二識別部280によって股下部203で位置あわせすることができ、末端部291A,292Aによってデザイン部291,292における股下部203側で位置あわせすることができ、末端部291B,292Bによってデザイン部291,292における長手方向端部232B,232C側で位置あわせすることができる。
Further, the design unit 291 and 292 includes a longitudinal direction from the ventral edge portion 232B to end 291B opposite to the crotch portion 203 of the front design portion 291 length L 21 of the diapers 300, longitudinal dorsal are arranged identical or substantially identical to each other opposite the end to 292B length L 22 and the crotch portion 203 of the rear design portion 292 from the end portion 232C. Therefore, by aligning the positions of the ends 291B and 292B of the design portions 291 and 292 in the disposable diaper 300 in the attached state, the disposable diaper 300 can be easily attached to an appropriate position.
In summary, the positioning of the disposable diaper 300 described above can be performed at the crotch portion 203 by the second identification portion 280, and can be performed at the crotch portion 203 side of the design portions 291 and 292 by the end portions 291A and 292A. Thus, the end portions 291B and 292B can be aligned at the longitudinal ends 232B and 232C of the design portions 291 and 292.
 さらに、股下部203側の末端部291A,292Aが紙おむつ300の長手方向端部232B,232Cと略平行な形状である。ここで、紙おむつ300を装着する際に、図10に示すように、デザイン部291の図7中で右側の幅方向端部とデザイン部292の図7中で右側の幅方向端部とが対向し、デザイン部291の図7中で左側の幅方向端部とデザイン部292の図7中で左側の幅方向端部とが対向する。この状態で、デザイン部291,292それぞれの末端部291A,292Aの高さが略一致するようにして紙おむつ300を装着することで、紙おむつ300の長手方向両端部の高さが略等しくなる。このように、デザイン部291,292を利用することで、前身頃202及び後身頃204が腹側又は背側のいずれか一方に偏るようにしてずれることを防いで、適切な位置に紙おむつ300の位置あわせをすることができる。 Furthermore, the end portions 291A, 292A on the crotch portion 203 side are substantially parallel to the longitudinal end portions 232B, 232C of the disposable diaper 300. Here, when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted, as shown in FIG. 10, the right widthwise end of the design portion 291 in FIG. 7 and the right widthwise end of the design portion 292 in FIG. The left end in the width direction of the design unit 291 in FIG. 7 and the left end in the width direction of the design unit 292 in FIG. In this state, by mounting the paper diaper 300 such that the heights of the end portions 291A and 292A of the design portions 291 and 292 are substantially the same, the heights of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the paper diaper 300 become substantially equal. As described above, by using the design portions 291 and 292, the front body 202 and the back body 204 are prevented from being displaced so as to be biased toward one of the ventral side and the back side, and the disposable diaper 300 is appropriately positioned. Positioning can be performed.
 したがって、紙おむつ300によれば、第二識別部280及びデザイン部291,292を利用することで、紙おむつ300を装着する際の位置あわせが容易になり、着用者の身体にフィットするように着用することができる。また、紙おむつ300は、デザイン部291,292による前後の見分けが付きにくいものであるが、位置あわせが容易となっている。このとき、例えば、着用者が仰向け、又はうつ伏せ若しくは腹這いのいずれかの状態で、デザイン部291,292の両方の位置を確認できない場合には、股下部203側から紙おむつ300を確認することで、第二識別部280を利用して位置あわせを行うことができる。また、例えば、着用者が横向きで寝転がっている状態で、第二識別部280とデザイン部291,292の両方の位置を確認できる場合には、前身頃202側及び後身頃204側と股下部203側から紙おむつ300を確認することで、第二識別部280及びデザイン部291,292を利用して位置あわせを行うことができる。また、着用者が立っている状態で、デザイン部291,292の両方の位置を確認できる場合には、前身頃202側及び後身頃204側から紙おむつ300を確認することで、デザイン部291,292を利用して位置あわせを行うことができる。またこのとき、必要に応じて側方から紙おむつ300を確認することで、第二識別部280を利用して位置あわせを行うことができる。このように、紙おむつ300によれば、着用者の姿勢に応じて、第二識別部280とデザイン部291,292とのいずれかを利用して、前身頃202、股下部203、後身頃204の位置あわせを行うことができる。また、第二識別部280とデザイン部291,292との両方を利用して、より確実に前身頃202、股下部203、後身頃204の位置あわせを行うことができる。よって、紙おむつ300を着用者の身体にフィットするように着用することができ、排泄物が漏れ出すことを防ぎやすくなる。 Therefore, according to the disposable diaper 300, by using the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292, the positioning when attaching the disposable diaper 300 is facilitated, and the disposable diaper 300 is worn so as to fit the wearer's body. be able to. Further, the disposable diaper 300 is difficult to distinguish between the front and rear by the design units 291 and 292, but the positioning is easy. At this time, for example, in a state where the wearer is lying on his / her back, or lying down or lying on his stomach, if the positions of both the design portions 291 and 292 cannot be confirmed, the disposable diaper 300 is confirmed from the crotch portion 203 side. Positioning can be performed using the second identification unit 280. Also, for example, in a state where the wearer is lying sideways and lying down, if the positions of both the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 can be confirmed, the front body 202 side and the back body 204 side and the crotch 203 By confirming the disposable diaper 300 from the side, the positioning can be performed using the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292. When both positions of the design portions 291 and 292 can be confirmed while the wearer is standing, the disposable diaper 300 is confirmed from the front body 202 side and the back body 204 side, so that the design portions 291 and 292 can be confirmed. Can be used for alignment. At this time, by checking the paper diaper 300 from the side as needed, the positioning can be performed using the second identification unit 280. As described above, according to the disposable diaper 300, the front body 202, the crotch 203, and the back body 204 are formed using one of the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 according to the posture of the wearer. Positioning can be performed. In addition, by using both the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292, the positioning of the front body 202, the crotch 203, and the back body 204 can be performed more reliably. Therefore, the disposable diaper 300 can be worn so as to fit the wearer's body, and it is easy to prevent excrement from leaking.
 外観が互いに同一又は類似するデザイン部291,292どうしを合わせるようにすることによっても、着用者に対して股下部203が適切な位置に配置された紙おむつ300を装着することができ、紙おむつ300の腹側又は背側への偏りを抑えることができる。 By combining the design portions 291 and 292 having the same or similar appearance with each other, the disposable diaper 300 in which the crotch 203 is disposed at an appropriate position can be attached to the wearer. The bias toward the abdomen or back can be suppressed.
 さらに、紙おむつ300では、バックシート232の肌非対向面側にカバーシート235が配置されていることで、カバーシート235によって第二識別部280及びデザイン部291,292が覆われる。これにより、第二識別部280及びデザイン部291,292が他の部材との接触や擦れ等が生じて汚れたり薄れたりすることを防ぐことができる。また、バックシート232に設けられた第二識別部280及びデザイン部291,292によってバックシート232の質感や肌触りに変化が生じた場合であっても、着用者や利用者はバックシート232の肌非対向面側に位置するカバーシート235に直接的に触れることになる。このため、第二識別部280及びデザイン部291,292を設けたことによる影響を抑えることができる。 In the disposable diaper 300, the cover sheet 235 is disposed on the non-skin-facing side of the back sheet 232, so that the cover sheet 235 covers the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 from being in contact with other members, rubbing, or the like, and from being stained or thinned. In addition, even when the texture and feel of the back sheet 232 are changed by the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 provided on the back sheet 232, the wearer and the user can use the skin of the back sheet 232. The user directly touches the cover sheet 235 located on the non-opposing surface side. For this reason, the influence of providing the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 can be suppressed.
 第二識別部280は、バックシート232とは異なる色を有する。これにより、第二識別部280を見ただけでその位置を直感的に認識することができ、バックシート232と容易に見分けることができる。したがって、位置あわせがより容易となり、排泄物が漏れ出すことを防ぎやすくなる。 The second identification unit 280 has a color different from that of the back sheet 232. This makes it possible to intuitively recognize the position only by looking at the second identification unit 280, and easily distinguish it from the back sheet 232. Therefore, the positioning becomes easier, and it is easier to prevent the excrement from leaking.
 第二識別部280やデザイン部291,292は、肌非対向面側から外観可能に設けられる。これにより、第二識別部280やデザイン部291,292の有無によって、紙おむつ300の裏表を見分けることができる。また、紙おむつ300を装着する際に、外側から第二識別部280やデザイン部291,292の位置を確認することができる。したがって、位置あわせがさらに容易となり、排泄物が漏れ出すことを防ぎやすくなる。 The second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 are provided so as to be visible from the non-skin-facing surface side. Thereby, the front and back of the disposable diaper 300 can be distinguished by the presence or absence of the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292. In addition, when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted, the positions of the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 can be confirmed from the outside. Therefore, the alignment is further facilitated, and it is easy to prevent excrement from leaking.
 第二識別部280は、バックシート232の側縁部232Aに設けられる。これにより、紙おむつ300を装着する際に、側面から第二識別部280の位置を確認することできる。したがって、位置あわせがいっそう容易となり、排泄物が漏れ出すことを防ぎやすくなる。 The second identification unit 280 is provided on the side edge 232 </ b> A of the back sheet 232. Thus, when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted, the position of the second identification unit 280 can be confirmed from the side surface. Therefore, the positioning is further facilitated, and it is easy to prevent the excrement from leaking.
 そのほか、仮想線VL5,VL6よりも幅方向外側に第二識別部280が配置されていることから、折畳状態の紙おむつ300を肌対向面側から見て、第二識別部280を視認することができる。よって、折畳状態の紙おむつ300を肌対向面側から見ながら位置あわせをすることができる。
 なお、第二識別部280の全体が仮想線VL5,VL6よりも幅方向外側に配置されている場合には、折畳状態の紙おむつ300を非肌対向面側から見たときに、第二識別部280は見えず、デザイン部291,292が見える。よって、折畳状態の紙おむつ300を非肌対向面側から見たときのデザイン部291,292による装飾性を確保することができる。
In addition, since the second identification unit 280 is disposed outside the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction, the folded state of the disposable diaper 300 can be viewed from the skin-facing surface side to visually recognize the second identification unit 280. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the position while viewing the folded paper diaper 300 from the skin facing surface side.
When the entire second identification unit 280 is disposed outside the virtual lines VL5 and VL6 in the width direction, when the folded diaper 300 is viewed from the non-skin-facing surface side, the second identification unit 280 has the second identification unit 280. The part 280 is not visible, and the design parts 291 and 292 are visible. Therefore, the decorativeness of the design portions 291 and 292 when the folded paper diaper 300 is viewed from the non-skin-facing surface side can be secured.
[3.その他]
 上記説明では、第二識別部280及びデザイン部291,292がバックシート232に印刷される場合を例に挙げて説明した。第二識別部280及びデザイン部291,292は、紙おむつ300の外部から視認できる部位に設けられていればよい。このため、第二識別部280及びデザイン部291,292は、カバーシート235に印刷されていてもよく、バックシート232とカバーシート235との両方に印刷されていてもよい。あるいは、バックシート232とカバーシート235との間に第二識別部280及びデザイン部291,292が別設されてもよい。
[3. Others]
In the above description, the case where the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 are printed on the back sheet 232 has been described as an example. The second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 only need to be provided in a part that can be visually recognized from the outside of the disposable diaper 300. Therefore, the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 may be printed on the cover sheet 235, or may be printed on both the back sheet 232 and the cover sheet 235. Alternatively, the second identification unit 280 and the design units 291 and 292 may be separately provided between the back sheet 232 and the cover sheet 235.
 図11に示すように、前身頃202及び後身頃204に設けられたデザイン部291,292は、紙おむつ300の幅方向端部まで延長されていてもよい。そして、第二識別部280が中央となる位置関係で紙おむつ300が折り曲げられて前身頃202と後身頃204とが固定された際に、デザイン部291,292が連続する形状であってもよい。この場合、紙おむつ300を装着する際に、適切に位置あわせをすると、止着部261を介して前身頃202と後身頃204とが連結された部位において、デザイン部291,292が胴回りに一続きで連続することになる。したがって、紙おむつ300を装着する際の位置が適切かどうかを判別しやすくなり、位置決めをより確実に行うことができる。 As shown in FIG. 11, the design portions 291 and 292 provided on the front body 202 and the back body 204 may be extended to the width direction ends of the disposable diaper 300. Then, when the paper diaper 300 is bent and the front body 202 and the back body 204 are fixed in a positional relationship where the second identification part 280 is located at the center, the design parts 291 and 292 may have a continuous shape. In this case, when the disposable diaper 300 is appropriately positioned when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted, the design portions 291 and 292 continuously extend around the waist at a portion where the front body 202 and the back body 204 are connected via the fastening portion 261. Will be continuous. Therefore, it is easy to determine whether the position at the time of mounting the paper diaper 300 is appropriate, and the positioning can be performed more reliably.
〔第二識別部の変形例〕
 第二識別部280は、股下部203において長手方向の中央位置且つ幅方向の左右対称位置に、展開状態の紙おむつ300を肌面側(肌対向面側)から視覚的に識別可能に設けられていてもよい。この場合、紙おむつ300を装着する際に、展開状態の紙おむつ300を肌面側から第二識別部280の位置を確認することできるので、位置あわせが容易となる。
 ここで、本実施形態の第二識別部280の態様をまとめると、以下の3通りである。
  (1)展開状態の紙おむつ300の非肌面側からのみ視覚的に識別可能
  (2)展開状態の紙おむつ300の肌面側からのみ視覚的に識別可能
  (3)展開状態の紙おむつ300の非肌面側および肌面側から視覚的に識別可能
 第二識別部280が非肌面側および肌面側から視覚的に識別可能である場合、第二識別部280の色彩を非肌面側と肌面側とで異ならせてもよい。この場合、第二識別部280の色彩により、紙おむつ300の裏表を見分けることができる。
[Modification of second identification unit]
The second identification unit 280 is provided at the central position in the longitudinal direction and symmetrical position in the width direction in the crotch 203 so as to visually identify the deployed diaper 300 from the skin surface side (skin facing surface side). You may. In this case, when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted, the position of the second identification unit 280 can be confirmed from the skin side of the disposable disposable diaper 300, so that the alignment is facilitated.
Here, the forms of the second identification unit 280 of the present embodiment are summarized as follows.
(1) Visually identifiable only from the non-skin side of the unfolded disposable diaper 300 (2) Visually identifiable only from the skin side of the unfolded disposable diaper 300 (3) Non-skin of the unfolded disposable diaper 300 When the second identification unit 280 is visually identifiable from the non-skin side and the skin side, the color of the second identification unit 280 can be visually identified from the non-skin side and the skin side. It may be different on the surface side. In this case, the front and back of the disposable diaper 300 can be distinguished by the color of the second identification unit 280.
 また、第二識別部280は、股下部203において長手方向の中央位置且つ幅方向の左右対称位置で、本体部201の肌面側に設けられた立体ギャザー242よりも幅方向外側に配置されたものであってもよい。立体ギャザー242は、図7,図9等に示すように、本体部201の肌面側に立設されている。そのため、立体ギャザー242よりも幅方向外側に配置されることで、紙おむつ300を装着する際に、展開状態の紙おむつ300の肌面側から第二識別部280の位置を確認することできるので、位置あわせが容易となる。 In addition, the second identification portion 280 is disposed at the center position in the longitudinal direction and the left-right symmetric position in the width direction in the crotch portion 203, and is disposed outside the three-dimensional gather 242 provided on the skin surface side of the main body portion 201 in the width direction. It may be something. The three-dimensional gathers 242 are erected on the skin side of the main body 201 as shown in FIGS. Therefore, when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted, the position of the second identification unit 280 can be confirmed from the skin side of the disposable diaper 300 when the disposable diaper 300 is mounted by being arranged outside the three-dimensional gather 242 in the width direction. Matching becomes easy.
 上述した第一実施形態と、上述した第二実施形態とを組み合わせてもよい。
 例えば、第一実施形態のおむつ1に第二実施形態の第二識別部280を設けてもよい。また、第二実施形態の紙おむつ300に第一実施形態の第一識別部4Cを設けるとともに、第二実施形態の紙おむつ300の本体部201,デザイン部291,292,テープ260,第一識別部4Cがそれぞれ第一実施形態で特定された色彩の組み合わせを有していてもよい。
The above-described first embodiment may be combined with the above-described second embodiment.
For example, the diaper 1 of the first embodiment may be provided with the second identification unit 280 of the second embodiment. Further, the disposable diaper 300 of the second embodiment is provided with the first identification unit 4C of the first embodiment, and the main unit 201, design units 291, 292, tape 260, and first identification unit 4C of the disposable diaper 300 of the second embodiment. May each have a combination of colors specified in the first embodiment.
 以下、実施例を挙げて本発明を具体的に説明する。なお、以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り適宜変更することができる。したがって、本発明は以下の実施例に限定されるものではない。
 以下、上記の態様I,IVを実現可能な実施例として「第一実施例」を述べる。次に、上記の態様II,IVを実現可能な実施例として「第二実施例」を述べる。その後、上記の態様III,IV,VIを実現可能な実施例として「第三実施例」を述べる。最後に、上記の態様Vを実現可能な実施例として「第四実施例」を述べる。
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described specifically with reference to examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the present invention is not limited to the following examples.
Hereinafter, the "first embodiment" will be described as an embodiment capable of realizing the above aspects I and IV. Next, a "second embodiment" will be described as an embodiment capable of realizing the above aspects II and IV. Thereafter, a "third embodiment" will be described as an embodiment capable of realizing the above-described modes III, IV, and VI. Finally, a "fourth embodiment" will be described as an embodiment capable of realizing the above mode V.
〈第一実施例〉
 第一実施例では、実施例1~4と比較例1,2とを比較した。
 実施例1~4および比較例1,2では、係止部材62に対応する第一試験片としてスリーエム社性のCHK-02174(白色)を採用し、基材シート61(フックキャリア)に対応する第二試験片としてスパンボンド不織布(青色)を採用した。この第二試験片については、下記の表1に示す第一透光率となるように目付(目付量)を調整した。なお、実施例1~4および比較例1,2の第二試験片は、特許6115146号に開示の方法で製造することができる。
 また、実施例1~4および比較例1,2では、カバーシート14,基材シート61の基部61A及びサイドシート13に対応する第三試験片には、下記の表1に示す第二透光率となるように目付(目付量)を調整したものを用いた。たとえば、第三試験片のカバーシート14に対応するものに目付が16.5g/m2のスパンボンド不織布(ポリプロピレン)を採用した。
<First embodiment>
In the first example, Examples 1 to 4 were compared with Comparative Examples 1 and 2.
In Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2, CHM-02174 (white) manufactured by 3M Co. was adopted as the first test piece corresponding to the locking member 62, and corresponded to the base sheet 61 (hook carrier). Spunbond nonwoven fabric (blue) was used as the second test piece. With respect to this second test piece, the basis weight (basis weight) was adjusted so as to have the first light transmittance shown in Table 1 below. The second test pieces of Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 can be manufactured by the method disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 6115146.
In Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2, the third test piece corresponding to the cover sheet 14, the base 61A of the base sheet 61, and the side sheet 13 had the second light transmission shown in Table 1 below. A material whose basis weight (basis weight) was adjusted so as to obtain a ratio was used. For example, a spunbonded nonwoven fabric (polypropylene) having a basis weight of 16.5 g / m 2 was used for the third test piece corresponding to the cover sheet 14.
[評価]
 第一実施例では、第二試験片及び第三試験片の全光線透過率[%]をそれぞれに測定した。全光線透過率は、JIS K 7361-1;(1997年度)(プラスチック-透明材料の全光線透過率の試験方法-第一部:シングルビーム法)に準拠した測定法により測定された値である。第二試験片の全光線透過率[%]を第一透過率とし、第三試験片の全光線透過率[%]を第二透過率とした。
 また、目視による第一試験片の色の視認性を評価するために、官能試験を行った。この官能試験は、10名の被検者が、実施例1~4及び比較例1,2の試験片を肌面側に対応する方向から見て、第一試験片の色が透けて見える度合いを優(下記の表では「◎」で記す),良(下記の表では「○」で記す),可(下記の表では「△」で記す),不可(下記の表では「×」で記す)の四段階で評価した。この官能試験では、以下に示す二種の評価を行った。
  ・第一評価:第二試験片を通して第一試験片の色が透けて見える度合い
  ・第二評価:第三試験片を通して第一試験片の色が透けて見える度合い
 第一評価は、第一折畳状態のおむつ1を肌面側から見たときに、係止部材62が透けて見える度合いに対応する。第二評価は、第二折畳状態のおむつ1を肌面側から見たときに、係止部材62が透けて見える度合いに対応する。
 上記のようにして測定された第一透過率及び第二透過率と、評価結果とを下記の表1に示す。
[Evaluation]
In the first example, the total light transmittance [%] of each of the second test piece and the third test piece was measured. The total light transmittance is a value measured by a measuring method based on JIS K 7361-1; (1997) (Plastic-Test method for total light transmittance of transparent materials-Part 1: Single beam method). . The total light transmittance [%] of the second test piece was defined as the first transmittance, and the total light transmittance [%] of the third test piece was defined as the second transmittance.
In addition, a sensory test was performed to evaluate the visibility of the color of the first test piece visually. In this sensory test, the degree to which the color of the first test piece is seen through by ten subjects when the test pieces of Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 are viewed from the direction corresponding to the skin surface side Is excellent (indicated by “,” in the table below), good (indicated by “○” in the table below), acceptable (indicated by “△” in the table below), not acceptable (“x” in the table below) (Noted)). In this sensory test, the following two types of evaluations were performed.
・ First evaluation: The degree to which the color of the first test piece can be seen through the second test piece. ・ The second evaluation: The degree to which the color of the first test piece can be seen through the third test piece. When the diaper 1 in the tatami state is viewed from the skin surface side, this corresponds to the degree to which the locking member 62 can be seen through. The second evaluation corresponds to the degree to which the locking member 62 can be seen through when the diaper 1 in the second folded state is viewed from the skin surface side.
Table 1 below shows the first transmittance and the second transmittance measured as described above, and the evaluation results.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000001
[検討]
 表1に示す通り、実施例1~4では、第一透過率が65~99[%]かつ第二透過率が50~99[%]であり、第一評価及び第二評価の双方とも「可」以上の評価が得られた。特に、第一透過率が90[%]以上の場合には、「優」の第一評価が得られた。また、第二透過率が60[%]以上の場合に「良」の第二評価が得られた。
 これに対し、比較例1では、第一透過率が65[%]であるものの第二透過率が50[%]未満の40[%]であり、第一評価は「良」であるものの、第二評価は「不可」であった。比較例2では、第一透過率が65[%]未満の50[%]かつ第二透過率が50[%]未満の40[%]であり、第一評価及び第二評価とも「不可」であった。
 よって、第一透過率が65~99[%](好ましくは90[%]以上)の場合に上記の第一透光性が確保されるとともに、第二透過率が50~99[%](好ましくは60[%]以上)の場合に上記の第二透光性が確保されることが分かる。
[Consideration]
As shown in Table 1, in Examples 1 to 4, the first transmittance was 65 to 99 [%] and the second transmittance was 50 to 99 [%]. OK ”or higher was obtained. In particular, when the first transmittance was 90% or more, the first evaluation of “excellent” was obtained. When the second transmittance was 60% or more, a second evaluation of "good" was obtained.
On the other hand, in Comparative Example 1, although the first transmittance was 65 [%], the second transmittance was 40 [%] less than 50 [%], and the first evaluation was "good". The second evaluation was "impossible." In Comparative Example 2, the first transmittance was 50 [%] of less than 65 [%] and the second transmittance was 40 [%] of less than 50 [%], and both the first evaluation and the second evaluation were “impossible”. Met.
Therefore, when the first transmittance is 65 to 99 [%] (preferably 90 [%] or more), the above-described first light transmittance is ensured, and the second transmittance is 50 to 99 [%] ( It is understood that the above-mentioned second light-transmitting property is ensured when the ratio is preferably 60% or more.
〈第二実施例〉
 第二実施例では、実施例1~4と比較例1~4とを比較した。
 実施例1~4および比較例1~4では、係止部材62に対応する第一試験片としてスリーエム社性のCHK-02174(白色)を採用し、基材シート61(フックキャリア)に対応する第二試験片としてスパンボンド不織布(青色)を採用した。この第二試験片については、下記の表2に示す孔径,間隔,数の貫通孔を設けた。なお、実施例1~4および比較例1~4の第二試験片は、特許6115146号に開示の方法を援用して製造することができる。
 また、実施例1~4および比較例1~4では、カバーシート14,基材シート61の基部61A及びサイドシート13に対応する第三試験片には、下記の表1に示す第二透光率となるように目付(目付量)を調整したものを用いた。たとえば、第三試験片のカバーシート14に対応するものに目付が16.5g/m2のスパンボンド不織布(ポリプロピレ
ン)を採用した。
<Second embodiment>
In the second example, Examples 1 to 4 were compared with Comparative Examples 1 to 4.
In Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4, CHM-02174 (white) manufactured by 3M Co. was used as the first test piece corresponding to the locking member 62, and corresponded to the base sheet 61 (hook carrier). Spunbond nonwoven fabric (blue) was used as the second test piece. This second test piece was provided with through-holes having the hole diameters, intervals, and numbers shown in Table 2 below. The second test pieces of Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4 can be manufactured by using the method disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 6115146.
In Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4, the third test pieces corresponding to the cover sheet 14, the base 61A of the base sheet 61, and the side sheet 13 had the second light transmission shown in Table 1 below. A material whose basis weight (basis weight) was adjusted so as to obtain a ratio was used. For example, a spunbonded nonwoven fabric (polypropylene) having a basis weight of 16.5 g / m 2 was used for the third test piece corresponding to the cover sheet 14.
[評価]
 第二実施例では、目視による第一試験片の色の視認性を評価するために、官能試験を行った。この官能試験は、10名の被検者が、実施例1~4及び比較例1~4の試験片を肌面側に対応する方向から見て、第二試験片を通して第一試験片の色が透けて見える度合いを優(下記の表では「◎」で記す),良(下記の表では「○」で記す),可(下記の表では「△」で記す),不可(下記の表では「×」で記す)の四段階で評価した。
 上記のように評価された結果を下記の表2に示す。
[Evaluation]
In the second example, a sensory test was performed to evaluate the visual visibility of the color of the first test piece visually. In this sensory test, ten subjects looked at the test pieces of Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4 from the direction corresponding to the skin side, and passed the color of the first test piece through the second test piece. Is good (marked with “優” in the table below), good (marked with “○” in the table below), acceptable (marked with “△” in the table below), unacceptable (marked in the table below) In this case, the evaluation was made in four stages of “×”).
The results evaluated as described above are shown in Table 2 below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002
[検討]
 表2に示す通り、実施例1~4では、「可」以上の評価が得られた。特に、貫通孔の外接円の孔径が1.0[mm]以上の場合には少なくとも「良」の評価が得られ、0.1[mm]以上の場合には少なくとも「可」の評価が得られた。これに対し、比較例1~4では、貫通孔の外接円の孔径が0.1[mm]未満であり、他のパラメータによらず、「不可」の評価しか得られなかった。よって、貫通孔の外接円の孔径が0.1~1.0[mm]の場合に、第一試験片(係止部材62に対応)の視認性が確保されることが分かる。
[Consideration]
As shown in Table 2, in Examples 1 to 4, an evaluation of “OK” or more was obtained. In particular, when the diameter of the circumscribed circle of the through-hole is 1.0 [mm] or more, at least an evaluation of “good” is obtained, and when it is 0.1 [mm] or more, at least an evaluation of “good” is obtained. Was done. On the other hand, in Comparative Examples 1 to 4, the diameter of the circumscribed circle of the through-hole was less than 0.1 [mm], and only an evaluation of “impossible” was obtained regardless of other parameters. Therefore, it is understood that the visibility of the first test piece (corresponding to the locking member 62) is secured when the diameter of the circumscribed circle of the through hole is 0.1 to 1.0 [mm].
〈第三実施例〉
 第三実施例では、実施例1~4と比較例1,2とを比較した。
 第三実施例の実施例1~4および比較例1,2では、第一実施例と同様に、係止部材62に対応する第一試験片としてスリーエム社性のCHK-02174(白色)を採用した。この実施例1~4および比較例1,2では、基材シート61に対応する第二試験片として、スパンボンド不織布(青色)を採用したうえで、下記の表2に示す全光線透過率となるように基材シート61のフィルム状部(フィルム化された部分)を設けた。なお、実施例1~4および比較例1,2の第二試験片は、特許6115146号に開示の方法を援用して製造することができ、構成繊維を熱的に溶融して繊維の形態を失わせ、被膜化された部分をフィルム状部とした。
<Third embodiment>
In the third example, Examples 1 to 4 were compared with Comparative Examples 1 and 2.
In Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 of the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, CHM-02174 (white) manufactured by 3M was used as the first test piece corresponding to the locking member 62. did. In Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2, a spunbond nonwoven fabric (blue) was used as the second test piece corresponding to the base sheet 61, and the total light transmittance and the total light transmittance shown in Table 2 below were obtained. Thus, a film-shaped portion (portion formed into a film) of the base sheet 61 was provided. In addition, the second test pieces of Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 can be manufactured with the aid of the method disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 6115146. The part which was lost and coated was made into a film-like part.
[評価]
 第三実施例では、第二試験片について、フィルム化前の試験片である第二繊維試験片とフィルム化後の試験片である第二フィルム試験片との全光線透過率[%]をそれぞれに測定した。全光線透過率は、JIS K 7361-1;(1997年度)(プラスチック-透明材料の全光線透過率の試験方法-第一部:シングルビーム法)に準拠した測定法により測定された値である。第二フィルム試験片の全光線透過率[%]を第一透過率とし、第二繊維試験片の全光線透過率[%]を第二透過率とした。
 また、目視による第一試験片の色の視認性を評価するために、官能試験を行った。この官能試験は、10名の被検者が、実施例1~4及び比較例1,2の試験片を肌面側に対応する方向から見て、第二試験片を通して第一試験片の色が透けて見える度合いを優(下記の表では「◎」で記す),良(下記の表では「○」で記す),可(下記の表では「△」で記す),不可(下記の表では「×」で記す)の四段階で評価した。
 上記のように評価された結果を下記の表3に示す。
[Evaluation]
In the third example, for the second test piece, the total light transmittance [%] of the second fiber test piece which is the test piece before film formation and the second film test piece which is the test piece after film formation were respectively measured. Was measured. The total light transmittance is a value measured by a measuring method based on JIS K 7361-1; (1997) (Plastic-Test method for total light transmittance of transparent materials-Part 1: Single beam method). . The total light transmittance [%] of the second film test piece was defined as the first transmittance, and the total light transmittance [%] of the second fiber test piece was defined as the second transmittance.
In addition, a sensory test was performed to evaluate the visibility of the color of the first test piece visually. In this sensory test, ten subjects viewed the test pieces of Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 from the direction corresponding to the skin side, and passed the color of the first test piece through the second test piece. Is excellent (denoted by “◎” in the table below), good (denoted by “で は” in the table below), acceptable (denoted by “△” in the table below), unacceptable (detailed in the table below) In this case, the evaluation was made in four stages of “×”).
The results evaluated as described above are shown in Table 3 below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000003
[検討]
 表3に示す通り、実施例1~4では、第一透過率が65~90[%]であり、「可」以上の評価が得られた。特に、第一透過率が75[%]以上の場合に「優」の評価が得られ、第一透過率が70[%]以上の場合に「良」以上の評価が得られた。
 一方、比較例1,2ともに、第一透過率が50[%]未満(65[%]未満)であり、「不可」の評価であった。
 よって、第一透過率が65~90[%](好ましくは70[%]以上、さらに望ましくは75[%]以上)の場合に第一試験片(係止部材62に対応)の視認性が確保されることが分かる。
[Consideration]
As shown in Table 3, in Examples 1 to 4, the first transmittance was 65 to 90 [%], and an evaluation of “OK” or more was obtained. In particular, an evaluation of “excellent” was obtained when the first transmittance was 75% or more, and an evaluation of “good” or more was obtained when the first transmittance was 70% or more.
On the other hand, in both Comparative Examples 1 and 2, the first transmittance was less than 50 [%] (less than 65 [%]), and was evaluated as “impossible”.
Therefore, when the first transmittance is 65 to 90% (preferably 70% or more, more preferably 75% or more), the visibility of the first test piece (corresponding to the locking member 62) is reduced. It can be seen that it is secured.
〈第四実施例〉
 第四実施例では、実施例1~4と比較例1,2とを比較した。
 第四実施例の実施例1~4および比較例1,2では、係止部材62に対応する第一試験片としてスリーエム社性のCHK-02174(白色)を採用し、基材シート61に対応する第二試験片としてスパンボンド不織布(青色)を採用した。この第二試験片については、下記の表1に示す全光線透過率となるように目付(目付量)を調整した。なお、実施例1~4および比較例1,2の第二試験片は、特許6115146号に開示の方法で製造することができる。
<Fourth embodiment>
In the fourth example, Examples 1 to 4 were compared with Comparative Examples 1 and 2.
In Examples 1 to 4 of the fourth embodiment and Comparative Examples 1 and 2, CHM-02174 (white) manufactured by 3M was used as the first test piece corresponding to the locking member 62, and the base sheet 61 was used. Spunbond nonwoven fabric (blue) was adopted as the second test piece to be performed. The weight of the second test piece was adjusted so that the total light transmittance shown in Table 1 below was obtained. The second test pieces of Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 can be manufactured by the method disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 6115146.
[評価]
 本実施例では、第二試験片の全光線透過率[%]をそれぞれに測定した。全光線透過率は、JIS K 7361-1;(1997年度)(プラスチック-透明材料の全光線透過率の試験方法-第一部:シングルビーム法)に準拠した測定法により測定された値である。
 また、目視による第一試験片の色の視認性を評価するために、官能試験を行った。この官能試験は、10名の被検者が、実施例1~4及び比較例1,2の試験片を見て、第二試験片を通して第一試験片の色が透けて見える度合いを優(下記の表では「◎」で記す),良(下記の表では「○」で記す),可(下記の表では「△」で記す),不可(下記の表では「×」で記す)の四段階で評価した。この評価は、展開状態のおむつ1を非肌面側から見たときに、係止部材62が透けて見える度合いに対応する。
 上記のようにして測定された全光線透過率と、得られた評価とを下記の表1に示す。
[Evaluation]
In this example, the total light transmittance [%] of the second test piece was measured respectively. The total light transmittance is a value measured by a measuring method based on JIS K 7361-1; (1997) (Plastic-Test method for total light transmittance of transparent materials-Part 1: Single beam method). .
In addition, a sensory test was performed to evaluate the visibility of the color of the first test piece visually. In this sensory test, ten subjects observed the test pieces of Examples 1 to 4 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2, and showed that the degree of the color of the first test piece being seen through the second test piece was excellent ( In the table below, it is indicated by “◎”, good (indicated by “○” in the table below), acceptable (indicated by “△” in the table below), and not acceptable (indicated by “x” in the table below) The evaluation was made in four steps. This evaluation corresponds to the degree to which the locking member 62 can be seen through when the diaper 1 in the deployed state is viewed from the non-skin side.
The total light transmittance measured as described above and the obtained evaluation are shown in Table 1 below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000004
[検討]
 表4に示す通り、実施例1~4では、第二試験片の全光線透過率が65~99[%]であり、「可」以上の評価が得られた。特に、全光線透過率が80[%]以上の場合には「優」の評価が得られ、全光線透過率が70[%]以上の場合には「良」の評価が得られた。
 これに対し、比較例1,2では、全光線透過率が50[%]未満(65[%]未満)であり、評価は「不可」であった。
 よって、全光線透過率が65~99[%](好ましくは70[%]以上,より好ましくは80[%]以上)の場合に所定の透光性が確保されることが分かる。
[Consideration]
As shown in Table 4, in Examples 1 to 4, the total light transmittance of the second test piece was 65 to 99 [%], and an evaluation of “OK” or more was obtained. In particular, an evaluation of “excellent” was obtained when the total light transmittance was 80% or more, and an evaluation of “good” was obtained when the total light transmittance was 70% or more.
On the other hand, in Comparative Examples 1 and 2, the total light transmittance was less than 50 [%] (less than 65 [%]), and the evaluation was "impossible".
Therefore, it can be seen that when the total light transmittance is 65 to 99% (preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more), a predetermined light transmittance is secured.
 1   おむつ(テープ型おむつ)
 1A  前身頃
 1B  股下部
 1C  後身頃
 10  吸収体
 11  センターシート
 12  バックシート
 13  サイドシート
 14  カバーシート
 21  立体ギャザー
 22  レッグギャザー
 23  ウエストギャザー
 31,32,33 糸ゴム(弾性部材)
 4   パッチ
 4A  重複部
 4B  非重複部
 4C  第一識別部
 4D  フラップ
 5   デザイン部
 6   止着部(ファスニングテープ,テープ)
 61  基材シート
 61A 基部
 61B 延出部
 62  係止部材
 100 本体部
 300 紙おむつ
 202 前身頃
 203 股下部
 204 後身頃
 205 前方サイドフラップ
 206 後方サイドフラップ
 210 積層体
 220 吸収体
 221 吸収性コア
 222 高吸収性ポリマー
 223 繊維材料
 224 ラップシート
 231 トップシート
 232 バックシート
 233 サイドシート
 235 カバーシート
 238 パッチ(フロントパッチ)
 240 ギャザー
 250 糸ゴム(伸縮性部材)
 260 テープ(ファスニングテープ)
 280 第二識別部
 291,292 デザイン部
1 diapers (tape diapers)
1A Front Body 1B Inseam 1C Back Body 10 Absorber 11 Center Seat 12 Back Seat 13 Side Seat 14 Cover Seat 21 Solid Gather 22 Leg Gather 23 Waist Gather 31, 32, 33 Thread Rubber (Elastic Member)
Reference Signs List 4 patch 4A overlapping part 4B non-overlapping part 4C first identifying part 4D flap 5 design part 6 fastening part (fastening tape, tape)
61 Base Sheet 61A Base 61B Extension 62 Locking Member 100 Body 300 Disposable Diaper 202 Front Body 203 Inseam 204 Back Body 205 Front Side Flap 206 Rear Side Flap 210 Laminated Body 220 Absorber 221 Absorbent Core 222 High Absorbency Polymer 223 Fiber material 224 Wrap sheet 231 Top sheet 232 Back sheet 233 Side sheet 235 Cover sheet 238 Patch (front patch)
240 Gather 250 Thread rubber (elastic member)
260 tape (fastening tape)
280 Second identification part 291,292 Design part

Claims (73)

  1.  吸収体の幅方向の両端部において長手方向へ仮想的に延びる一対の折曲線で三つ折りにされた折畳状態から前記一対の折曲線での折り畳みが展開された平面状の展開状態に展開されて装着され、前記展開状態において肌面側を向く内面のうち前記一対の折曲線よりも幅方向外側の第一面が前記一対の折曲線よりも幅方向内側の第二面に対して前記折畳状態で対面して重ね合わせられ、製品出荷時において前記折畳状態をなす吸収性物品であって、
     前記吸収体を有し、前身頃,股下部及び後身頃に亘って設けられた本体部と、
     前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の一方において、前記展開状態で前記本体部に対して幅方向の端部から外側に延出する止着部と、
     前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の他方において、幅方向に延在し、前記本体部に積層され、最も非肌面側に配置され、前記止着部が固定される矩形のパッチと、
     前記他方で外観可能に設けられた第一デザイン部を有するデザイン部と、を備え、
     前記本体部が、全域に亘って実質的に同じ第一色彩であり、
     前記パッチが、
     前記第一デザイン部に対して非肌面側に配置され、透明もしくは半透明である、又は、前記第一デザイン部と一体的に当該第一デザイン部の外観を構成する主部と、
     当該パッチにおいて延在方向の両端部に位置し、前記展開状態で非肌面側から見たときに周囲の色彩と異なる第二色彩である一対の第一識別部とを有する
    吸収性物品。
    At the both ends in the width direction of the absorber, the pair of fold curves are virtually folded in the longitudinal direction, and the fold state of the absorber is folded into three-fold form. In the deployed state, the first surface of the inner surface facing the skin surface side in the width direction outside of the pair of fold curves is folded against the second surface in the width direction inside of the pair of fold curves. It is an absorbent article that is superimposed facing each other in a tatami state and is in the folded state at the time of product shipment,
    A main body having the absorber, provided over the front body, the crotch and the back body;
    In one of the front body and the rear body, a fastening portion extending outward from the widthwise end of the main body in the deployed state,
    On the other of the front body and the back body, a rectangular patch that extends in the width direction, is stacked on the main body, is arranged on the most non-skin side, and the fastening part is fixed,
    A design section having a first design section provided so as to be able to appear on the other side,
    The main body is substantially the same first color over the entire area,
    Said patch,
    A main portion that is arranged on the non-skin side with respect to the first design portion, is transparent or translucent, or forms an external appearance of the first design portion integrally with the first design portion,
    An absorbent article having a pair of first identification portions located at both ends in the extending direction of the patch and having a second color different from the surrounding color when viewed from the non-skin side in the unfolded state.
  2.  前記パッチが、前記一対の折曲線を幅方向に跨いで延在する
    請求項1に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the patch extends across the pair of fold curves in the width direction.
  3.  前記一対の第一識別部が、前記パッチの自由端をなし、
     前記デザイン部は、前記一方で非肌面側から外観可能に設けられ、前記第一デザイン部と長手方向に線対称又は略線対称な外観の第二デザイン部を有し、
     前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部が前記一対の折曲線どうしの幅方向内側に配置された
    請求項1又は2に記載の吸収性物品。
    The pair of first identification portions form a free end of the patch,
    The design portion is provided so as to be externally visible from the non-skin side, and has a second design portion having an appearance that is line-symmetric or substantially line-symmetric in the longitudinal direction with the first design portion,
    3. The absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the first design portion and the second design portion are arranged inside the pair of folding curves in the width direction. 4.
  4.  幅方向に延びる基準線を基準に全体形状が線対称又は略線対称の吸収性物品であって、
     前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部が、外観が互いに同一又は類似する
    請求項3に記載された吸収性物品。
    The overall shape is a line-symmetric or substantially line-symmetric absorbent article based on a reference line extending in the width direction,
    The absorbent article according to claim 3, wherein the first design portion and the second design portion have the same or similar appearance.
  5.  外観が互いに同一又は類似する前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部には、色彩又は模様が同一又は類似する前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、前記模様の配置が同一又は類似する前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、幅方向寸法が同一又は略同一の前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、長手方向寸法が同一又は略同一の前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部の少なくとも何れかが含まれる
    請求項4に記載の吸収性物品。
    In the first design part and the second design part having the same or similar appearance, the first design part and the second design part having the same or similar color or pattern, and the arrangement of the pattern is the same or similar. The first design portion and the second design portion, the first design portion and the second design portion having the same or substantially the same width direction dimensions, the first design portion and the second design portion having the same or substantially the same longitudinal dimension. The absorbent article according to claim 4, wherein at least one of the two design parts is included.
  6.  前記止着部が、
     前記パッチに固定される係止部材と、
     前記係止部材が積層され、前記係止部材と前記本体部とを幅方向に結ぶ基材シートとを有し、
     前記基材シートが、前記第一色彩と異なる色彩であるとともに前記一対の第一識別部と同系の第二同系色彩である
    請求項1~5の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening part,
    A locking member fixed to the patch,
    The locking member is laminated, and has a base sheet that connects the locking member and the main body in the width direction,
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the base sheet has a color different from the first color and a second similar color similar to the pair of first identification portions.
  7.  幅方向に延びる基準線を基準に前記一対の折曲線どうしの間に位置する部位が非肌面側から見て線対称又は略線対称な外観である吸収性物品であって、
     前記パッチが、前記一対の折曲線を幅方向に跨いで延在し、
     前記デザイン部は、前記他方で非肌面側から外観可能に設けられた前記第一デザイン部と前記一方で非肌面側から外観可能に設けられた第二デザイン部とを有し、前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部の外観が互いに同一又は類似しており、
     前記主部が、前記一対の折曲線よりも幅方向内側に配置されており、
     前記一対の第一識別部は、前記本体部及び前記主部とは異なる第二色彩であり、当該パッチの自由端をなし、
     前記止着部の少なくとも一部が前記第二色彩と同系の第二同系色彩である
    請求項1に記載の吸収性物品。
    An absorbent article having a portion located between the pair of folding curves based on a reference line extending in the width direction and having a line-symmetric or substantially line-symmetric appearance when viewed from the non-skin side,
    The patch extends across the pair of fold curves in the width direction,
    The design portion has the first design portion provided on the other side so as to be visible from the non-skin side, and the second design portion provided on the one side so as to be visible from the non-skin side. The appearance of the one design part and the second design part are the same or similar to each other,
    The main portion is disposed inward in the width direction than the pair of folding curves,
    The pair of first identification portions is a second color different from the main body portion and the main portion, forms a free end of the patch,
    The absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein at least a part of the fastening portion is a second similar color similar to the second color.
  8.  前記止着部が、
     前記パッチに固定される係止部材と、
     前記係止部材が積層され、前記係止部材と前記本体部とを幅方向に結ぶ基材シートとを有し、
     前記基材シートが、前記第二同系色彩である
    請求項7に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening part,
    A locking member fixed to the patch,
    The locking member is laminated, and has a base sheet that connects the locking member and the main body in the width direction,
    The absorbent article according to claim 7, wherein the base sheet is the second similar color.
  9.  前記止着部が、
     前記パッチに固定される係止部材と、
     前記係止部材が積層され、前記係止部材と前記本体部とを幅方向に結ぶ基材シートと、を有し、
     前記係止部材が、前記第二同系色彩である
    請求項7に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening part,
    A locking member fixed to the patch,
    The locking member is laminated, and has a base material sheet that connects the locking member and the main body in the width direction,
    The absorbent article according to claim 7, wherein the locking member is the second similar color.
  10.  前記止着部が、前記展開状態において、前記基材シートで前記係止部材が非肌面側から覆われ、前記係止部材の前記第二同系色彩が透けて非肌面側から見える所定の透光性を有する
    請求項9に記載の吸収性物品。
    In the unfolded state, the fastening portion is configured such that the locking member is covered with the base sheet from the non-skin side, and the second similar color of the locking member is seen through from the non-skin side. The absorptive article according to claim 9 which has translucency.
  11.  前記所定の透光性は、前記基材シートの全光線透過率が65~99%である
    請求項10に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to claim 10, wherein the predetermined light transmittance is such that the total light transmittance of the base sheet is 65 to 99%.
  12.  前記基材シートが、フィルム化された部分を有する
    請求項9~11の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 9 to 11, wherein the base sheet has a portion formed into a film.
  13.  前記主部の全光線透過率が65~99%である
    請求項7~12の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 7 to 12, wherein the main part has a total light transmittance of 65 to 99%.
  14.  前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部が前記一対の折曲線どうしの幅方向内側に配置された
    請求項7~13の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 7 to 13, wherein the first design portion and the second design portion are arranged inside the pair of folding curves in the width direction.
  15.  前記幅方向に延びる前記基準線を基準に全体形状が線対称又は略線対称である
    請求項7~14の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 7 to 14, wherein the overall shape is line-symmetric or substantially line-symmetric with respect to the reference line extending in the width direction.
  16.  外観が互いに同一又は類似する前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部には、色彩又は模様が同一又は類似する前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、前記模様の配置が同一又は類似する前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、幅方向寸法が同一又は略同一の前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、長手方向寸法が同一又は略同一の前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部の少なくとも何れかが含まれる
    請求項7~15の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    In the first design part and the second design part having the same or similar appearance, the first design part and the second design part having the same or similar color or pattern, and the arrangement of the pattern is the same or similar. The first design portion and the second design portion, the first design portion and the second design portion having the same or substantially the same width direction dimension, the first design portion and the second design portion having the same or substantially the same longitudinal dimension. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 7 to 15, wherein at least one of the two design parts is included.
  17.  前記本体部は、肌面側の肌面側シートと非肌面側の非肌面側シートとが積層され、
     前記止着部は、前記第一色彩と同系の第一同系色彩の基材シートと前記第一色彩及び前記第一同系色彩とは異なる第三色彩の係止部材とを有し、
     前記止着部が、
     前記基材シートの幅方向内側の挟装部が前記肌面側シートと前記非肌面側シートとの間に挟装され、当該基材シートのうち前記挟装部を除く延出部が前記本体部から延出し、
     前記挟装部に対して前記延出部が幅方向外側に配置された展開状態において、前記基材シートの幅方向外側かつ肌面側に前記係止部材が積層され、
     前記挟装部と前記延出部との間に前記肌面側シートを挟んだ状態に折り畳まれた第一状態において、肌面側から前記基材シートを通して前記係止部材の前記第三色彩が透けて見える所定の第一透光性を有し、
     前記第一状態の前記延出部を前記肌面側シートに対面させて重ね合わせた状態に折り畳まれた第二状態において、肌面側から前記非肌面側シート,前記挟装部及び前記肌面側シートを通して前記係止部材の前記第三色彩が透けて見える第二透光性を有し、
     前記第一透光性は、前記基材シートの全光線透過率が65~99%であることであり、
     前記第二透光性は、前記非肌面側シート,前記挟装部及び前記肌面側シートの全光線透過率が50~99%である
    請求項1~5の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The body portion is a laminate of a skin-side sheet on the skin-side and a non-skin-side sheet on the non-skin side,
    The fastening portion has a base sheet of a first similar color similar to the first color and a locking member of a third color different from the first color and the first similar color,
    The fastening part,
    The sandwiching portion on the inner side in the width direction of the base sheet is sandwiched between the skin side sheet and the non-skin side sheet, and the extending portion of the base sheet excluding the sandwiching portion is the extending portion. Extending from the main body,
    In the unfolded state in which the extending portion is arranged on the outer side in the width direction with respect to the sandwiching portion, the locking member is laminated on the outer side in the width direction and on the skin surface side of the base sheet,
    In the first state in which the skin-side sheet is sandwiched between the sandwiching portion and the extending portion, the third color of the locking member is passed through the base sheet from the skin side. Has a predetermined first translucency that can be seen through,
    In the second state in which the extension portion in the first state is folded so as to face the skin side sheet and be superposed, the non-skin side sheet, the sandwiching portion, and the skin from the skin side. Having a second translucency in which the third color of the locking member can be seen through the surface side sheet,
    The first light-transmitting property is that the base sheet has a total light transmittance of 65 to 99%,
    6. The second light-transmitting member according to claim 1, wherein the total light transmittance of the non-skin side sheet, the sandwiching portion and the skin side sheet is 50 to 99%. Absorbent articles.
  18.  前記本体部は、肌面側の肌面側シートと非肌面側の非肌面側シートとが積層され、
     前記止着部は、前記第一色彩と同系の第一同系色彩の基材シートと前記第一色彩及び前記第一同系色彩とは異なる第三色彩の係止部材とを有し、
     前記止着部が、
     前記基材シートの幅方向内側の挟装部が前記肌面側シートと前記非肌面側シートとの間に挟装され、当該基材シートのうち前記挟装部を除く延出部が前記本体部から延出し、
     前記挟装部に対して前記延出部が幅方向外側に配置された展開状態において、前記基材シートの幅方向外側かつ肌面側に前記係止部材が積層され、
     前記基材シートが、複数の貫通孔を有し、前記貫通孔の外接円の孔径が0.1~1.0mmである
    請求項1~5の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The body portion is a laminate of a skin-side sheet on the skin-side and a non-skin-side sheet on the non-skin side,
    The fastening portion has a base sheet of a first similar color similar to the first color and a locking member of a third color different from the first color and the first similar color,
    The fastening part,
    The sandwiching portion on the inner side in the width direction of the base sheet is sandwiched between the skin side sheet and the non-skin side sheet, and the extending portion of the base sheet excluding the sandwiching portion is the extending portion. Extending from the main body,
    In the unfolded state in which the extending portion is arranged on the outer side in the width direction with respect to the sandwiching portion, the locking member is laminated on the outer side in the width direction and on the skin surface side of the base sheet,
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the base sheet has a plurality of through holes, and a hole diameter of a circumscribed circle of the through holes is 0.1 to 1.0 mm.
  19.  前記本体部は、肌面側の肌面側シートと非肌面側の非肌面側シートとが積層され、
     前記止着部は、前記第一色彩と同系の第一同系色彩の基材シートと前記第一色彩及び前記第一同系色彩とは異なる第三色彩の係止部材とを有し、
     前記止着部が、
     前記基材シートの幅方向内側の挟装部が前記肌面側シートと前記非肌面側シートとの間に挟装され、当該基材シートのうち前記挟装部を除く延出部が前記本体部から延出し、
     前記挟装部に対して前記延出部が幅方向外側に配置された展開状態において、前記基材シートの幅方向外側かつ肌面側に前記係止部材が積層され、
     前記基材シートが、フィルム化された部分を有し、前記フィルム化された部分の全光線透過率が65~99%である
    請求項1~5の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The body portion is a laminate of a skin-side sheet on the skin-side and a non-skin-side sheet on the non-skin side,
    The fastening portion has a base sheet of a first similar color similar to the first color and a locking member of a third color different from the first color and the first similar color,
    The fastening part,
    The sandwiching portion on the inner side in the width direction of the base sheet is sandwiched between the skin side sheet and the non-skin side sheet, and the extending portion of the base sheet excluding the sandwiching portion is the extending portion. Extending from the main body,
    In the unfolded state in which the extending portion is arranged on the outer side in the width direction with respect to the sandwiching portion, the locking member is laminated on the outer side in the width direction and on the skin surface side of the base sheet,
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the base sheet has a film-formed portion, and the film-formed portion has a total light transmittance of 65 to 99%.
  20.  前記本体部は、肌面側の肌面側シートと非肌面側の非肌面側シートとが積層され
     前記止着部は、全域に亘って前記第一色彩と同系の第一同系色彩の係止部材と、前記係止部材が積層された基材シートとを有し、
     前記止着部が、
     前記基材シートの幅方向内側の挟装部が前記肌面側シートと前記非肌面側シートとの間に挟装され、当該基材シートのうち前記挟装部を除く延出部が前記本体部から延出し、
     前記挟装部に対して前記延出部が幅方向外側に配置された展開状態において、前記基材シートの幅方向外側かつ肌面側に前記係止部材が積層され、前記延出部において当該基材シートに対して前記係止部材が積層される側の内層面のうち当該係止部材が積層されていない部位が前記第一色彩及び前記第一同系色彩とは異なる第三色彩であり、
     前記挟装部と前記延出部との間に前記肌面側シートを挟んだ状態に折り畳まれた第一状態において、肌面側から前記内層面の前記第三色彩が透けて見える所定の第一透光性を有し、
     前記第一状態の前記延出部を前記肌面側シートに対面させて重ね合わせた状態に折り畳まれた第二状態において、肌面側から前記内層面の前記第三色彩が透けて見える第二透光性を有する
    請求項1~5の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The body portion has a skin-side sheet on the skin side and a non-skin side sheet on the non-skin side, and the fastening portion has a first similar color similar to the first color over the entire area. Locking member, having a base material sheet on which the locking member is laminated,
    The fastening part,
    The sandwiching portion on the inner side in the width direction of the base sheet is sandwiched between the skin side sheet and the non-skin side sheet, and the extending portion of the base sheet excluding the sandwiching portion is the extending portion. Extending from the main body,
    In the unfolded state in which the extending portion is arranged on the outer side in the width direction with respect to the sandwiching portion, the locking member is laminated on the outer side in the width direction and on the skin surface side of the base sheet, and A portion of the inner layer on the side where the locking member is laminated with respect to the base sheet is a region where the locking member is not laminated is a third color different from the first color and the first similar color. ,
    In a first state in which the skin-side sheet is sandwiched between the sandwiching portion and the extending portion, a predetermined first state in which the third color of the inner layer surface can be seen from the skin surface side is seen. Has one translucency,
    In the second state in which the extending portion in the first state is folded so as to face the skin-side sheet and is superposed, the third color of the inner layer surface can be seen through from the skin surface side. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 1 to 5, which has translucency.
  21.  前記止着部の少なくとも一部が前記デザイン部の第四色彩と同系の第四同系色彩である
    請求項1~5の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein at least a part of the fastening part has a fourth similar color similar to the fourth color of the design part.
  22.  前記止着部が、
     前記パッチに固定される係止部材と、
     前記係止部材が積層され、前記係止部材と前記本体部とを幅方向に結ぶ基材シートとを有し、
     前記基材シートが前記第四同系色彩であり、
     前記係止部材が前記第一色彩と同系の第一同系色彩である
    請求項21に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening part,
    A locking member fixed to the patch,
    The locking member is laminated, and has a base sheet that connects the locking member and the main body in the width direction,
    The base sheet is the fourth similar color,
    22. The absorbent article according to claim 21, wherein the locking member is a first similar color similar to the first color.
  23.  前記止着部の少なくとも一部が前記一対の第一識別部の前記第二色彩とは異なる第五色彩である
    請求項1~5,21及び22の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    23. The absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein at least a part of the fastening portion has a fifth color different from the second color of the pair of first identification portions.
  24.  前記一対の第一識別部の前記第二色彩は、前記デザイン部の第四色彩とは異なる色彩であるとともに前記第四色彩よりも薄い色彩である
    請求項1~5及び21~23の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    24. The method according to claim 1, wherein the second color of the pair of first identification portions is different from the fourth color of the design portion and is lighter than the fourth color. 2. The absorbent article according to claim 1.
  25.  前記止着部は、前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の前記他方に固定され、
     前記デザイン部は、前記他方で非肌面側から外観可能に設けられるとともに前記股下部側に幅方向に沿う第一股下端縁の設けられた第一デザイン部と前記一方で非肌面側から外観可能に設けられるとともに前記股下部側に幅方向に沿う第二股下端縁の設けられた第二デザイン部とを有し、
     前記股下部において長手方向の中央位置かつ幅方向の左右対称位置に、肌面側から視覚的に識別可能な一対の第二識別部を備えた
    請求項1に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening portion is fixed to the other of the front body and the back body,
    The design portion is provided on the other side so as to be visible from the non-skin side and the first design portion provided with the first crotch lower edge along the width direction on the crotch side and the one from the non-skin side. Having a second design portion provided with a second crotch lower edge along the width direction on the crotch side as well as provided so as to be capable of being viewed,
    2. The absorbent article according to claim 1, further comprising a pair of second identification portions that can be visually identified from the skin side at a central position in the longitudinal direction and a symmetric position in the width direction in the crotch part.
  26.  前記止着部は、前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の前記他方に固定され、
     前記デザイン部は、前記他方で非肌面側から外観可能に設けられるとともに前記股下部側に幅方向に沿う第一股下端縁の設けられた第一デザイン部と前記一方で非肌面側から外観可能に設けられるとともに前記股下部側に幅方向に沿う第二股下端縁の設けられた第二デザイン部とを有し、
     前記股下部において長手方向の中央位置かつ幅方向の左右対称位置で、前記本体部の肌面側に設けられた立体ギャザーよりも幅方向外側に配置された一対の第二識別部を備えた
    請求項1に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening portion is fixed to the other of the front body and the back body,
    The design portion is provided on the other side so as to be visible from the non-skin side and the first design portion provided with the first crotch lower edge along the width direction on the crotch side and the one from the non-skin side. Having a second design portion provided with a second crotch lower edge along the width direction on the crotch side as well as provided so as to be capable of being viewed,
    Claims: A pair of second identification portions disposed at a center position in a longitudinal direction and a symmetrical position in a width direction in the crotch portion and located outside in a width direction than three-dimensional gathers provided on a skin surface side of the main body portion. Item 2. The absorbent article according to Item 1.
  27.  前記止着部は、前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の他方に固定されており、
     前記デザイン部は、前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の他方で非肌面側から外観可能に設けられるとともに前記股下部側に幅方向に沿う第一股下端縁の設けられた第一デザイン部と前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の一方で非肌面側から外観可能に設けられるとともに前記股下部側に幅方向に沿う第二股下端縁の設けられた第二デザイン部とを有しており、
     前記股下部において長手方向の中央位置かつ幅方向の左右対称位置に、非肌面側から視覚的に識別可能な一対の第二識別部を備えた
    請求項1に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening portion is fixed to the other of the front body and the back body,
    The design portion is provided on the other of the front body and the back body so as to be visible from the non-skin side, and the first design portion provided with a first crotch lower edge along the width direction on the crotch side, and A front design and a second design portion provided with a second crotch lower edge along the width direction on the crotch side while being provided so as to be able to be viewed from the non-skin side of the back body,
    2. The absorbent article according to claim 1, further comprising a pair of second identification portions that are visually identifiable from a non-skin side at a central position in the longitudinal direction and a symmetric position in the width direction in the crotch part.
  28.  前記デザイン部は、前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部のそれぞれの長手方向寸法が同一又は略同一に設定された
    請求項27に記載の吸収性物品。
    28. The absorbent article according to claim 27, wherein, in the design portion, the first design portion and the second design portion have the same or substantially the same longitudinal dimension.
  29.  当該吸収性物品の長手方向の端部に対して、前記第一股下端縁が長手方向に離間する第一股下離間寸法と前記第二股下端縁が長手方向に離間する第二股下離間寸法とが同一又は略同一に設定された
    請求項27又は28に記載の吸収性物品。
    For the end in the longitudinal direction of the absorbent article, a first crotch separation dimension in which the first crotch lower edge is separated in the longitudinal direction and a second crotch separation dimension in which the second crotch lower edge is separated in the longitudinal direction. The absorbent article according to claim 27 or 28, wherein is set the same or substantially the same.
  30.  前記第一デザイン部には前記股下部とは反対側に幅方向に沿う第一前後端縁が設けられ、
     前記第二デザイン部には前記股下部とは反対側に幅方向に沿う第二前後端縁が設けられ、
     当該吸収性物品の長手方向の端部に対して、前記第一前後端縁の離間する第一前後離間寸法と前記第二前後端縁の離間する第二前後離間寸法とが同一又は略同一に設定された
    請求項27~29の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The first design portion is provided with first front and rear edges along the width direction on the side opposite to the crotch portion,
    The second design portion is provided with second front and rear edges along the width direction on the side opposite to the crotch portion,
    For the end in the longitudinal direction of the absorbent article, the first front and rear separation distance of the first front and rear edge and the second front and rear separation distance of the second front and rear edge are the same or substantially the same. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 27 to 29, which is set.
  31.  前記一対の第二識別部は、前記展開状態において前記一対の折曲線よりも幅方向外側に配置された
    請求項27~30の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 27 to 30, wherein the pair of second identification portions is arranged outside the pair of fold curves in the width direction in the expanded state.
  32.  前記一対の第二識別部は、非肌面側から視覚的に識別可能である
    請求項27~31の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 27 to 31, wherein the pair of second identification portions is visually identifiable from a non-skin side.
  33.  前記一対の第二識別部は、前記本体部の肌面側に設けられた立体ギャザーよりも幅方向外側に配置された
    請求項27~31の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 27 to 31, wherein the pair of second identification portions are arranged outside in a width direction than three-dimensional gathers provided on a skin surface side of the main body portion.
  34.  前記パッチは、前記一対の折曲線を幅方向に跨いで延在しており、
     前記デザイン部は、前記他方で非肌面側から外観可能に設けられた前記第一デザイン部と前記一方で非肌面側から外観可能に設けられた第二デザイン部とを有し、前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部の外観が互いに同一又は類似するデザイン部と、を備え、
     前記主部が、前記一対の折曲線よりも幅方向内側に配置されており、
     前記一対の第一識別部の前記第二色彩が、前記本体部及び前記主部とは異なる色彩である
    請求項1に記載の吸収性物品。
    The patch extends across the pair of fold curves in the width direction,
    The design portion includes the first design portion provided on the other side so as to be visible from the non-skin side, and the second design portion provided on the other side so as to be visible from the non-skin side. One design part and a design part in which the appearance of the second design part is the same or similar to each other,
    The main portion is disposed inward in the width direction than the pair of folding curves,
    The absorbent article according to claim 1, wherein the second color of the pair of first identification portions is a color different from the main body portion and the main portion.
  35.  前記止着部の少なくとも一部が前記一対の第一識別部と同系の第二同系色彩である
    請求項34に記載の吸収性物品。
    35. The absorbent article according to claim 34, wherein at least a part of the fastening portion has a second similar color similar to the pair of first identification portions.
  36.  前記止着部が、
     前記パッチに固定される係止部材と、
     前記係止部材が積層され、前記係止部材と前記本体部とを幅方向に結ぶ基材シートとを有し、
     前記基材シートが、前記第一色彩と異なる色彩であるとともに前記一対の第一識別部と同系の第二同系色彩である
    請求項35に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening part,
    A locking member fixed to the patch,
    The locking member is laminated, and has a base sheet that connects the locking member and the main body in the width direction,
    36. The absorbent article according to claim 35, wherein the base sheet has a color different from the first color and a second similar color similar to the pair of first identification portions.
  37.  前記止着部が、
     前記パッチに固定される係止部材と、
     前記係止部材が積層され、前記係止部材と前記本体部とを幅方向に結ぶ基材シートと、を有し、
     前記係止部材が前記第二同系色彩である
    請求項35に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening part,
    A locking member fixed to the patch,
    The locking member is laminated, and has a base material sheet that connects the locking member and the main body in the width direction,
    The absorbent article according to claim 35, wherein the locking member is the second similar color.
  38.  前記止着部が、全域に亘って前記第一色彩と同系の第一同系色彩である
    請求項34に記載の吸収性物品。
    35. The absorbent article according to claim 34, wherein the fastening portion is a first similar color similar to the first color over the entire area.
  39.  前記パッチが、透明もしくは半透明であり、前記本体部と異なる模様を有する
    請求項34~38の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    39. The absorbent article according to claim 34, wherein the patch is transparent or translucent, and has a pattern different from that of the main body.
  40.  前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部の外観が互いに同一又は類似する前記デザイン部には、色彩又は模様が同一又は類似する前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、前記模様の配置が同一又は類似する前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、幅方向寸法が同一又は略同一の前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、長手方向寸法が同一又は略同一の前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部の少なくとも何れかが含まれる
    請求項34~39の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The first design portion and the second design portion, in which the appearances of the first design portion and the second design portion are the same or similar to each other, have the same color or pattern as the first design portion and the second design portion, and the arrangement of the pattern. The same or similar first design portion and the second design portion, the first design portion and the second design portion having the same or substantially the same width dimension, the first design having the same or substantially the same longitudinal size. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 34 to 39, wherein at least one of the part and the second design part is included.
  41.  吸収体の幅方向の両端部において長手方向へ仮想的に延びる一対の折曲線で三つ折りにされた折畳状態から前記一対の折曲線での折り畳みが展開された平面状の展開状態に展開されて装着され、前記展開状態において肌面側を向く内面のうち前記一対の折曲線よりも幅方向外側の第一面が前記一対の折曲線よりも幅方向内側の第二面に対して前記折畳状態で対面して重ね合わせられ、製品出荷時において前記折畳状態をなす吸収性物品であって、
     前記吸収体を有し、前身頃,股下部及び後身頃に亘って設けられ、全域に亘って実質的に同じ第一色彩の本体部と、
     前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の一方において、前記展開状態で前記本体部に対して幅方向の端部から外側に延出する止着部と、
     前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の他方において、前記一対の折曲線を幅方向に跨いで延在し、前記本体部に積層され、最も非肌面側に配置され、前記止着部が固定されるパッチと、
     前記他方で非肌面側から外観可能に設けられた第一デザイン部と前記一方で非肌面側から外観可能に設けられた第二デザイン部とを有し、前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部の外観が互いに同一又は類似するデザイン部と、を備え、
     前記パッチが、
     前記第二デザイン部に対して非肌面側かつ前記一対の折曲線よりも幅方向内側に配置され、透明もしくは半透明である、又は、前記第二デザイン部と一体的に当該第二デザイン部の外観を構成する主部と、
     当該パッチにおいて延在方向の両端部に位置し、前記本体部及び前記主部とは異なる第二色彩である一対の第一識別部とを有する
    吸収性物品。
    At the both ends in the width direction of the absorber, the pair of fold curves are virtually folded in the longitudinal direction, and the fold state of the absorber is folded into three-fold form. In the deployed state, the first surface of the inner surface facing the skin surface side in the width direction outside of the pair of fold curves is folded against the second surface in the width direction inside of the pair of fold curves. It is an absorbent article that is superimposed facing each other in a tatami state and is in the folded state at the time of product shipment,
    A main body of the first color, which has the absorber and is provided over the front body, the crotch and the back body, and is substantially the same over the entire area;
    In one of the front body and the rear body, a fastening portion extending outward from the widthwise end of the main body in the deployed state,
    On the other of the front body and the back body, the pair of folding curves extends across the width direction, is stacked on the main body, is arranged on the most non-skin side, and the fastening portion is fixed. Patches and
    The other has a first design portion provided so as to be visible from the non-skin side and a second design portion provided so as to be visible from the one non-skin side, and the first design portion and the second Two design parts having the same or similar appearance to each other,
    Said patch,
    The second design portion is disposed on the non-skin surface side and in the width direction inner side of the pair of fold curves with respect to the second design portion, and is transparent or translucent, or integrally with the second design portion. Main part constituting the appearance of
    An absorbent article having a pair of first identification portions located at both ends in the extending direction of the patch and having a second color different from the main body portion and the main portion.
  42.  前記止着部の少なくとも一部が前記一対の第一識別部と同系の第二同系色彩である
    請求項41に記載の吸収性物品。
    42. The absorbent article according to claim 41, wherein at least a part of the fastening portion has a second similar color similar to the pair of first identification portions.
  43.  前記止着部が、
     前記パッチに固定される係止部材と、
     前記係止部材が積層され、前記係止部材と前記本体部とを幅方向に結ぶ基材シートとを有し、
     前記基材シートが、前記第一色彩と異なる色彩であるとともに前記一対の第一識別部と同系の第二同系色彩である
    請求項42に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening part,
    A locking member fixed to the patch,
    The locking member is laminated, and has a base sheet that connects the locking member and the main body in the width direction,
    43. The absorbent article according to claim 42, wherein the base sheet has a color different from the first color and a second similar color similar to the pair of first identification portions.
  44.  前記止着部が、
     前記パッチに固定される係止部材と、
     前記係止部材が積層され、前記係止部材と前記本体部とを幅方向に結ぶ基材シートと、を有し、
     前記係止部材が前記第二同系色彩である
    請求項42に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening part,
    A locking member fixed to the patch,
    The locking member is laminated, and has a base material sheet that connects the locking member and the main body in the width direction,
    43. The absorbent article according to claim 42, wherein the locking member is the second similar color.
  45.  前記止着部が、全域に亘って前記第一色彩と同系の第一同系色彩である
    請求項41に記載の吸収性物品。
    42. The absorbent article according to claim 41, wherein the fastening portion is a first similar color similar to the first color over the entire area.
  46.  前記パッチが、透明もしくは半透明であり、前記本体部と異なる模様を有する
    請求項41~45の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 41 to 45, wherein the patch is transparent or translucent, and has a pattern different from that of the main body.
  47.  前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部の外観が互いに同一又は類似する前記デザイン部には、色彩又は模様が同一又は類似する前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、前記模様の配置が同一又は類似する前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、幅方向寸法が同一又は略同一の前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、長手方向寸法が同一又は略同一の前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部の少なくとも何れかが含まれる
    請求項41~46の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The first design portion and the second design portion, in which the appearances of the first design portion and the second design portion are the same or similar to each other, have the same color or pattern as the first design portion and the second design portion, and the arrangement of the pattern. The same or similar first design portion and the second design portion, the first design portion and the second design portion having the same or substantially the same width dimension, the first design having the same or substantially the same longitudinal size. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 41 to 46, comprising at least one of a part and the second design part.
  48.  幅方向に延びる基準線を基準に前記一対の折曲線どうしの間に位置する部位が非肌面側から見て線対称又は略線対称な外観である吸収性物品であって、
     前記一対の第一識別部は、当該パッチの自由端をなし、
     前記止着部の少なくとも一部が前記第二色彩と同系の第二同系色彩である
    請求項41に記載の吸収性物品。
    An absorbent article having a portion located between the pair of folding curves based on a reference line extending in the width direction and having a line-symmetric or substantially line-symmetric appearance when viewed from the non-skin side,
    The pair of first identification units form a free end of the patch,
    42. The absorbent article according to claim 41, wherein at least a part of the fastening portion is a second similar color similar to the second color.
  49.  前記止着部が、
     前記パッチに固定される係止部材と、
     前記係止部材が積層され、前記係止部材と前記本体部とを幅方向に結ぶ基材シートとを有し、
     前記基材シートが、前記第二同系色彩である
    請求項48に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening part,
    A locking member fixed to the patch,
    The locking member is laminated, and has a base sheet that connects the locking member and the main body in the width direction,
    49. The absorbent article according to claim 48, wherein the base sheet is the second similar color.
  50.  前記止着部が、
     前記パッチに固定される係止部材と、
     前記係止部材が積層され、前記係止部材と前記本体部とを幅方向に結ぶ基材シートと、を有し、
     前記係止部材が、前記第二同系色彩である
    請求項48に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening part,
    A locking member fixed to the patch,
    The locking member is laminated, and has a base material sheet that connects the locking member and the main body in the width direction,
    49. The absorbent article according to claim 48, wherein the locking member is the second similar color.
  51.  前記止着部が、前記展開状態において、前記基材シートで前記係止部材が非肌面側から覆われ、前記係止部材の前記第二同系色彩が透けて非肌面側から見える所定の透光性を有する
    請求項50に記載の吸収性物品。
    In the unfolded state, the fixing portion is configured such that the locking member is covered with the base sheet from the non-skin side, and the second similar color of the locking member is transparent and is visible from the non-skin side. The absorptive article according to claim 50 having translucency.
  52.  前記所定の透光性は、前記基材シートの全光線透過率が65~99%である
    請求項51に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to claim 51, wherein the predetermined light transmittance is such that the total light transmittance of the base sheet is 65 to 99%.
  53.  前記基材シートが、フィルム化された部分を有する
    請求項50~52の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 50 to 52, wherein the base sheet has a portion formed into a film.
  54.  前記主部の全光線透過率が65~99%である
    請求項48~53の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 48 to 53, wherein the main portion has a total light transmittance of 65 to 99%.
  55.  前記パッチが、透明もしくは半透明であり、前記本体部と異なる模様を有する
    請求項48~54の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 48 to 54, wherein the patch is transparent or translucent, and has a pattern different from that of the main body.
  56.  前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部の外観が互いに同一又は類似する前記デザイン部には、色彩又は模様が同一又は類似する前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、前記模様の配置が同一又は類似する前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、幅方向寸法が同一又は略同一の前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部、長手方向寸法が同一又は略同一の前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部の少なくとも何れかが含まれる
    請求項48~55の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The first design portion and the second design portion, in which the appearances of the first design portion and the second design portion are the same or similar to each other, have the same color or pattern as the first design portion and the second design portion, and the arrangement of the pattern. The same or similar first design portion and the second design portion, the first design portion and the second design portion having the same or substantially the same width dimension, the first design having the same or substantially the same longitudinal size. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 48 to 55, wherein at least one of the part and the second design part is included.
  57.  前記本体部は、肌面側の肌面側シートと非肌面側の非肌面側シートとが積層され、
     前記止着部は、前記第一色彩と同系の第一同系色彩の基材シートと前記第一色彩及び前記第一同系色彩とは異なる第三色彩の係止部材とを有し、
     前記止着部が、
     前記基材シートの幅方向内側の挟装部が前記肌面側シートと前記非肌面側シートとの間に挟装され、当該基材シートのうち前記挟装部を除く延出部が前記本体部から延出し、
     前記挟装部に対して前記延出部が幅方向外側に配置された展開状態において、前記基材シートの幅方向外側かつ肌面側に前記係止部材が積層され、
     前記挟装部と前記延出部との間に前記肌面側シートを挟んだ状態に折り畳まれた第一状態において、肌面側から前記基材シートを通して前記係止部材の前記第三色彩が透けて見える所定の第一透光性を有し、
     前記第一状態の前記延出部を前記肌面側シートに対面させて重ね合わせた状態に折り畳まれた第二状態において、肌面側から前記非肌面側シート,前記挟装部及び前記肌面側シートを通して前記係止部材の前記第三色彩が透けて見える第二透光性を有し、
     前記第一透光性は、前記基材シートの全光線透過率が65~99%であることであり、
     前記第二透光性は、前記非肌面側シート,前記挟装部及び前記肌面側シートの全光線透過率が50~99%である
    請求項41に記載の吸収性物品。
    The body portion is a laminate of a skin-side sheet on the skin-side and a non-skin-side sheet on the non-skin side,
    The fastening portion has a base sheet of a first similar color similar to the first color and a locking member of a third color different from the first color and the first similar color,
    The fastening part,
    The sandwiching portion on the inner side in the width direction of the base sheet is sandwiched between the skin side sheet and the non-skin side sheet, and the extending portion of the base sheet excluding the sandwiching portion is the extending portion. Extending from the main body,
    In the unfolded state in which the extending portion is arranged on the outer side in the width direction with respect to the sandwiching portion, the locking member is laminated on the outer side in the width direction and on the skin surface side of the base sheet,
    In the first state in which the skin-side sheet is sandwiched between the sandwiching portion and the extending portion, the third color of the locking member is passed through the base sheet from the skin side. Has a predetermined first translucency that can be seen through,
    In the second state in which the extension portion in the first state is folded so as to face the skin side sheet and be superposed, the non-skin side sheet, the sandwiching portion, and the skin from the skin side. Having a second translucency in which the third color of the locking member can be seen through the surface side sheet,
    The first light-transmitting property is that the base sheet has a total light transmittance of 65 to 99%,
    42. The absorbent article according to claim 41, wherein the second light-transmitting property is such that the total light transmittance of the non-skin side sheet, the sandwiching portion and the skin side sheet is 50 to 99%.
  58.  前記本体部は、肌面側の肌面側シートと非肌面側の非肌面側シートとが積層され、
     前記止着部は、前記第一色彩と同系の第一同系色彩の基材シートと前記第一色彩及び前記第一同系色彩とは異なる第三色彩の係止部材とを有し、
     前記止着部が、
     前記基材シートの幅方向内側の挟装部が前記肌面側シートと前記非肌面側シートとの間に挟装され、当該基材シートのうち前記挟装部を除く延出部が前記本体部から延出し、
     前記挟装部に対して前記延出部が幅方向外側に配置された展開状態において、前記基材シートの幅方向外側かつ肌面側に前記係止部材が積層され、
     前記基材シートが、複数の貫通孔を有し、前記貫通孔の外接円の孔径が0.1~1.0mmである
    請求項41に記載の吸収性物品。
    The body portion is a laminate of a skin-side sheet on the skin-side and a non-skin-side sheet on the non-skin side,
    The fastening portion has a base sheet of a first similar color similar to the first color and a locking member of a third color different from the first color and the first similar color,
    The fastening part,
    The sandwiching portion on the inner side in the width direction of the base sheet is sandwiched between the skin side sheet and the non-skin side sheet, and the extending portion of the base sheet excluding the sandwiching portion is the extending portion. Extending from the main body,
    In the unfolded state in which the extending portion is arranged on the outer side in the width direction with respect to the sandwiching portion, the locking member is laminated on the outer side in the width direction and on the skin surface side of the base sheet,
    42. The absorbent article according to claim 41, wherein the base sheet has a plurality of through holes, and a hole diameter of a circumscribed circle of the through holes is 0.1 to 1.0 mm.
  59.  前記本体部は、肌面側の肌面側シートと非肌面側の非肌面側シートとが積層され、
     前記止着部は、前記第一色彩と同系の第一同系色彩の基材シートと前記第一色彩及び前記第一同系色彩とは異なる第三色彩の係止部材とを有し、
     前記止着部が、
     前記基材シートの幅方向内側の挟装部が前記肌面側シートと前記非肌面側シートとの間に挟装され、当該基材シートのうち前記挟装部を除く延出部が前記本体部から延出し、
     前記挟装部に対して前記延出部が幅方向外側に配置された展開状態において、前記基材シートの幅方向外側かつ肌面側に前記係止部材が積層され、
     前記基材シートが、フィルム化された部分を有し、前記フィルム化された部分の全光線透過率が65~99%である
    請求項41に記載の吸収性物品。
    The body portion is a laminate of a skin-side sheet on the skin-side and a non-skin-side sheet on the non-skin side,
    The fastening portion has a base sheet of a first similar color similar to the first color and a locking member of a third color different from the first color and the first similar color,
    The fastening part,
    The sandwiching portion on the inner side in the width direction of the base sheet is sandwiched between the skin side sheet and the non-skin side sheet, and the extending portion of the base sheet excluding the sandwiching portion is the extending portion. Extending from the main body,
    In the unfolded state in which the extending portion is arranged on the outer side in the width direction with respect to the sandwiching portion, the locking member is laminated on the outer side in the width direction and on the skin surface side of the base sheet,
    42. The absorbent article according to claim 41, wherein the base sheet has a film-formed portion, and the film-formed portion has a total light transmittance of 65 to 99%.
  60.  前記本体部は、肌面側の肌面側シートと非肌面側の非肌面側シートとが積層され、
     前記止着部は、全域に亘って前記第一色彩と同系の第一同系色彩の係止部材と、前記係止部材が積層された基材シートとを有し、
     前記止着部が、
     前記基材シートの幅方向内側の挟装部が前記肌面側シートと前記非肌面側シートとの間に挟装され、当該基材シートのうち前記挟装部を除く延出部が前記本体部から延出し、
     前記挟装部に対して前記延出部が幅方向外側に配置された展開状態において、前記基材シートの幅方向外側かつ肌面側に前記係止部材が積層され、前記延出部において当該基材シートに対して前記係止部材が積層される側の内層面のうち当該係止部材が積層されていない部位が前記第一色彩及び前記第一同系色彩とは異なる第三色彩であり、
     前記挟装部と前記延出部との間に前記肌面側シートを挟んだ状態に折り畳まれた第一状態において、肌面側から前記内層面の前記第三色彩が透けて見える所定の第一透光性を有し、
     前記第一状態の前記延出部を前記肌面側シートに対面させて重ね合わせた状態に折り畳まれた第二状態において、肌面側から前記内層面の前記第三色彩が透けて見える第二透光性を有する
    請求項41に記載の吸収性物品。
    The body portion is a laminate of a skin-side sheet on the skin-side and a non-skin-side sheet on the non-skin side,
    The fastening portion has a locking member of a first similar color similar to the first color over the entire area, and a base sheet on which the locking member is laminated,
    The fastening part,
    The sandwiching portion on the inner side in the width direction of the base sheet is sandwiched between the skin side sheet and the non-skin side sheet, and the extending portion of the base sheet excluding the sandwiching portion is the extending portion. Extending from the main body,
    In the unfolded state in which the extending portion is arranged on the outer side in the width direction with respect to the sandwiching portion, the locking member is laminated on the outer side in the width direction and on the skin surface side of the base sheet, and A portion of the inner layer on the side where the locking member is laminated with respect to the base sheet is a region where the locking member is not laminated is a third color different from the first color and the first similar color. ,
    In a first state in which the skin-side sheet is sandwiched between the sandwiching portion and the extending portion, a predetermined first state in which the third color of the inner layer surface can be seen from the skin surface side is seen. Has one translucency,
    In the second state in which the extending portion in the first state is folded so as to face the skin-side sheet and is superposed, the third color of the inner layer surface can be seen through from the skin surface side. The absorptive article according to claim 41 which has translucency.
  61.  前記止着部の少なくとも一部が前記デザイン部の第四色彩と同系の第四同系色彩である
    請求項41に記載の吸収性物品。
    42. The absorbent article according to claim 41, wherein at least a part of the fastening portion is a fourth similar color similar to the fourth color of the design portion.
  62.  前記止着部が、
     前記パッチに固定される係止部材と、
     前記係止部材が積層され、前記係止部材と前記本体部とを幅方向に結ぶ基材シートとを有し、
     前記基材シートが前記第四同系色彩であり、
     前記係止部材が前記第一色彩と同系の第一同系色彩である
    請求項61に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening part,
    A locking member fixed to the patch,
    The locking member is laminated, and has a base sheet that connects the locking member and the main body in the width direction,
    The base sheet is the fourth similar color,
    62. The absorbent article according to claim 61, wherein the locking member is a first similar color similar to the first color.
  63.  前記止着部の少なくとも一部が前記一対の第一識別部の前記第二色彩とは異なる第五色彩である
    請求項41,61及び62の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 41, 61 and 62, wherein at least a part of the fastening portion is a fifth color different from the second color of the pair of first identification portions.
  64.  前記一対の第一識別部の前記第二色彩は、前記デザイン部の第四色彩とは異なる色彩であるとともに前記第四色彩よりも薄い色彩である
    請求項41及び61~63の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    64. The second color of the pair of first identification portions, wherein the second color is different from the fourth color of the design portion and is lighter than the fourth color. 3. The absorbent article according to claim 1.
  65.  前記止着部は、前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の前記他方に固定され、
     前記第一デザイン部には前記股下部側に幅方向に沿う第一股下端縁の設けられており、前記第二デザイン部には記股下部側に幅方向に沿う第二股下端縁の設けられており、
     前記股下部において長手方向の中央位置かつ幅方向の左右対称位置に、肌面側から視覚的に識別可能な一対の第二識別部を備えた
    請求項41~64の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening portion is fixed to the other of the front body and the back body,
    The first design portion is provided with a first crotch lower edge along the width direction on the crotch side, and the second design portion is provided with a second crotch lower edge along the width direction on the crotch portion side. Has been
    65. The method according to any one of claims 41 to 64, further comprising a pair of second identification portions that are visually identifiable from the skin surface side at a central position in the longitudinal direction and a symmetric position in the width direction in the crotch portion. Absorbent articles.
  66.  前記止着部は、前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の前記他方に固定され、
     前記第一デザイン部には前記股下部側に幅方向に沿う第一股下端縁の設けられており、前記第二デザイン部には記股下部側に幅方向に沿う第二股下端縁の設けられており、
     前記股下部において長手方向の中央位置かつ幅方向の左右対称位置で、前記本体部の肌面側に設けられた立体ギャザーよりも幅方向外側に配置された一対の第二識別部を備えた
    請求項41~64の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening portion is fixed to the other of the front body and the back body,
    The first design portion is provided with a first crotch lower edge along the width direction on the crotch side, and the second design portion is provided with a second crotch lower edge along the width direction on the crotch portion side. Has been
    Claims: A pair of second identification portions disposed at a center position in a longitudinal direction and a symmetrical position in a width direction in the crotch portion and located outside in a width direction than three-dimensional gathers provided on a skin surface side of the main body portion. 65. The absorbent article according to any one of items 41 to 64.
  67.  前記止着部は、前記前身頃及び前記後身頃の他方に固定されており、
     前記第一デザイン部には前記股下部側に幅方向に沿う第一股下端縁が設けられており、前記第二デザイン部には前記股下部側に幅方向に沿う第二股下端縁が設けられており、
     前記股下部において長手方向の中央位置かつ幅方向の左右対称位置に、非肌面側から視覚的に識別可能な一対の第二識別部と、を備えた
    請求項41~64の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The fastening portion is fixed to the other of the front body and the back body,
    The first design portion is provided with a first crotch lower edge along the width direction on the crotch side, and the second design portion is provided with a second crotch lower edge along the width direction on the crotch side. Has been
    65. A pair of second identification portions visually identifiable from the non-skin side at a central position in the longitudinal direction and a symmetric position in the width direction in the crotch portion, according to any one of claims 41 to 64. 3. The absorbent article according to claim 1.
  68.  前記デザイン部は、前記第一デザイン部及び前記第二デザイン部のそれぞれの長手方向寸法が同一又は略同一に設定された
    請求項67に記載の吸収性物品。
    68. The absorbent article according to claim 67, wherein the design portion has the same or substantially the same longitudinal dimension as the first design portion and the second design portion.
  69.  当該吸収性物品の長手方向の端部に対して、前記第一股下端縁が長手方向に離間する第一股下離間寸法と前記第二股下端縁が長手方向に離間する第二股下離間寸法とが同一又は略同一に設定された
    請求項67又は68に記載の吸収性物品。
    For the end in the longitudinal direction of the absorbent article, a first crotch separation dimension in which the first crotch lower edge is separated in the longitudinal direction and a second crotch separation dimension in which the second crotch lower edge is separated in the longitudinal direction. The absorbent article according to claim 67 or 68, wherein is set to be the same or substantially the same.
  70.  前記第一デザイン部には前記股下部とは反対側に幅方向に沿う第一前後端縁が設けられ、
     前記第二デザイン部には前記股下部とは反対側に幅方向に沿う第二前後端縁が設けられ、
     当該吸収性物品の長手方向の端部に対して、前記第一前後端縁の離間する第一前後離間寸法と前記第二前後端縁の離間する第二前後離間寸法とが同一又は略同一に設定された
    請求項67~69の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    The first design portion is provided with first front and rear edges along the width direction on the side opposite to the crotch portion,
    The second design portion is provided with second front and rear edges along the width direction on the side opposite to the crotch portion,
    For the end in the longitudinal direction of the absorbent article, the first front and rear separation distance of the first front and rear edge and the second front and rear separation distance of the second front and rear edge are the same or substantially the same. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 67 to 69, which is set.
  71.  前記一対の第二識別部は、前記展開状態において前記一対の折曲線よりも幅方向外側に配置された
    請求項67~70の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
    71. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 67 to 70, wherein the pair of second identification portions are arranged outside the pair of fold curves in the width direction in the unfolded state.
  72.  前記一対の第二識別部は、非肌面側から視覚的に識別可能である
    請求項67~71の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品
    The absorbent article according to any one of claims 67 to 71, wherein said pair of second identification portions is visually identifiable from a non-skin side.
  73.  前記一対の第二識別部は、前記本体部の肌面側に設けられた立体ギャザーよりも幅方向外側に配置された
    請求項67~71の何れか1項に記載の吸収性物品。
     
    72. The absorbent article according to any one of claims 67 to 71, wherein the pair of second identification portions are arranged outside in a width direction than three-dimensional gathers provided on a skin surface side of the main body portion.
PCT/JP2019/036214 2018-09-13 2019-09-13 Absorbent article WO2020054864A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201980059848.2A CN112689495B (en) 2018-09-13 2019-09-13 Absorbent article

Applications Claiming Priority (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018-171606 2018-09-13
JP2018171606 2018-09-13
JP2018171605 2018-09-13
JP2018-171605 2018-09-13
JP2018-171608 2018-09-13
JP2018171608 2018-09-13
JP2018234436 2018-12-14
JP2018-234436 2018-12-14
JP2018234437 2018-12-14
JP2018-234437 2018-12-14

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020054864A1 true WO2020054864A1 (en) 2020-03-19

Family

ID=69777653

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2019/036215 WO2020054865A1 (en) 2018-09-13 2019-09-13 Absorbent article
PCT/JP2019/036214 WO2020054864A1 (en) 2018-09-13 2019-09-13 Absorbent article

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2019/036215 WO2020054865A1 (en) 2018-09-13 2019-09-13 Absorbent article

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (3) JP7347052B2 (en)
CN (2) CN112714640B (en)
WO (2) WO2020054865A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002017778A (en) * 2000-06-28 2002-01-22 Three M Innovative Properties Co Fastener for throwaway diaper and throwaway diaper using the same
JP2005103178A (en) * 2003-10-02 2005-04-21 Kao Corp Absorbent article
JP2012040244A (en) * 2010-08-20 2012-03-01 Livedo Corporation Disposable diaper
JP2013541376A (en) * 2010-10-08 2013-11-14 ザ プロクター アンド ギャンブル カンパニー Absorbent article having hook and loop fastening system
JP2014144050A (en) * 2013-01-28 2014-08-14 Kao Corp Absorbent article
US20150027624A1 (en) * 2013-07-29 2015-01-29 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Absorbent Article Having A Fastening System

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN100531695C (en) * 2005-10-14 2009-08-26 王子妮飘株式会社 Disposable diaper
US8518006B2 (en) * 2008-05-30 2013-08-27 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Personal wear absorbent article with tab
RU2580990C2 (en) * 2010-11-30 2016-04-10 Као Корпорейшн Disposable diaper and method of its manufacturing

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002017778A (en) * 2000-06-28 2002-01-22 Three M Innovative Properties Co Fastener for throwaway diaper and throwaway diaper using the same
JP2005103178A (en) * 2003-10-02 2005-04-21 Kao Corp Absorbent article
JP2012040244A (en) * 2010-08-20 2012-03-01 Livedo Corporation Disposable diaper
JP2013541376A (en) * 2010-10-08 2013-11-14 ザ プロクター アンド ギャンブル カンパニー Absorbent article having hook and loop fastening system
JP2014144050A (en) * 2013-01-28 2014-08-14 Kao Corp Absorbent article
US20150027624A1 (en) * 2013-07-29 2015-01-29 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Absorbent Article Having A Fastening System

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN112689495B (en) 2022-06-28
JP7423946B2 (en) 2024-01-30
JP2020096784A (en) 2020-06-25
CN112714640B (en) 2022-06-28
CN112714640A (en) 2021-04-27
WO2020054865A1 (en) 2020-03-19
JP7347051B2 (en) 2023-09-20
JP7347052B2 (en) 2023-09-20
CN112689495A (en) 2021-04-20
JP2020096785A (en) 2020-06-25
JP2020096786A (en) 2020-06-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR101633536B1 (en) Disposable wearing article
EP2346461B1 (en) Absorbent article with elastic side panels
JP5102504B2 (en) Absorbent articles
TW201804975A (en) Absorbent article
JP5632261B2 (en) Pants-type disposable diaper
RU2731745C2 (en) Disposable panty-type diaper
JP5441590B2 (en) Pants-type disposable diaper
WO2017212857A1 (en) Pants-type disposable diaper
JP6146763B2 (en) Absorbent articles
JP6027848B2 (en) Absorbent articles
JP5717355B2 (en) Disposable diapers
WO2020054864A1 (en) Absorbent article
JP6180181B2 (en) Absorbent articles
JP2011030792A (en) Disposable diaper and disposable diaper package
JP7119807B2 (en) absorbent article
WO2020246383A1 (en) Absorbent article
JP7163754B2 (en) absorbent article
JP7218170B2 (en) Disposable wearing article
JP2023028060A (en) absorbent article
JP2020099442A5 (en)
JP2020195586A5 (en)

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19860730

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19860730

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1